Skip to main content

Full text of "The Appendix - Out Loud (vol 1, no 3)"

See other formats


The Appendix ,;^ 

A new journal of narrative & experimental history 




Executive Editor 

Christopher Heaney 

Managing Editor 

Felipe Fernandes Cruz 

Creative Editor 

Benjamin Breen 

Publisher 

Brian Jones 


The Appendix 
Volume i, Issue 3 

The Appendix is a quarterly journal 
of experimental and narrative 
history; though at times outlandish, 
everything in its pages is as true 
as the sources allow. The Appendix 
solicits articles from historians, 
writers, and artists committed to 
good storytelling, with an eye for 
the strange and a suspicion of both 
jargon and traditional histories. A 
creature of the web, its format takes 
advantage of the flexibility of hyper- 
text and modern web presentation 
techniques to experiment with and 
explore the process and method of 
writing history. 


Contributors 

Amber Abbas 
Will Buckingham 
Veit Erlmann 
Glynnis Fawkes 
John C. Franklin 
Timothy Fulford 
Glenda Goodman 
Mark Hailwood 
Christopher Heaney 
Brian Jones 
JTW 

Melissa Kagen 
Miriam Kolar 
Bernie Krause 
Mary Caton Fingold 
Jonathan Meiburg 
Zoila S. Mendoza 
Rachel Ozanne 
Michael J. Schmidt 
Danielle Skeehan 
Chris A. Smith 
Cameron B. Strang 
Jonathan Webster 


Subscriptions to The Appendix may be 
purchased at https://theappendix. 
net/subscribe 

Student discounts are available on 
request at support(a)theappendix.net 

The Appendix is published by The 
Appendix, LLC, 1912 Riverview St., 
Austin, TX 78702. 


Contributing Editors 

Amy Kohout 
Michael J. Schmidt 

Copy Editor 

Shannon Nagy 

Design and Layout 

Benjamin Breen 
Brian Jones 

Illustrations 

Benjamin Breen 

Founders 

Benjamin Breen 
Felipe Fernandes Cruz 
Christopher Heaney 
Brian Jones 


Entire contents copyright ©2013 The 
Appendix, LLC. All rights reserved; 
reproduction in whole or in part 
without permission is prohibited. 
We welcome all inquiries at 
editors@theappendix.net 

We accept donations in support of 
The Appendix at 

https://theappendix.net/donations 


CONTENTS 

Out Loud 


3 Letter from the Editors: Issue Three: Out Loud 
5 Letters to The Appendix 

7 Open Source: Happy Birds: Darwin on Avian Song 

1 3 Field Notes: For the Sound of Her Voice 

Amber Abbas 

1 6 Tuned to the Senses: 

An Archaeoacoustic Perspective on Ancient Chavin 

Miriam Kolar 

25 Deadly Notes: Atlantic Soundscapes 
and the Writing of the Middle Passage 

Danielle Skeehan 

3 1 “Come hear this ditty”: Seventeenth-Century 

Drinking Songs and the Challenges of Hearing the Past 

Mark Hailwood 

36 Psalms and Silence: 

The Soundtrack of John Williams’s Captivity 

Glenda Goodman 

41 Supernatural Sound: 

Science and Shamanism in the Arctic 

Tim Fulford 

49 “To Wait Together upon the Lord in Pure Silence” 

Rachel Ozanne 

53 Fiction Excerpt: The Descent of the Lyre 

Will Buckingham 

6 1 Solitude and Sandaya: 

The Strange History of Pianos in Burma 

Jonathan Webster 

67 Listening to the Past: An African-American Lullaby 

Mary Caton Lingold 


74 Inside the American Museum of Natural History’s 
Hidden Masterpiece 

Jonathan Meiburg 

87 Controlling Sound: Musical Torture from the Shoah to 
Guantanamo 

Melissa Kagen 

92 Biophony and the Deep History of Sound 

Bernie Krause 

95 From Folklore to Exotica: Yma Sumac and the 
Performance of Inca Identity 

Zoila S. Mendoza 

1 0 1 “Nancy Grows Up,” the Media Age, and the Historian’s 
Craft 

Michael J. Schmidt 

1 07 Rules of the Tribe: Hardcore Punks and Hair Metal in the 
1980 s 

Chris A. Smith 

1 1 6 Curculionidae: Scolytinae. A Parasitology of Sound 

Veit Erlmann 

1 1 9 Interview with Alexander Rose of the Long Now 
Foundation: 10,000 Years Chiming 

Christopher Heaney 

1 26 Open Sound, Musical Curation, and the Delightful 

Objectness of Wax: Interviews with Light in the Attic and 
Clifford Allen 

Michael J. Schmidt 

1 36 Heavy Metal as Public History: A Review of Turisas, live 
at the Gramercy Theater 

Cameron B. Strang 

1 4 1 Not-So-Lunny Pages: Kinyras 

John C. Franklin and Glynnis Fawkes 

1 57 Not-So-Lunny Pages: The Origins of the Blues 

JTW 

1 62 The Appendix, Appendixed. 

Michael J. Schmidt and Brian Jones 


Letter from the Editors 

Issue Three: Out Loud 



Orpheus Taming Wild Animals, Roman mosaic, 194 CE. 

Wikimedia Commons 


How can we know what the past sounds like? 
When we record the present, what sounds do we 
choose? And how will those choices change the 
histories we tell in the future? 

Historians are in the habit of using sensory met- 
aphors to describe the past. In The Appendix’s pre- 
vious editorial letter, for instance, we wrote about 
“seeing history in our minds’ eyes, listening for its 
voices, hearing its music.” 

This, however, was a mistake. 

What we see and hear are records of past events — 
never the real thing. We might find a metaphor in 
the Greek bronzes whose inlaid eyes of ruby, ivory, 
or obsidian have been replaced by empty sockets. 
Though the dead leave material traces in the fro- 
zen faces of statues, in the words in books, or the 
ghostly voices on LPs, perhaps the act of recording 
failed to capture something fundamental about 
their souls. What is true of the statues might be 


true of every past life: we can never really look 
them in the eye. And we can never hear their voice. 

Or can we? Our contributors find many entry 
points into the history of sound, reconstruct many 
beginnings, and offer many answers to this ques- 
tion. For the naturalist Bernie Krause, the history 
of sound begins before the evolution of Homo sa- 
piens, when our ancestors first developed a sonic 
vocabulary of proto-language and proto-music 
by imitating birdsong and other forms of “bioph- 
ony” (a concept anticipated by Charles Darwin). 
Taking myth as an alternate starting point, John 
Franklin and Glynnis Fawkes offer a visual histo- 
ry of a legendary lyre-player from Ancient Cyprus 
who brought music to humanity, while Will Buck- 
ingham re-imagines the Orphic legend in Bulgar- 
ia. Other pieces zoom in to discover histories of 
sound on a scale both miniature and momentous: 
Michael Schmidt, for instance, reflects on a fa- 
ther’s sonic record of his daughter’s childhood. 

In tracing sonic histories, we have tried to em- 


July 2013 


3 


brace a variety of perspectives. Perhaps the only 
constant in these works is that they emphasize 
the human aspect of sound — an essential starting 
point, since (as the team responsible for the Clock 
of the Long Now know all too well) a bell only 
chimes in the desert if there are ears to hear it. 

But the variety of modes of hearing, and the differ- 
ent ways of producing and using sound in human 
cultures, are dizzying. Sound can be a devastat- 
ing weapon, as Melissa Kagen’s research into the 
history of auditory torture demonstrates. Yet it 
can also be a beacon of humanity, intimacy, and 
warmth: in our Field Notes feature, Amber Abbas 
offers a personal reflection on the voice of her 
grandmother and how it has sustained her memo- 
ry even after her death, while for Mark Hailwood, 
early modern drinking songs offer a window into 
vanished worlds of camaraderie. 

Part of what makes music so important to human 
societies is that it can cross cultures, even as it re- 
tains some essential element of its creator. Mary 
Caton Lingold studies the creole song of an en- 
slaved woman, reconstructing its social function 
in part by learning how to sing it herself. Jonathan 
Webster shows how the import of pianos into 
nineteenth-century Burma created a unique mu- 
sical culture that turned a symbol of Western clas- 
sicism into a medium for a distinctively Burmese 
cultural expression. Zoila Mendoza traces the 
musical legacy of a Peruvian singer and her sig- 
nificance as an indigenous woman on the world 
stage. And moving to 1980s San Francisco, Chris 
Smith ponders what happens when a band that 
forged its persona in a tiny musical subculture 
tries to move beyond its roots. 

William Butler Yeats wrote that “an aged man is 
but a paltry thing ... unless Soul clap its hands 
and sing.” For the poet, as for so many, song was a 
form of redemption, a means by which a soul “fas- 
tened to a dying animal” could escape its cage and 
become purified, redeemed, even immortal. Sev- 
eral of our pieces explore the interstices of song, 
religion, and identity. Glenda Goodman writes 
about a Puritan minister kidnapped by Indian 
and French raiders whose memories of Psalms 
were what held him together as his life collapsed 
around him — and whose musical prejudices led 
him to vilify the French Catholics who tried to 

4 The Appendix Out Loud 


convert him even more than his native captors. 
Moving across the Atlantic to Africa, Danielle 
Skeehan shows us how songs helped newly-cap- 
tured slaves retain their identities in the holds of 
the Middle Passage. 

Despite the richness inherent in histories of 
song, however, we tried to resist allowing music 
to dominate the issue. Human-created melodies, 
after all, are just a tiny outcrop on a vast glacier 
of sound: from the beating of our own hearts in 
our chests to the inarticulate calls of animals, 
most of what we hear is not music, but noise. Jon- 
athan Meiburg takes us to the half-hidden Hall of 
Birds in the American Museum of Natural History, 
where living birdsong has been replaced by silent, 
stuffed mementos. Timothy Fulford writes about 
the haunting sounds of the Arctic Circle, where 
early nineteenth-century Europeans found that 
human voices were transformed by natural phe- 
nomena they didn’t understand, and by the seem- 
ingly miraculous powers of Inuit shamans. And 
Rachel Ozanne brings us a history not of sound, 
but of its absence. 

Not all of the pieces in this issue will harmonize, 
but maybe that’s the point: there’s as much to 
learn in cacophony as in melody. 

We hope you enjoy this exploration of sound over 
the coming months— and will tune in again on 
October 1 for our more improvised next issue, our 
first with no theme. 

Your Appendix editors, 

Benjamin Breen 
Felipe Cruz 
Christopher Heaney 
Brian Jones 


These songs were on repeat for us while we 
pulled this issue together: 

Benjamin Breen 

John Maus — "Hey Moon" 

Felipe Cruz 

Os Mutantes — "Panis et Circensis" 

Christopher Heaney 

Linda Ronstadt— "Willin'" 

Brian Jones 

Texas Tornados— "Soy de San Luis" 


Letters to The Appendix 


Welcome to The Appendix letters page, where we offer letters from the past. 
In honor of this issue’s theme, we’ve scoured magazines and newspapers in 
search 0/ dispatches related to music and sound — including some teenage 
voices in praise of an up-and-coming band called “the Rolling Stones,” an 
1801 report of a curious Persian dance on the Russian steppe, and a traueler’s 
lamentation from 1950s New Orleans. 

As always, we hope they inspire you to write letters of your own — to The 
Appendix and to parties deserving and otherwise. 

— The Editors 


“Hear That Big Sound,” Life Magazine, 
11 June 1965, 25. 

Sirs: 

I am one 15-year-old girl to whom this so- 
called big sound is more like nerve shattering. 
All these groups do is make weird sounds, like 
my 8-year-old brother makes free of charge. 

DENISE MURRAY 
Framingham, Mass. 

Sirs: 

I must disagree with your phrase, “As of this 
week her favorite group is the Rolling Stones.” 
I have been president of their Chicago fan 
club for over a year now. And the Stones are 
neither “scruffy” nor “surly.” 

Also, I consider my greatest so-called “trou- 
ble” at a teen concert to be Jan. 29, when I met 
an adorable long-haired Stones fan named 
Barry, whom I have not been able to locate 
since. 

TRISH FOLLETT 
Lombard, 111 . 


“One Hand Claps,” Black Belt, July 
1966, 66. 

As Mr. Kei Tsumura says in his article on Hai- 
ku poetry (May, 1966), the Haiku which con- 
tains the lines, “... the mighty ovation/Of one 
hand clapping,” may be expressing disillu- 
sionment about the fleeting glory of death on 
the battlefield. On the other hand, the sound 
of one hand clapping reverberates through 
Koan exercises used in the enlightenment of 
Zen Buddhists. 

Whatever is that sound — and it may be as the 
image reflected by an empty mirror — it is no 
more the sound of futility than is the roar of 
waves beating endlessly against the beaches 
of the oceans of the world. It will be the sound 
both of the final implosion of this universe 
and the explosion beginning the next. Any- 
way, it’s not futility. 

CHRISTOPHER DUNCAN 
Jeffersonville, Ind. 


''l\* 


July 2013 


5 


“Description of the Wardish-Game, 
or Public Gymnastic Exercises of the 
Persians,” Monthly Magazine and Brit- 
ish Register 9 (July 1, 1801) : 543-544. 

I had some time ago an opportunity here in 
Astrachan of being present at a Persian spec- 
tacle; which I recollect to have before seen in 
Masanderan, but not so perfect ... 

The Wardish-players usually assemble very 
early in the morning; and as soon as a suf- 
ficient number is arrived, the exercises 
commence. The players, having previously 
stripped themselves quite naked, and put on a 
pair of wide breeches reaching no lower than 
the knee, step forth to the sound of the music 
into the middle of the arena; and then their 
gymnastic exercises begin in the following 
manner: They first all place themselves in a 
row on their heads and feet, and endeavour 
by stretchings and distortions of the body, 
during which some times the most indecent 
postures occur, to rend every part thereof 
more pliant. They all at once jump up, form 
a circle, hold one foot up, and hop round in 
a circle on the other, whilst with both hands 
they incessantly strike their thighs. After this 
they alter their position, so that, instead of 
going round in a circle, they hop in a straight 
line from one end of the arena to the other, 
either across or lengthwise, and as often as 
they approach the wall, they beat time to the 
music by striking backwards with one of their 
feet a board leaning against it ... 

The chief art of the Wardish game consists 
in this, that all the movements of the body 
are regulated by the music. There are there- 
fore particular masters who give instructions 
in the art: and it is generally believed, that it 
is an exercise beneficial not only to those in 
health, but likewise to invalids, especially to 
such as labour under diseases arising from an 
obstructed perspiration. 

M. VON HABLITZ’L 
Petersburg, Russia 


Though not a proper letter to the editor, we 
also wanted to share Issue 3 guest editor Mi- 
chael Schmidt’s archival find: an August 6, 
1949 letter from Hugues Panassie (probably 
the most influential jazz critic before 1945) 
responding to interview questions from a 
German collector and pianist, Gunter Boas. 
In fractured English, Boas eagerly inquires 
about his correspondent’s recent trip to New 
Orleans, only to be rebuffed by a rather dis- 
appointed-sounding Panassie, who, remark- 
ably, complains that Mardi Gras prevented 
him from hearing brass bands! 

Dear Mr. Panassie how is the situation with the 
REAL JAZZ in New Orleans today? Have You heard 
some brass bands? Please tell me some impressions 
You had in New Orleans. 

I did not hear any brass band. I only stayed 
one day in N.O. and it was the Mardi-Gras, so 
I did not hear much. I only heard there Louis 
[Armstrong’s] band and Cousin Joe, who is a 
great blues singer. 

During the Mardi-Gras, I heard through a 
loud-speaker a trumpet player who sounded 
a lot like King Oliver and Tommy Lednier but 
could not locate him. Some people told me 
that there was still fine N.O. style musicians 
in N.O. but in most of the night-clubs you 
only hear the current “modern” stuff. What is 
left in the South is mostly great blues singers. 

Have you visit [sic] the Nick’s and Condon’s? Who 
was playing there? 

I did not go Nick’s but I went to Condon’s. I 
don’t like that kind of music. Wild Bill David- 
son, Ralph Sutton, Arthur Troppier, Peanuts 
Huckoo, George Bruenie were playing at Gor- 
don’s. I did not like the band at all. 


6 


The Appendix Out Loud 


•1-J1Z i.’MJJ :« A 

Happy Birds: Darwin on Avian Song 


In the beginning was the Squawk, and the Squawk 
was with Song, and the Squawk was Sony. 

We humans were not the jirst to communicate. In 
/act, as we explore in this issue of The Appendix, 
we may haue learned how to communicate usiny 
sound/rom our distant relatives and predecessors, the 
animal species that populated Earth for hundreds of 
millions of years before us. Specifically, birds, whose 
evolution likely began from dinosaurs in the Jurassic. 

For the Open Source 0/ our ‘Out Loud’ issue, we’ve 
selected a passage from a thinker whose work briny s 
out the bird-to-human evolutionary connection: the 
Englishman Charles Darwin (1809-1882). Thouyh 
hardly obscure, Darwin’s work is not often read in 
the oriyinal. This is a shame, as Darwin was not just 
the naturalist whom we most associate with natural 
selection and evolution, but also a fascinatingly con- 
troversial observer of humanity.* 



The following passage is taken/rom The Descent 
of Man, and Selection in Relation to Sex, pub- 
lished in 1871, which aryued that humans are ani- 
mals, and that sexual selection explains the seeming- 
ly impractical features 0/ humans and animals alike. 
Althouyh subsequent scholars have questioned some 
of Darwin’s conclusions (aryuiny that sex was also 
important as a social/unction, and thatyarish colors 
and behaviors also served as warniny mechanisms) 
perhaps the most radical implications of the work lay 
in the realm of race. Darwin was a staunch proponent 
of the idea that human races were of the same species, 
not of different species as many race scientists of the 
nineteenth century claimed, and that exterior differ- 
ences were superficial. 


Yet as the following passage shows, even while writ- 
ing about birds, Darwin was a man of his time. He 
held firm views on the differences between civilization 
and savagery in their customs, and between the roles 
of males and females. Whether or not Darwin chan- 
neled racist prejudice or happily anticipated the ex- 
tinction of “savage races," he indeed asked questions 
that would soon be put to darker interpretations, such 
as Social Darwinism, and what came to be called eu- 
yenics. 

This passaye, however, sings with briyht insight, 
some teasing am biyuity, and some very /unny 
ylimpses of the behavior of nineteenth-century natu- 
ral historians. (It seems that English scientists swung 
birdcages about their heads with some regularity.) 


“Alfred Russel Wallace also developed the theory of evolution by natural selection through his research in the Amazon and the 
Malay Peninsula. Wallace sent Darwin a paper, "On the Law which has Regulated the Introduction of New Species," which 
prompted Darwin to write up his own theories, which became On the Origin of the Species, published in 1 859. Wallace's 
theories subtly differed from Darwin — Darwin emphasized competition, and Wallace emphasized adaptation to the natural 
environmental system — but Wallace's fame as natural selection's co-revealer faded after his death. He was poor and an outsid- 
er. In recent years, however, there has been a well-deserved spate of critical interest in Wallace and his work, including Daniel 
Mason's magical short work of historical fiction, "The ecstasy of Alfred Russel Wallace." 


July 2013 


7 


Though ostensibly about birds and their vocal and instru- 
mental music, it is as much about human interaction, and 
the emotion, /ear, and sexual attraction that humans and 
birds share. Be it romanticism or insight, Darwin himself 
leaues the door open for argument. The facts are one thing, 
but when it comes to interpretation — of theory, of song — 
we might chalk up our different opinions on Darwin to that 
underestimated but delightful factor of natural history: 
taste. 

One person’s savage notes are another’s symphony. 


Vocal and Instrumental Music* 

ith birds the voice serves to express var- 
ious emotions, such as distress, fear, 
anger, triumph, or mere happiness. It 
is apparently sometimes used to excite 
terror, as in the case of the hissing noise 
made by some nestling-birds. Audubon 
relates that a night-heron (Ardea nycti corax, Linn.), 
which he kept tame, used to hide itself when a cat 
approached, and then “suddenly start up uttering 
one of the most frightful cries, apparently enjoy- 
ing the cat’s alarm and flight.” The common do- 
mestic cock clucks to the hen, and the hen to her 
chickens, when a dainty morsel is found. The hen, 
when she has laid an egg, “repeats the same note 
very often, and concludes with the sixth above, 
which she holds for a longer time”; and thus she 
expresses her joy. Some social birds apparent- 
ly call to each other for aid; and as they flit from 
tree to tree, the flock is kept together by chirp an- 
swering chirp. During the nocturnal migrations of 
geese and other water-fowl, sonorous clangs from 
the van may be heard in the darkness overhead, 
answered by clangs in the rear. Certain cries serve 
as danger signals, which, as the sportsman knows 
to his cost, are understood by the same species 
and by others. The domestic cock crows, and the 
humming-bird chirps, in triumph over a defeated 
rival. The true song, however, of most birds and 
various strange cries are chiefly uttered during the 
breeding-season, and serve as a charm, or merely 

*The following passage is taken from Charles Darwin, The 
Descent of Man: And Selection in Relation to Sex, London: 
John Murrary, 1 871 , pp. 51-68. Although Darwin was 
meticulous with his sources, we've mostly removed his 
footnotes for space considerations. 


as a call-note, to the other sex. 

Naturalists are much divided with respect to the 
object of the singing of birds. Few more careful 
observers ever lived than Montagu, and he main- 
tained that the “males of songbirds and of many 
others do not in general search for the female, 
but, on the contrary, their business in the spring is 
to perch on some conspicuous spot, breathing out 
their full and armorous notes, which, by instinct, 
the female knows, and repairs to the spot to choose 
her mate.” Mr. Jenner Weir informs me that this is 
certainly the case with the nightingale. Bechstein, 
who kept birds during his whole life, asserts, “that 
the female canary always chooses the best sing- 
er, and that in a state of nature the female finch 
selects that male out of a hundred whose notes 
please her most.” There can be no doubt that birds 
closely attend to each other’s song. Mr. Weir has 
told me of the case of a bullfinch which had been 
taught to pipe a German waltz, and who was so 
good a performer that he cost ten guineas; when 
this bird was first introduced into a room where 
other birds were kept and he began to sing, all the 
others, consisting of about twenty linnets and ca- 
naries, ranged themselves on the nearest side of 
their cages, and listened with the greatest interest 
to the new performer. Many naturalists believe 
that the singing of birds is almost exclusively “the 
effect of rivalry and emulation,” and not for the 
sake of charming their mates. This was the opin- 
ion of Daines Barrington and White of Selborne, 
who both especially attended to this subject. Bar- 
rington, however, admits that “superiority in song 
gives to birds an amazing ascendancy over others, 
as is well known to bird-catchers.” 

It is certain that there is an intense degree of rivalry 
between the males in their singing. Bird-fanciers 
match their birds to see which will sing longest; 
and I was told by Mr. Yarrell that a first-rate bird 
will sometimes sing till he drops down almost 
dead, or according to Bechstein, quite dead from 
rupturing a vessel in the lungs. Whatever the cause 
may be, male birds, as I hear from Mr. Weir, often 
die suddenly during the season of song. That the 
habit of singing is sometimes quite independent 
of love is clear, for a sterile, hybrid canary-bird has 
been described as singing whilst viewing itself in a 
mirror, and then dashing at its own image; it like- 
wise attacked with fury a female canary, when put 


8 


The Appendix Out Loud 


into the same cage. The jealousy excited by 
the act of singing is constantly taken advan- 
tage of by bird-catchers; a male in good song, 
is hidden and protected, whilst a stuffed bird, 
surrounded by limed twigs, is exposed to 
view. In this manner, as Mr. Weir informs me, 
a man has in the course of a single day caught 
fifty, and in one instance, seventy, male chaf- 
finches. The power and inclination to sing 
differ so greatly with birds that although the 
price of an ordinary male chaffinch is only 
sixpence, Mr. Weir saw one bird for which the 
bird-catcher asked three pounds; the test of 
a really good singer being that it will contin- 
ue to sing whilst the cage is swung round the 
owner’s head. 

That male birds should sing from emulation 
as well as for charming the female, is not at 
all incompatible; and it might have been ex- 
pected that these two habits would have con- 
curred, like those of display and pugnacity. 


Some authors, however, argue that the song 
of the male cannot serve to charm the female, 
because the females of some few species, 
such as of the canary, robin, lark, and bull- 
finch, especially when in a state of widow- 
hood, as Bechstein remarks, pour forth fairly 
melodious strains. In some of these cases the 
habit of singing may be in part attributed to 
the females having been highly fed and con- 
fined, for this disturbs all the functions con- 
nected with the reproduction of the species. 
Many instances have already been given of the 
partial transference of secondary masculine 
characters to the female, so that it is not at 
all surprising that the females of some spe- 
cies should possess the power of song. It has 
also been argued, that the song of the male 
cannot serve as a charm, because the males 
of certain species, for instance of the robin, 
sing during the autumn. But nothing is more 
common than for animals to take pleasure 
in practising whatever instinct they follow 

Aquatint of the Fox River by Karl Bodmer, 1 839. 

Wikimedia Commons 





/ r a'T® D r 

WT'-f- 



ft 



( I V. \ f V 





\ \ t/i 



July 2013 


9 


at other times for some real good. How often do 
we see birds which fly easily, gliding and sailing 
through the air obviously for pleasure? The cat 
plays with the captured mouse, and the cormo- 
rant with the captured fish. The weaver-bird (Plo- 
ceus), when confined in a cage, amuses itself by 
neatly weaving blades of grass between the wires 
of its cage. Birds which habitually fight during the 
breeding-season are generally ready to fight at all 
times; and the males of the capercailzie some- 
times hold their Balzen or leks at the usual place 
of assemblage during the autumn. Hence it is not 
at all surprising that male birds should continue 
singing for their own amusement after the season 
for courtship is over. 

As shown in a previous chapter, singing is to a 
certain extent an art, and is much improved by 
practice. Birds can be taught various tunes, and 
even the unmelodious sparrow has learnt to sing 
like a linnet. They acquire the song of their foster 
parents, and sometimes that of their neighbours. 
All the common songsters belong to the Order of 
Insessores, and their vocal organs are much more 
complex than those of most other birds; yet it is 
a singular fact that some of the Insessores, such 
as ravens, crows, and magpies, possess the prop- 
er apparatus, though they never sing, and do not 
naturally modulate their voices to any great ex- 
tent. Hunter asserts that with the true songsters 
the muscles of the larynx are stronger in the males 
than in the females; but with this slight excep- 
tion there is no difference in the vocal organs of 
the two sexes, although the males of most species 
sing so much better and more continuously than 
the females.* 

It is remarkable that only small birds properly 
sing. The Australian genus Menura, however, must 
be excepted; for the Menura alberti, which is about 
the size of a half-grown turkey, not only mocks 
other birds, but “its own whistle is exceedingly 
beautiful and varied.” The males congregate and 
form “corroborying places,” where they sing, rais- 
ing and spreading their tails like peacocks, and 
drooping their wings. It is also remarkable that 
birds which sing well are rarely decorated with 

*Dureau de la Malle gives a curious instance ( Annales des 
Sc. Nat., 3rd series, Zoolog., tom. x., p. 118) of some wild 
blackbirds in his garden in Paris, which naturally learnt a 
republican air from a caged bird. 


brilliant colours or other ornaments. Of our Brit- 
ish birds, excepting the bullfinch and goldfinch, 
the best songsters are plain-coloured. The king- 
fisher, bee-eater, roller, hoopoe, wood-peckers, 
&c., utter harsh cries; and the brilliant birds of the 
tropics are hardly ever songsters. Hence bright co- 
lours and the power of song seem to replace each 
other. We can perceive that if the plumage did not 
vary in brightness, or if bright colours were dan- 
gerous to the species, other means would be em- 
ployed to charm the females; and melody of voice 
offers one such means. 

It is often difficult to conjecture whether the many 
strange cries and notes uttered by male birds 
during the breeding-season serve as a charm or 
merely as a call to the female. The soft cooing of 
the turtle-dove and of many pigeons, it may be 
presumed, pleases the female. When the female 
of the wild turkey utters her call in the morning, 
the male answers by a note which differs from the 
gobling noise made, when with erected feathers, 
rustling wings and distended wattles, he puffs 
and struts before her. The spel of the black-cock 
certainly serves as a call to the female, for it has 
been known to bring four or five females from a 
distance to a male under confinement; but as the 
black-cock continues his spel for hours during 
successive days, and in the case of the caper- 
cailzie “with an agony of passion,” we are led to 
suppose that the females which are present are 
thus charmed. The voice of the common rook is 
known to alter during the breeding-season, and 
is therefore in some way sexual. But what shall 
we say about the harsh screams of, for instance, 
some kinds of macaws; have these birds as bad 
taste for musical sounds as they apparently have 
for colour, judging by the inharmonious contrast 
of their bright yellow and blue plumage? It is in- 
deed possible that without any advantage being 
thus gained, the loud voices of many male birds 
may be the result of the inherited effects of the 
continued use of their vocal organs when excited 
by the strong passions of love, jealousy and rage; 
but to this point we shall recur when we treat of 
quadrupeds. 


10 


The Appendix Out Loud 


We have as yet spoken only of the voice, but 
the males of various birds practise, during 
their courtship, what may be called instru- 
mental music. Peacocks and birds of para- 
dise rattle their quills together. Turkey-cocks 
scrape their wings against the ground, and 
some kinds of grouse thus produce a buzz- 
ing sound. Another North American grouse, 
the Tetrao umbellus, when with his tail erect, 
his ruffs displayed, “he shows off his finery 
to the females, who lie hid in the neighbour- 
hood,” drums by rapidly striking his wings 
together above his back, according to Mr. R. 
Haymond, and not, as Audubon thought, by 
striking them against his sides. The sound 
thus produced is compared by some to dis- 
tant thunder, and by others to the quick roll 
of a drum. The female never drums, “but 
flies directly to the place where the male is 
thus engaged.” The male of the Kalij -pheas- 
ant, in the Himalayas, often makes a singular 
drumming noise with his wings, not unlike 
the sound produced by shaking a stiff piece 
of cloth.” On the west coast of Africa the lit- 
tle black-weavers (Ploceus?) congregate in a 
small party on the bushes round a small open 
space, and sing and glide through the air with 
quivering wings, “which make a rapid whir- 
ring sound like a child’s rattle.” One bird af- 
ter another thus performs for hours togeth- 
er, but only during the courting-season. At 
this season, and at no other time, the males 
of certain night-jars (Caprimukjus) make a 
strange booming noise with their wings. The 
various species of woodpeckers strike a sono- 
rous branch with their beaks, with so rapid a 
vibratory movement that “the head appears 
to be in two places at once.” The sound thus 
produced is audible at a considerable dis- 
tance but cannot be described; and I feel 
sure that its source would never be conjec- 
tured by any one hearing it for the first time. 
As this jarring sound is made chiefly during 
the breeding-season, it has been considered 
as a love-song; but it is perhaps more strict- 
ly a love-call. The female, when driven from 
her nest, has been observed thus to call her 
mate, who answered in the same manner and 



"The male hoopoe... first draws in air, and then taps the end of its beak 
perpendicularly down against a stone or the trunk of a tree." 

Wikimedia Commons 


soon appeared. Lastly, the male hoopoe (Up- 
up a epops) combines vocal and instrumental 
music; for during the breeding-season this 
bird, as Mr. Swinhoe observed, first draws in 
air, and then taps the end of its beak perpen- 
dicularly down against a stone or the trunk of 
a tree, “when the breath being forced down 
the tubular bill produces the correct sound.” 
If the beak is not thus struck against some ob- 
ject, the sound is quite different. Air is at the 
same time swallowed, and the oesophagus 
thus becomes much swollen; and this proba- 
bly acts as a resonator, not only with the hoo- 
poe, but with pigeons and other birds. 

In the foregoing cases sounds are made by 
the aid of structures already present and oth- 
erwise necessary; but in the following cases 
certain feathers have been specially modified 
for the express purpose of producing sounds. 
The drumming, bleating, neighing, or thun- 
dering noise (as expressed by different ob- 
servers) made by the common snipe (Scolopax 
gallinago) must have surprised every one who 
has ever heard it. This bird, during the pair- 
ing-season, flies to “perhaps a thousand feet 
in height,” and after zig-zagging about for a 
time descends to the earth in a curved line, 
with outspread tail and quivering pinions, 
and surprising velocity. The sound is emitted 


1 1 


July 2013 


only during this rapid descent. No one was 
able to explain the cause until M. Meves ob- 
served that on each side of the tail the outer 
feathers are peculiarly formed, having a stiff 
sabre-shaped shaft with the oblique barbs of 
unusual length, the outer webs being strongly 
bound together. He found that by blowing on 
these feathers, or by fastening them to a long 
thin stick and waving them rapidly through 
the air, he could reproduce the drumming 
noise made by the living bird. Both sexes are 
furnished with these feathers, but they are 
generally larger in the male than in the fe- 
male, and emit a deeper note. In some spe- 
cies, as in S. frenata, four feathers, and in 
S. jauensis, no less than eight on each side of 
the tail are greatly modified. Different tones 
are emitted by the feathers of the different 
species when waved through the air; and the 
Scolopox imlsonii of the United States makes a 
switching noise whilst descending rapidly to 
the earth. 

Lastly, in several species of a sub-genus of 
Pipra or manakin, the males, as described by 
Mr. Sclater, have their secondary wing-feath- 
ers modified in a still more remarkable man- 
ner. In the brilliantly-coloured P. deliciosa the 
first three secondaries are thick-stemmed 
and curved towards the body; in the fourth 
and fifth the change is greater; and in the 
sixth and seventh the shaft “is thickened to an 
extraordinary degree, forming a solid horny 
lump.” The barbs also are greatly changed in 
shape, in comparison with the corresponding 
feathers in the female. Even the bones of the 
wing, which support these singular feathers 
in the male, are said by Mr. Fraser to be much 
thickened. These little birds make an extraor- 
dinary noise, the first “sharp note being not 
unlike the crack of a whip.” 

The diversity of the sounds, both vocal and in- 
strumental, made by the males of many birds 
during the breeding-season, and the diversity 
of the means for producing such sounds, are 
highly remarkable. We thus gain a high idea 
of their importance for sexual purposes, and 


are reminded of the conclusion arrived at as to 
insects. It is not difficult to imagine the steps 
by which the notes of a bird, primarily used as 
a mere call or for some other purpose, might 
have been improved into a melodious love 
song. In the case of the modified feathers, by 
which the drumming, whistling, or roaring 
noises are produced, we know that some birds 
during their courtship flutter, shake, or rattle 
their unmodified feathers together; and if the 
females were led to select the best perform- 
ers, the males which possessed the strongest 
or thickest, or most attenuated feathers, sit- 
uated on any part of the body, would be the 
most successful; and thus by slow degrees 
the feathers might be modified to almost any 
extent. The females, of course, would not no- 
tice each slight successive alteration in shape, 
but only the sounds thus produced. It is a cu- 
rious fact that in the same class of animals, 
sounds so different as the drumming of the 
snipe’s tail, the tapping of the woodpecker’s 
beak, the harsh trumpet-like cry of certain 
water-fowl, the cooing of the turtle-dove, 
and the song of the nightingale, should all be 
pleasing to the females of the several species. 
But we must not judge of the tastes of distinct 
species by a uniform standard; nor must we 
judge by the standard of man’s taste. Even 
with man, we should remember what discor- 
dant noises, the beating of tom-toms and the 
shrill notes of reeds, please the ears of savag- 
es. Sir S. Baker remarks, that “as the stomach 
of the Arab prefers the raw meat and reeking 
liver taken hot from the animal, so does his 
ear prefer his equally coarse and discordant 
music to all other.” 


12 


The Appendix Out Loud 


For the Sound of Her Voice 

Amber Abbas 


My grandmother’s voice was not sweet. It did 
not tell bedtime stories or offer advice. It grated, 
barked orders. As a child, the only thing it said 
that I could understand was something like, “very 
good,” uttered when I came downstairs for break- 
fast, jet-lagged and starving, during our family 
vacations in Pakistan. I always took that “bahut ac- 
cha” [very good] to mean “You look pretty today!” 
I would smile shyly, hug my grandmother, and 
sit down in my spot at the other end of the table, 
usually on one of the stools shaped like giant dice. 
Fried eggs and kabobs would follow, or my favor- 
ite puris with coarse sugar. 

These meals were full of voices, most of which I 
could not understand. There was Amma Rasoola, 
the cook, shouting from the kitchen; Baji, my 
father’s older sister, sweating from the heat and 
calling in a diabetic wheeze for extra green chilies. 
Bleary-eyed cousins whining for omelette. Chai! 
Pani! Rasoola! Rasoola! We sat for hours around 
this table, eating in shifts as waves of family awoke 
or arrived in celebration of our visit from abroad. 
These hours were filled with laughter, stories, 
plans, and more chai, more chai. They are happy 
memories, punctuated by anxieties of disorien- 
tation, the impossibility of conversation, and an 
upset stomach. 

Through it all cut my grandmother’s voice, 
scratchy and shrill (its harshness the result of a 
decades-ago thyroid surgery). It became a mystery 
for me to unravel. After years of partly loathing 
those trips to Pakistan, the sound of her voice led 
me to dedicate myself to learning Urdu, listening 


to the stories of my family members and others 
who remembered the terrible days of the Indian 
partition when they left homes in India for the 
promises of a Pakistan that was as yet unknown 
and unknowable. 

Voices have since become the core of my research 
on the Indian partition and the creation of Pa- 
kistan. I have interviewed over seventy people, 
made recordings I have listened to again and 
again, transcribed and read and re-read. Tran- 
scribing is hard and time-consuming, but reading 
a transcript is easier (read: faster) than listening 
to a full interview. 

Yet, when I find something in a transcript that I 
want to use, I almost always return to the audio 
first. The recording offers context as the tran- 
script almost never does. In early 2008 I recorded 
four sisters in the days after the assassination of 
Benazir Bhutto, and the birds chirping in the gar- 
den that January morning belie the somber tone 
of our meeting. The hum of an air conditioner or a 
ceiling fan reminds me of the heat during a partic- 
ular interview; a narrator’s constant sneezing and 
sniffling speaks to his generosity as he spoke with 
me despite suffering a terrible allergic attack. The 
sound, then, brings the conversation alive and 
reminds me, as a researcher, how fundamentally 
different this work is than my work in the archive. 

Above all, though, the meaning, forme, resides in 
the voice. It is there that I first and finally come to 
understand the story. The voice hesitates before a 
painful memory; it spills mirth when remember- 


An audio excerpt of Amber Abbas's interview with her 
grandmother is available at http://appendic.es/m/n 


July 2013 


13 



Begum Birjis Abbas, the grandmother of the author. 


ing childhood mischief. I can hear it smile, or 
stifle a smile, or signal tears about to come. 
The voices of my narrators betray their age, 
breathing heavily, or coughing, or laughing; 
the physical and emotional strain of the ex- 
perience is captured on the tape. The voice 
communicates the texture of life’s experi- 
ence, sometimes smooth, sometimes coarse. 
One narrator recounted his life story in a near 
whisper, and I have since come to understand 
it as a story thick with regret. Some people 
nearly shout as they defend their choices, 
producing evidence (I let the recording run 
as they leave the room, return with crackling 
sheaves of paper); many speak slowly, and 
carefully, cognizant of the recording, the pub- 
lic telling of a private tale. The voice, with its 
stops and starts, guides the story, embodies 
it. 

My young cousin became interested in the 
interviews I was doing. Twice a week in 2005 
and 2006 I interviewed our great uncle, a re- 
tired general, and when I came home, my 
cousin would ask, “What did he say?” As I re- 
counted the stories, we sometimes consulted 
our grandmother, our Dadi; her versions were 
sometimes different. The general’s beloved 
uncle and mentor was , to her, a man who hat- 
ed education for girls, and the reason she had 
to sneak her younger sisters out to school. 
She herself was only educated at home, by a 
governess, but the English she learned then 
had long since faded. 

I have interviewed over seventy people in 
three countries, but I only interviewed my 
grandmother once. The story she told was 
relational, profoundly gendered, and tells a 
story of perpetual disruption. 


14 


The Appendix Out Loud 



What do you remember about your house in 
Aligarh? 

I remember our house. My father’s broth- 
er, my father’s mother, my father’s father; 
my uncle, my grandmother, my grandfa- 
ther. My father’s sisters. 

I asked about her house, 
but she told us about home. 

She clears her throat. It sounds like choking. 

Do you remember any special story? 

I don’t remember any special story. My 
grandfather, my father, everyone lived 
together. Everyone lived together in one 
house. I was twelve ... when my grand- 
father died. I was only twelve when my 
grandfather died. 

After she tells us how important it was for ev- 
eryone to be together, recounting a long list 
of relatives showing how large and close her 
family was, she marks the first disruption. 
She was twelve when all of that changed. 

When did you meet Vakil Sahib (our grandfa- 
ther)? 

He lived there. He was in the College. He 
lived in our house. He was from outside, 
from Nagpur, Nagpur. After, he came for 
the wedding. He came to get married. 

Did you rnant to come to Pakistan? 

No. When everyone came, everyone from 
the house had come. They also brought 
me. I could not stay alone. They brought 
me, too. 

A sigh, more like a heave. 

This is one of the only interviews I have ever 
done in which a narrator says, “No.” Did she 
consider staying? Did she want to stay? 

There is a long silence. 


What do you remember about Vakil Sahib? We 
didn’t know him, we don’t remember him. 
Hainh? What do I remember? He was 
good, he was a good man. He was very 
beautiful, very admirable. He played 
bridge. He went to the Club. He played 
bridge a lot. 

I laugh. 

My father tells stories about riding his 
bicycle to pick up his father from the bridge 
tables at two in the morning. He never told 
me that it was because my grandfather was 
so good at bridge! 

When he mas gone, what did you do? 

Nothing. I kept sitting in our house, with 
the children, with the children. 

When your sons went to America, were you sad? 

I was so distressed. It was so distressing. 
They didn’t communicate. Communica- 
tion was abandoned ... It was so distress- 
ing. They were all alone. 

She sounds troubled remembering this. I 
am evidence of that departure, that aban- 
donment, but also the reconnection that 
followed, though neither of these sons lived 
again in Pakistan. And then, having remem- 
bered it, she’s done. Bas. Enough. She tells us 
to turn off the tape. 


I only interviewed my grandmother once be- 
fore she died in 2007, but it is her voice that 
I hear in my head, with all of her tics, her 
groans, her wheezes. It is not a beautiful 
voice, but it was, it is, my muse. 


July 2013 


15 


Tuned to the Senses: 

An Archaeoacoustic Perspective on 
Ancient Chavin 

Miriam Kolar 


Sound and Archaeology 

Buttressed into the Peruvian Andes, the ancient 
mortared-stone complex at Chavin de Huantar 
resonates with sound and story. Visitors to this 
3,000-year-old ceremonial center frequently don’t 
notice the isolating silence and surprising reso- 
nances of its labyrinthine interior architecture. 
Site acoustics don’t stand out in the conspicuous 
manner of reverberant cathedrals, and architec- 
tural sound isn’t something most people pay at- 
tention to anyway, since we’re used to tuning out 
background noise. 

Sound, both heard and felt, dynamically connects 
us to the physical world through sensory and 
cognitive interaction. We’re not always thinking 
about what we hear or feel, yet sound is an en- 
vironmental channel for information about the 
world around us. Sonic experience is most obvi- 
ously rooted in listening, but it’s not only about 
the ears, and individual background and attention 
shape many aspects of our perception of sound. 

Over the past six years, I’ve measured Chavin’s 
acoustics and conducted human auditory per- 
ceptual experiments aimed at understanding the 
role sound played at ancient Chavin. “Integrative 
archaeoacoustics” brings together tools and tech- 
niques from acoustics, audio engineering, percep- 
tual psychology, anthropology, computer science, 
and other fields in a novel approach to exploring 
ephemeral aspects of past life. In my work, scien- 
tific method guides theory and measurement, but 
I have to consider the subjective possibilities that 
physical dynamics — such as acoustics — create 
for human experience. If I were to summarize my 
expertise, I might say “cultural acoustics.” I focus 
on understanding how sound influences people, 
what people do with sound, and what this means 
for humans as individuals and social beings. 


Archaeologists toe a wavering line: as profession- 
als, we strive to present a transparent account of 
our explorations and discoveries, but at the same 
time, we’re compelled to create narratives that ex- 
plain our activities and motivations. We report on 
findings, produce interpretations. Sometimes we 
find ways to communicate the ambiguities of this 
terrain, but often our interpretations are mistak- 
en for direct knowledge of the ancient past. How- 
ever archaeological findings might be presented 
and understood, material culture is the entryway. 
With its well-preserved architecture and intact, 
sound-producing/musical instruments, the an- 
cient pilgrimage center at Chavin provides the 
multifaceted material evidence needed for an ar- 
chaeoacoustic case study. 


Ancient Instruments Sound Again 

What does it mean to excavate a musical instru- 
ment from its resting place of three millennia? 

Archaeologist John Rick and his teams had the 
great fortune — and brilliant insight — to uncover a 
cache of twenty decorated Strombus galeatus conch 
shell ‘trumpets’ in 2001 at Chavin, a Peruvian na- 
tional monument and UNESCO World Heritage 
site that welcomes visitors. These intact pututus — 
as musical horns of marine snail shell form are 
called there now — were the first ceremonially as- 
sociated sound-producing instruments to be ex- 
cavated at Chavin, and the only ones known from 
its extensive lithic art. 1 

The stunning preservation of these pututus 
meant that they could be handled carefully and 
even played. Rick first called on his experience as 


16 


The Appendix Out Loud 



The author, making acoustic measurements of the stone-and-mortar surface of "Building A" 
in the ancient ceremonial complex at Chavin de Huantar, Peru. 

Jose Luis Cruzado Coronel 


an avocational musician to document the readily 
blown tones of the instruments, using the guitar 
tuner he had on hand. Later, he sought the exper- 
tise of sound specialists: Peruvian musicologists 
and musicians, as well as California acoustician 
David Lubman, brought their present-day per- 
spectives to assess the overall sonic potential of 
the shell horns. One ofRick’s then-undergraduate 
advisees, Parker VanValkenburgh, took on a mor- 
phological and iconographical study of the instru- 
ments as his honors thesis project, an ambitious 



Peruvian master musician and instrument builder Tito La Rosa per- 
forms with one of the Chavin pututus to demonstrate the musical 
potential of the ancient shell horns during a research session at the 
Museo Nacional Chavin in 2008. 

Jose Luis Cruzado Coronel 


and productive study that illuminated plausible 
regional interconnections. Using a range of ap- 
proaches, Rick’s team began working to docu- 
ment the pututus and understand their relation- 
ship with Chavin. 

Implications of the Chavin Strombus horn discov- 
ery traverse the historical timeline. We can date 
these pututus with excavation stratigraphy in 
terms of deposition era, and their markings from 
hand and lip wear indicate long-term use. What 
they represent in terms of site knowledge is im- 
portant: instruments excavated from ceremonial 
architecture — and prominently depicted in its 
graphic record — can be contextually associated 
with site ritual. These ancient shell horns are in- 
tact and playable, so they might be performed well 
into the future. This is especially important from 
a methodological point-of-view, because develop- 
ing technologies can reveal new forms of evidence 
as tools change, a possibility Rick is constantly 
considering . 2 

Given Rick’s investigatory savvy, it’s no surprise 
that a few years after unearthing the Chavin pu- 
tutus, he found a way to make them sound again, 
this time for the purpose of exploring and docu- 
menting their range of acoustic potential. Enter 
researchers from Stanford University’s Center for 


July 2013 


17 



Computer Research in Music and Acoustics 
(CCRMA), including then-Princeton comput- 
er science/music professor and shell instru- 
ment player Perry Cook. Our starting point 
was the pututus, but project organizer and 
CCRMA founder John Chowning also sought 
to incorporate his colleagues’ expertise in 
spatial acoustics and computational acoustic 
modeling, areas dear to faculty math-and-en- 
gineering wizards, Jonathan Abel and Julius 
Smith. 



Chavin iconography depicts marine shell objects and instruments, such 
as the pututu held by the first figure in this cornice fragment discovered 
on site by John Rick and teams. 

Jose Luis Cruzado and Miriam Kolar 



Stanford consulting professor Dr. Jonathan S. Abel led the archaeo- 
acoustics team's development of the “bouquet" microphone array proto- 
type and calibration system used to document Chavin gallery acoustics. 

Miriam Kolar 


Since our 2007 formation, my team has fo- 
cused on testable scientific aspects of Chavin’s 
sonic story. Back at Stanford, we developed 
plans for on-site research that would pioneer 
tools and methods to explore, archive, and 
digitally preserve site and instrument acous- 
tics. Rick continually offered information 
and insights about the setting, but, as we 
sound specialists learned during our first visit 
to Chavin, without first-hand site experience 
it had been impossible to adequately under- 
stand the demands of the place and the impli- 
cations of its archaeology. We refocused, and 
I began my multi-year Andean immersion in 
archaeoacoustics fieldwork. What were the 
practical challenges of Chavin as a research 
venue where we would apply custom tech 
in fieldwork? How would acoustics findings 
meld with anthropological considerations to 
bolster the archaeological story? 


Jo's 


Chavin Archaeoacoustics: 

An Exemplary Case Study 

In the 1970’s, Peruvian archaeologist Luis 
Lumbreras and teams discovered a terraced 
canal running beneath Chavin’s Circular Pla- 
za staircase that created a tremendous sound 
effect when water was poured through. This 
was the first documented archaeological con- 
sideration of sound at Chavin, almost thirty 
years before the pututu cache was uncovered. 
Conservation limits such physical testing, so 
questions of the site’s ancient sound environ- 
ment were put to rest for decades with the 
1976 publication of an article that estimated 
hydraulic sound effects related to the monu- 
ment’s extensive subterranean canal system 
and interior architecture. Now, armed with 
non-invasive research tools, my team’s on-site 
archaeoacoustics fieldwork has introduced 
new technologies to probe the elemental and 
potentially subversive sonic environment of 
this proposed oracular center. 


18 


The Appendix Out Loud 




Chavin's monumental architecture has been partially covered and destroyed by landslides and human activity since its 
development period estimated between 1200 and 500 B.C. Its stone-and-mortar architecture includes tall buildings, 
multi-level terraces, and sunken plazas spanning kilometers, as well as subterranean canals that interlace the site and 
connect its two surrounding rivers. 

Jose Luis Cruzado Coronel 


An enigmatic stone monument located in the 
north-central sierra of present-day Peru, the ex- 
pansive complex at Chavin is known as a cere- 
monial center, a “temple”, an “oracle site”, or a 
spiritual locus. Archaeological investigations in 
this narrow Andean plain — the site of multiple 
landslides and the convergence of two powerful 
rivers at 3180 meters above sea level — have un- 
earthed extensive findings. A diverted river, kilo- 
meters of subterranean canals, vista-occluding 
ceremonial buildings, and associated domestic 
and workshop areas all offer evidence of transfor- 
mative landscape modification performed by an- 
cient humans. Monumental construction seems 
to have been continuous for nearly a millennium, 
recently dated by Silvia Kembel and Herbert Haas 
from around 1200 to 500 B.C. 

As Daniel Contreras has eloquently argued, the 
complex at Chavin demonstrates human domina- 
tion and ongoing management of a risky natural 
environment, a political accomplishment that 
seems particularly well-aligned with the site’s re- 


nown as a cult center pivotal to, or emblematic 
of, the growing social hierarchical differentiation 
that took place during the Andean Formative Pe- 
riod. Social stratification has been identified in 
evidence from the monument’s surrounding res- 
idential and production areas through the work of 
researchers such as Matthew Sayre and Christian 
Mesia. 

Theories to explain and characterize religious ac- 
tivity at Chavin range from speculation to solid 
anthropology; among the most recent and wide- 
ly accepted are Richard Burger’s arguments for a 
“Chavin Horizon” of dispersed Andean influence 
around the site and its cult, Luis Lumbreras’ ma- 
terial and economic interpretations of widespread 
power structures centered at the monument, and 
Rick’s detailed arguments for “an evolved Sha- 
manism” in the context of “a tradition-based con- 
vincing system” built at Chavin. 

Evidential bases for these views highlight senso- 
ry and experiential clues. Myriad stone and bone 


July 2013 


19 



tools for the preparation and consumption of psy- 
choactive plants have been excavated from the site 
and its surroundings. Larger-than-life human, 
animal, and anthro-zoomorphic sculptural stone 
heads once lined exterior building walls, project- 
ing the extreme grimaces, upturned eyes, and na- 
sal mucus trails typical of such plant use. Labyrin- 
thine, deeply enclosed interior spaces where light 
could be excluded or manipulated using polished 
coal mirrors and shadow projections interlace site 
buildings. Chavin has been described by many as a 
theatrical ritual venue: its varied architectural fea- 
tures present contexts for one-to-many address, 
sound projection, and group gathering areas, as 
well as intimate spaces that could isolate indi- 
viduals and perhaps facilitate psychotropic expe- 
riences. Sensation took focus at ancient Chavin, 
and though there are many senses to consider, the 
sonic dimension is particularly provocative due 
to its subversive immediacy: it creates effects that 
are experienced, but not necessarily identified . 3 

Archaeoacoustics methodology gives us a way to 
identify such environmental sonic components 
that contribute to the feeling of place and its com- 
municative possibilities. Beyond first-hand sonic 
tests — like performing a replica pututu in a Chavin 
plaza — and the identification of apparent sound 
effects — such as echoes among building faces and 
surrounding hillsides — equipment-based acous- 
tic measurements of Chavin’s well-preserved inte- 
rior spaces can map how sound is transmitted and 
transformed by the architecture. Understanding 
how sound morphs as it propagates through space 
is essential to documenting and estimating the 
basic features of an ancient sonic environment. 
The use of gear can change results, and the re- 
searcher determines test parameters. Such acous- 
tic measurements can be used to preserve the 
sonic contours of spaces, yet these encoded data 
don’t tell us their contexts; they merely give sum- 
maries of places at moments. There’s embedded 
research perspective that needs to be document- 
ed, and many angles of access to the embodied 
clues of past experience. 

In my archaeoacoustics work, I wield manual 
instruments such as measuring tapes and laser 
distance finders, and computational tools such 
as MATLAB in order to implement mathematical 
audio digital signal processing (DSP) code. There 



A figure holding an object resembling the so-called "San Pedro" 
cactus, a psychoactive plant that grows in the region, is carved in 
relief on one of the facing-stones that line Chavin's Circular Plaza. 

Jose Luis Cruzado and Miriam Kolar 



Making acoustic measurements in the Lanzon Gallery: the CCRMA 
prototype "bouquet" array of Countryman B6 microphones used 
to record acoustic test signals played from a Meyer MM-4XP loud- 
speaker in order to evaluate interior architectural acoustics. 

Jose Luis Cruzado Coronel 


20 


The Appendix Out Loud 



Acoustic measurements of the Chavin site employ diverse techniques and equipment. Left: Miriam Kolar wears in-ear 
microphones to make recordings that enable researchers to evaluate how spatially imprinted sound is received by a human 
listener; center: the fragmented exterior architecture of Chavin buildings hides well-preserved interiors as shown right: a 
directional loudspeaker and subwoofer allow consistent reproduction of the mathematically generated audio signals used 
to measure the acoustics of Laberintos Gallery. 

Jose Luis Cruzado Coronel 


is no typical day of field work for me at Chavin: 
one morning, I might crawl through slate-lined 
canals built three thousand years ago, listening to 
the silence and the closeness of my breath, look- 
ing for places where sound can enter and exit. The 
next afternoon, I could climb a scree-covered hill- 
side to hear a mix of brass funeral bands, Huay- 
no radio, traffic and construction noise drifting 
up from the Andean town below, to assess lon- 
ger-distance sound transmission. Some days I 
bang my brain against numbers on my computer, 
tweaking formulae to generate audio test signals, 
strategic sounds to be played through loudspeak- 
ers with the ambient responses digitally recorded 
via microphones positioned to capture selected 
spatial dynamics. Other days I hang out on the 
phone discussing analytical challenges with men- 
tors and colleagues back at Stanford. 


Measured acoustic properties of site spaces — and 
estimated acoustics from evidence-based mod- 
els — can then be evaluated to understand human 
perceptual implications. The same principles ap- 
ply to studying musical instruments or objects that 
produce sound, but on a smaller physical scale. If 
both spatial acoustics and instrumental sonics are 
understood, a comparative analysis can be made 
to estimate the effects of their interaction — how a 
space enhances or changes the sound of an instru- 
ment — and these characteristics can be further 
evaluated in terms of known human perceptual 
correlates. It’s a chain of relational data that de- 
pends on good documentation, math, and careful 
reconstruction techniques to pull together find- 
ings across disciplines. 


Larger-than-life "cabezas 
clavas" or tenon heads 
once loomed above Chavin, 
pegged into the exterior walls 
of its ceremonial buildings. 
The human, animal, and 
hybrid forms may depict ritual 
or mythological transforma- 
tions, with features such as 
upturned eyes, nasal mucus, 
and extreme grimaces hinting 
at psychotropic plant use. 

Jose Luis Cruzado Coronel 



July 2013 


21 



To get at the sensory implications of mate- 
rial traces, we look to psychology. Although 
the transformative effects of perception may 
vary individually, extensive systematic exper- 
imentation has led to functional understand- 
ings of human perception. Knowledge about 
psychophysics — the interplay of stimuli and 
sensation — can guide the archaeological 
appraisal of how sound might have affected 
people in an ancient context. If characteris- 
tics of an ancient spatial sound environment 
can be estimated from extant architecture, 
landforms, or other spatial evidence at an 
archaeological site, auditory implications for 
ancient occupants can be evaluated. 

Take, for example, the so-called “precedence 
effect”, a well-understood auditory percep- 
tual phenomenon. Real-world environments 
contain surfaces and objects that divert, ab- 
sorb, and reflect sound, creating multiple 
paths for sound to transmit between its gen- 
erating source and a listener who are separat- 
ed by space. Based on hearing alone, a person 
tends to perceive the direction of the source 
location with the earliest arrival of sound 
energy — the shortest sound propagation 


path — even when there are many sequential 
sound reflections (that can be “louder”) from 
other directions. Architectural acoustic mea- 
surements and computer models can be used 
to estimate how the precedence effect might 
be induced in ancient sonic contexts. 

Acoustic and perceptual sciences can be ap- 
plied together to better understand the senso- 
ry potential of an ancient sound environment. 
Where on-site perceptual experimentation 
with human participants is possible, consen- 
sus testing across a group of people can con- 
firm estimated experiential components. Psy- 
choacoustic laboratory experiments may also 
be designed to evaluate the human auditory 
implications of site acoustics. Combine this 
knowledge with other information about the 
archaeological context, and compelling clues 
about ancient human experience emerge. 
Experiential possibility is rooted in material 
fragments. Hard evidence — Chavin’s carved 
shell and mortared stone — is a weighty but 
enigmatic guide to the past. 



Dr. Perry R. Cook performed the Chavin pututus during acoustic measurements of the instruments made at the Museo Na- 
cional Chavin in 2008. Left: Countryman E6 microphones were positioned inside the Strombus shell horns to record acous- 
tic transmission from the mouthpiece to bell; center: Chavin project director, archaeologist Dr. John Rick and Cook position 
microphones; right: Cook plays the pututus for measurement, using a systematic sequence of performance techniques. 

Jyri Huopaniemi and Jose Luis Cruzado Coronel 


22 


The Appendix Out Loud 


Acoustic Alignment of Instruments and 
Architecture 


My team’s comprehensive acoustic workup of 19 
of the 20 Chavin pututus gives us details of their 
functional characteristics that can be used to es- 
timate their interactive potential with site archi- 
tecture. The so-called “sounding tones” of these 
instruments — the readily played frequencies that 
a musician might call “pitches” — measure be- 
tween 272 Hz to 340 Hz (approximately “middle” 
C#4 to F4 on a standardly tuned piano). In one of 
the most compelling instrumental and architec- 
tural correspondences that we’ve documented to 
date, these specific sonic frequencies are ampli- 
fied by 10-20 dB (10 dB is like turning up the vol- 
ume on your music player to make it seem twice 
as loud) above all other sound by three architec- 
tural ducts in a key Chavin ceremonial location. 
These horizontal ducts connect the interior gal- 
lery of the “Lanzon”, the 4.5 meter-tall engraved 
granite monolith, with the exterior Circular Plaza. 
In its physical alignment, the central duct pro- 
vides a direct line-of-sight — and, as supported by 
acoustic measurements, a plausibly symbolic and 
functional “line-of-speech” — between the carved 
mouth of the imposing fanged figure and the out- 
side world of the plaza. 

The architectural acoustic link between the 
Lanzon Gallery ducts and the site-excavated 
sound-producing instruments is a rare gem of 
archaeological correspondence that’s difficult to 
dismiss as coincidence. First, Chavin’s architec- 
ture is thoroughly channeled with ducts of differ- 
ent shapes and sizes. Therefore, unique structures 
of a particular size and placement among these 
ubiquitous forms suggest planned construction: 
design. 

Second, the location of these tuned sound con- 
duits — between the consequential stone mono- 
lith and the exclusive plaza setting — would be 
ritually significant, and it’s riddled with other 
links to shell horns. In this apparent ceremonial 
locus, pututus are depicted, as if performed by 
figures in procession, on stone reliefs lining the 
north-western wall of the Circular Plaza, just a few 
meters away from where the Strombus-projecting 
ducts open onto overhead walls. The plaza floor 
was crafted with two inlays of fossilized sea snails 



Sparse reconstruction of Chavin's Circular Plaza and Lanzon 
Gallery architecture shows the "line-of-speech" between the inte- 
rior Lanzon monolith and the exterior plaza, through the central 
duct that acoustically emphasizes tones of the site-excavated shell 
instruments. 

Reconstruction by Jose Luis Cruzado Coronel, from data by Silvia 
Kembel, John Rick, and new on-site measurements 



Facing-stones that line Chavin's Circular Plaza depict figures hold- 
ing pututus, as if performing them in procession. 

Jose Luis Cruzado and Miriam Kolar 


July 2013 


23 


on its paving stones, spiraled animals that appear 
like cross-sectioned pututus. A few meters south, 
a plausible pututu storage location exists: in the 
Caracolas Gallery where Rick’s team unearthed 
these instruments, they were deposited as if they 
had been hung along its walls. This constellation 
of factors provides strong support for the idea of 
ancient ceremony enlivened by the sound of these 
horns. Converging forms of evidence connect pu- 
tutus to the Circular Plaza, and dynamically con- 
nect the plaza with the hidden Lanzon monolith. 
The building specifically projects the sound of the 
site-excavated instruments — and excludes other 
sounds — from the mouth of its “oracle” to listen- 
ers outside. 


Echoes of Ancient Experience 

Sound — because it’s experiential — is an ephemer- 
al artifact of spaces and objects that we can use to 
better understand past life. Some archaeoacoustic 
research is persuasively manifest for present-day 
observers: hearing a sequence of replica pututu 
echoes circling around Chavin’s valley can’t trans- 
mit cultural meanings from the past, but through 
this experience, one better appreciates the dy- 
namics of setting that would have influenced an- 
cient human activity. Performing a replica shell 
horn inside Chavin’s galleries, I can feel through 
my body the resonances between instrument and 
architecture, a physically and emotionally trans- 
formative experience that would have been simi- 
larly sensed — but interpreted differently — by hu- 
mans in the past. 

Scientific research techniques based on material 
evidence of the distant past give detail about the 
less apparent aspects of sound that are funda- 
mental to human experience. Such findings per- 
mit reconstructions that can further illuminate 
elemental characteristics of ancient sound envi- 
ronments. Using a computational acoustic mod- 
eling tool based on measured acoustic data and 
auditory perceptual experiment findings, we can 
test and auralize the acoustic effects of space by 
virtually reconstructing site areas that are no lon- 
ger intact. Measured and modeled sound trans- 
mission dynamics across site spaces suggest how 
people could have used sound to communicate 


or influence the perspective of others in ancient 
Chavin. And acoustic measurements have demon- 
strated that Chavin’s site-excavated pututus are 
dynamically linked to its imposing Lanzon mono- 
lith: instruments and architecture together make 
a sounding “oracle” mechanism that could project 
secrets from the restricted depths of the site to its 
public, dominating exterior. 

Archaeoacoustics at Chavin continues, as we en- 
gage these and other research approaches to bet- 
ter understand the social implications of sound 
environments for people in the ancient Andes. 
Echoes of ancient experience tell us more about 
our human roots in another time and place, offer- 
ing fragments of a non-verbal history. 


Notes 

1. Prior to this discovery, a few ancient shell horns 
were known in the region — from related sites and / 
or bearing associated iconography — but no defin- 
itively sound-producing objects had been docu- 
mented in on-site archeological findings from the 
Chavin period. 

2. Because these shell horns show substantial use- 
wear, and have been crafted from their nascent 
animal state into functional instruments, their 
intended general purpose and actual use as sound 
producers seems incontestable. The fortuitous 
combination of the pututus’ condition, situation, 
and quantity allows for comparative and compre- 
hensive analyses of these object-instruments. 

3. Light manipulation via gallery ducts has been 
discussed in J. W. Rick, “Context, Construction, 
and Ritual in the Development of Authority at 
Chavin de Huantar” in W. J. Conklin, & J. Quilter, 
Eds., Chairin Art, Architecture and Culture [Monograph 
61] (Los Angeles: Cotsen Institute of Archaeology, 
University of California, 2008), pp. 3-34. New doc- 
umentation of shadow dynamics was initiated by 
the author with Jose Cruzado in 2010. 

For a complete record of supporting citations for 
this article, view the web version available from 
http://theappendix.net/issues/20i3/7 
after July 22, 2013. 


24 


The Appendix Out Loud 



Deadly Notes: 

Atlantic Soundscapes and the Writing of the 

Middle Passage 

Danielle Skeehan 


[SJince speech was forbidden, slaves camouflaged the word under the provoc- 
ative intensity of the scream. No one could translate the meaning of what 
seemed to be nothing but a shout. It was taken to be nothing but the call of a 
wild animal. This is how dispossessed man organized his speech by weaving 
it into the apparently meaningless texture of extreme noise. 

— Edouard Glissant, Caribbean Discourse Selected Essays 


July 2013 


25 


‘A Kind of Chorus 


In Herman Melville’s Benito Cereno, the captain 
and crew of the Massachusetts-bound Bache- 
lor’s Delight anchor their ship in the harbor of 
a small, uninhabited island off the coast of 
Chile. They soon find that they are not alone. 
When a rather battered and weather-beaten 
Spanish merchant ship sails into harbor, the 
American captain, Amasa Delano, decides to 
approach the vessel and offer his services.* 

Boarding the San Dominick, Delano is immedi- 
ately struck by the “the wailing ejaculations of 
the indiscriminate multitude” and the “noisy 
confusion” resonating throughout the Span- 
ish ship: oakum pickers “accompanied the[ir] 
task with a continuous, low, monotonous 
chant, droning and drilling away like so many 
gray-headed bag-pipers playing a funeral 
march.” Hatchet sharpeners “clashed their 
hatchets together, like cymbals, with a barba- 
rous din.” Growing “impatient of the hubbub 
of voices,” Delano turns to the captain of the 
ship, Benito Cereno, and asks him to account 
for the discord. As Cereno tells how sickness 
and maritime misadventure depleted the 
crew and battered the ship, the “cymballing 
of the hatchet-polishers” continues to punc- 
tuate the narrative, and Delano wonders why 
“why such an interruption should be allowed, 
especially in that part of the ship, and in the 
ears of an invalid.” 


*Melville's novella is a fictionalized retelling of events that happened off the coast of 
Santa Maria, a small, uninhabited island off the coast of Chile, on February 20, 1 805. 
The American sea captain, Amasa Delano, had anchored The Perseverance there while 
they were restocking water supplies on their return journey from Canton. While there, a 
rather battered and weather beaten Spanish merchant ship soon sailed into harbor and 
appeared to be in distress. Assessing the situation, Delano decided to approach The 
Tryal and offer his services. In Delano's published account of what followed, he notes, 
"As soon as I got on deck, the captain, mate, people and slaves, crowded around me 
to relate their stories, and to make known their grievances" (p. 322). Delano was on 
board The Tryal for the greater part of the day, and relates very little else until— at his 
departure — the Captain of the ship— Benito Cereno— jumps overboard and informs 
Delano that he had been audience to an elaborate performance carried off by the en- 
slaved Africans on board the ship, that they had revolted, and that Cereno himself was, 
in fact, their captive. The events are related in three prior written accounts (as well as 
numerous North American newspapers): the ship's log recounting that day's events, the 
Lima court records, and Delano's Narrative of Voyages and Travels in the Northern and 
Southern Hemispheres (Boston 1817). Herman Melville's Benito Cereno (first published 
in 1 855 in Putnam's Monthly) takes up the challenge of imagining and recreating the 
holes in Delano's narrative and invites us to consider why such an elaborate drama was 
excluded from the record in the first place. 


Observing the apparent lack of order on 
board the San Dominick with his “blunt-think- 
ing American eyes,” Captain Delano perhaps 
serves as a cautionary tale for “bad readers.” 
By refusing to recognize the “noisy confusion” 
as a mode of communication, Delano fails to 
read — or, more accurately, to hear — what has 
actually happened on the ship: the enslaved 
men and women had risen up against their 
former captors, had taken control of the ship, 
and were attempting to sail to Senegal. The 
apparent disorder was, in fact, not disorder 
at all: rather it was a highly orchestrated “op- 
eratic” performance that staged the relation- 
ship between free and enslaved — European 
and New World African — precisely as Delano 
expected to see it. 

I begin with Melville’s novella because it may 
also caution scholars who study the archives 
of Atlantic slavery. Inevitably, we too, like 
Captain Delano, view the contents of ship’s 
logs, captain’s journals, and account books 
with “a stranger’s eyes.” The cold empiricism 
of these records encourages us to read at a 
surface level and glean only the facts that re- 
cord keepers intended to be found. 

Yet ships traveling the pathways of the Mid- 
dle Passage — and beyond — were anything 
but silent spaces. In the words of a sailor on 
board the Liverpool slave trader, the Hubri- 
d as, in 1786, enslaved men and women raised 
their voices in “a kind of chorus” 
that resounded “at the close of 
particular sentences.” The sailor’s 
use of the term “chorus” is worth 
noting. A chorus consists of indi- 
vidual voices coming together to 
produce a collective, synchronized 
voice, and in theatrical traditions 
the chorus served as commentary 
on dramatic action. These call and 
response soundings allowed men 
and women speaking different 
languages to communicate about 
the conditions of their captivity. In 


26 


The Appendix Out Loud 


fact, on board the Hubridas, what began as mur- 
murs and morphed into song erupted before long 
into the shouts and cries of coordinated revolt. In 
the words of another sailor, “what [was] the sub- 
ject of their songs [I] cannot say.” 

However, as readers of these archives, we can be- 
gin to imagine. It is no easy task to reconstruct 
these Atlantic soundscapes: sound fades, only 
writing remains. At the surface, the slave trade’s 
systematic documentation — in the form of ship’s 
logs, insurance documents, sales records, ac- 
count books, and published journals — appears 
to record the erasure and suppression of African 
voices, cultures, and resistance. But, like Captain 
Delano, I wonder if there may be something in 
these records that we have failed to hear. By under- 
standing the writing of the Middle Passage as an 
early audio technology — rather than simply a his- 
tory of exploitation — we can think about sound as 
a new language of resistance perhaps particular 
to pathways of the Middle Passage and embedded 
in the writing itself. In these accounts the dead- 
ly notes of an enslaved cargo communicating and 
acting in mass regularly interrupt the deadly marks 
of the official record. Maritime writing thus re- 
cords the conditions of the Middle Passage from 
two perspectives: the calculated master narrative 
at the surface of the record, and the sounds that 
erupt from the depths.* 


50? 

''n't- 


Histories Sunk in the Sea 






—•Ir... 


tjir 

/ q a __ ^ 

Jp 

■ t 


>,.-1 : 

zt 

*7 

/ i}>— - v./(ayc 

f* 

as 

A-** •** A^,. _ 

/t* (A>‘ ft O-.. J ■/. ■ 0 h . . 

<J / Aye ft, A. A, 

is- 

ts 

32. 

30 

/ ioyc. {pi / tj /Ja... - - - 

I’i 

3/ 

/ /UaA. Ay'A 


M / 

/ v t 

’ t 

2 

, Pt—w JuL-, 773 ~ 

3 8- 

3 

/ r iy.3 

3 7 

A 

1 A Of a J 7 y < 3 - - 

A» 


/ yz.-, 1 

4 t 

7 

r 

3 i. v * , , n 7 .o 
a - - - - 

il 

3 

1 Ut ffA*. • .. ttf 1 'iycD 


11 

/icyc 7~ 

sz 

/a 

/ (■>-,<, /(*~, Ayr-3 _ 

S3 

Ji 

, - 

S4 

/j- 

/ Ay, 3 

SS- 

IT 

■ / 'Ay. 3 

s£ 

n 

1 /p ^ u~, uccSt, /fa. 

A-t i 1 IV fa*, J(_A> ,, A cfx ■ 

£7 


_ . 

•St , 

n 

1 Arfr-rw /(^ Ay!) . — 

3T? 

%3 

2 IUJOvJ— w / 0 ,1 

7 

6/ 

ez 

<5 

/ y, / (olrv— »>- Alx-xi, -- 



2 y V J 

6 s 
V 


The account Book of the Brig Sally with a 1 7 65 page from 
its inventories listing slaves. 

Digitized by the Brown University Steering Committee 
on Slavery and Justice 


*See for instance, the work of Stephanie Smallwood and Ian Bau- 
com. In Saltwater Slavery, Smallwood examines how ships' logs, 
captains' journals, sales records and a litany of texts connected 
to the trade develop a discourse about race and slavery. See 
Stephanie Smallwood, Saltwater Slavery: A Middle Passage from 
Africa to American Diaspora (Cambridge: Harvard University 
Press, 2007). In Specters of the Atlantic, Baucom, in turn, argues 
that African captives were interpolated not only into a British slave 
trade, but into the systems of credit that they in turn helped to 
support. Examining the trials that resulted when the captain of the 
Zong murdered 1 3 1 of the Africans on board his ship, Baucom 
argues for how insurance documents transformed captive bodies 
into capital or credit. See Ian Baucom, Specters of the Atlantic: 
Finance Capital, Slavery, and the Philosophy of H i story (Durham: 
Duke University Press, 2005). 


By a curious coincidence, as each point was 
recalled, the black wizards of Ashantee would 
strike up with their hatchets, as in ominous 
comment on the white stranger’s thoughts. 

— Herman Melville, Benito Cereno 


fAt best we refer to the nascent voices of people like Venture 
Smith, Olaudah Equiano, Mary Prince, and others who have 
survived the passage and lived to tell about it. Notable examples 
include the memoirs or accounts of men and women such as 
Olaudah Equiano, James Albert Ukawsaw Gronniosaw, Venture 
Smith, Belinda Royall, and Mary Prince. 


Because few firsthand narratives of the Middle 
Passage written or dictated by New World Afri- 
cans survive, the experiences of men and women 
traversing the Atlantic has been understood as 
largely unrepresentable. For these reasons we in- 
evitably turn to the records of their captors, and 
this record seems to only confirm the unrepre- 
sentable nature of enslaved voices and experienc- 
es: the sounds produced by captives are recorded 


as mere noise — as ‘murmurs,’ ‘cries,’ ‘complaints,’ 
‘shrieks,’ ‘groans,’ ‘bursts,’ ‘uproars.’* 

By favoring the written word, we also thereby 
privilege forms of knowledge deriving from sight 
rather than sound. Sight has long been associated 
with ‘reason’ and modernity, in turn, as triggered 
by and indebted to the rise of ocular thinking. And 
as we ‘examine,’ ‘look to,’ ‘investigate,’ and ‘seek’ 


July 2013 


27 


*1 am borrowing this language from Michelle Cliff, who writes: 
"To write a complete Caribbean woman, or man for that 
matter, demands of us retracing the African past of ourselves, 
reclaiming as our own, and as our subject, a history sunk 
under the sea, or scattered as potash in the cane fields, or 
gone to bush, or trapped in a class system notable for its 
rigidity and absolute dependence on color stratification. Or a 
past bleached from our minds. It means finding the art forms 
of those of our ancestors and speaking in the patois forbidden 
us. It means realizing our knowledge will always be wanting. 

It means also, I think, mixing in the forms taught us by the 
oppressor, undermining his language and co-opting his style, 
and turning it to our purpose." Michelle Cliff, The Land of Look 
Behind and Claiming (Ithaca, NY: Firebrand, 1985), p. 14. 


|R. Murray Schafer defines the concept of "soundscapes" as 
sonic environments that provide an opening for scholars to 
consider "the enculturated nature of sound. ..and the material 
spaces of performance that are constructed for the purpose of 
propagating sound." See The Soundscape: Our Sonic Envi- 
ronment and the Tuning of the World (Merrimac, MA: Destiny, 

1 993], See also Mark M. Smith's essay "Listening to the Heard 
Worlds of Antebellum America," Journal of The Historical Soci- 
ety (June 2000): 63-97. Smith invites early American scholars, 
in particular, to think about how sound can serve as an "index 
of identity." Similarly, Richard Rath's 2003 book-length study, 
How Early America Sounded (Cornell: Cornell University Press, 
2005), attends to sound as a way to "open up parts of these 
worlds, not to get a glimpse of them but to listen in." Most 
recently, American Quarterly published a special issue on 
sound studies in September 201 1 and just this past February 
Commonplace released an issue on music and Early America. 



One of the earliest images of the gourd banjo, an instrument of 
the Middle Passage and African diaspora, depicted in Sir Hans 
Sloane's Voyage (1707). 

Wikimedia Commons 


the remnants of histories sunk in the sea, the very 
language we use to disclose, discover, and detect 
the meanings of texts points to a methodology 
that is, in many ways, still rooted in Enlighten- 
ment-era empiricism and traditions of favoring 
sight as the most critical of the five senses.* 

The rise of “sound studies” has challenged the pri- 
macy of text and has invited us to think about — 
or listen for — how sound has shaped the history 
of human experience. By focusing on the sounds 
we can glean from written records, we can begin 
to listen to the static — or silence — and for other 
messages embedded in the texts. And it is here 
that the cold accounts of the slave trade itself be- 
come the background static — the non-sense — 
that frames the primary action staged on slave 
ships: that is, enslaved people’s acts of communi- 
cation and production of sounds. 1 

The soundscape of the Middle Passage relied on 
the human voice, the body, and the ship — rather 
than traditional instruments — to make sound. 
Notably, these sounds are produced by people 
using the material conditions of their imprison- 
ment — instruments of labor, chains, and the ship 
itself. The captain of the Sandoum, for instance, 
records feet stomping on boards, hands slapping 
on thighs and, what seemed to him “unintelligible 
cries.” Dr. Thomas Trotter, a surgeon on board the 
Brookes recreates the stifled voices crying out from 
below deck, “Yarra! Yarra!” [We are sick] and “Kic- 
keraboo! Kickeraboo!” [we are dying] . And Joseph 
Hawkins dramatizes voices and bodies staged for 
revolt as enslaved men and women in the hold “set 
up a scream,” “shouting whenever those above did 
any thing that appeared likely” to overturn the or- 
der of the ship. 

By using their own bodies to make sound, en- 
slaved Africans could contest the logic of their 
enslavement, challenging the very notion that 
these bodies are no longer their own. The acous- 
tic architecture of ships was essential to creating 
this sound. In Olaudah Equiano’s account of the 
Middle Passage he describes the ship as a “hollow 
place.” As Equiano’s language suggests, the grave- 
like architectural design of the ship and its daily 
workings were intended to strip men and women 
of ties to culture, language, and homeland, and 
to alienate them from each other; however, these 


28 


The Appendix Out Loud 


very conditions may have led to the formation of 
new communities and new cultures. 

The very hollowness of the ship, structured by 
wood, cloth, and copper, meant it was also a space 
that was, if unintentionally, designed to resonate 
and carry sound: wooden ships were gigantic, 
migrating percussionist instruments that carried 
voices, rhythms, and sounds beyond ship holds 
and deck barricades. Moreover, if sailors and 
captains used the spatial design and knowledge 
of ship mechanics to assert Anglophone author- 
ity, enslaved men and women may have used the 
ship as percussionist instrument and amplifier of 
sound to contest that authority. 

While the nature and goal of commercial mari- 
time writing means these sounds are rare in the 
records, they are a significant characteristic of 
enslaved peoples’ accounts of the Middle Passage. 
For instance, in Ottobah Cugoano’s 1787 narra- 
tive, he recounts “when a vessel arrived to conduct 
us away to the ship, it was a most horrible scene; 
there was nothing to be heard but the rattling of 
chains, smacking of whips, and the groans and 
cries of our fellow-men.” The “horrible scene” in 
Cugoano’s account quickly shifts registers to the 
sounds of the ship, and thus from the visual to the 
auditory: chains rattling, whips lashing. Cugoano 
repeatedly acknowledges that these experiences 
are beyond what “language can describe,” and 
his passage into slavery also suggests a passage 
into an Atlantic soundscape defined by the voices 
of the enslaved — rather than the written record of 
captors.' 

As Paul Gilroy suggests, the “unsayability” of 
racial terror “can be used to challenge the privi- 
leged conception of both language and writing 
as preeminent expressions of human conscious- 
ness.” Language and writing have only a “limit- 
ed expressive power” to communicate the poly- 
phonic — or multi-sounded — experiences of the 
Middle Passage. Sound, in the words of Saidiya 
Hartman, could be said to “topple the hierarchy of 
discourse, and ... engulf authorized speech in the 
clash of voices” — or, as in Benito Cereno, the clash 
of hatchets. That is, the sound produced by New 
World Africans may represent a counterclaim to 
political enfranchisement and may provide an- 
other model of political process. The combined 


Representations w insureec tion 

on board 

a Slave. - Sinr. 


, Uinruu/ hon- /fir crew free ufton S/ie renJiaptiy Aaver from 1 -eAt mf /he ’ 
BARRICADO, mW on 'f’oa-rd a // 1 S/ave . a.* <1 tvAenever 



St* t/ie pn\y to totals report part 1 . Art S LAVES . 
Minutes of' nidnur before the Hons* of' t'ommons. 
Wadi fronts £fsay on t'olonuahon \ . 4 jt . 


"Representation of an Insurrection on board a Slave-Ship," from 
Carl B. Wadstrom, An Essay on Colonization (1794). 

Slaveryimages.org, compiled by Jerome Handler and Michael 
Tuite, and sponsored by the Virginia Foundation for the Humanities 
and the University of Virginia Library. 


record of noise and revolt suggests that cargoes 
of captive men and women speaking a number of 
different languages and dialects who began their 
journey to ships coasting off the shores ofWestern 
Africa from vastly different regions and cultures 
began to communicate with each other and to act 
en masse. 2 

In the words of another author, the poet James 
Field Stanfield, “fearful sounds,” “deadly notes,” 
and “trembling rage” reverberate through the 
bodies of slaving ships. He continues, “In one 
long groan the feeble throng unite; One strain of 
anguish wastes the lengthen’d night.” Out of dis- 
cordant voices, he suggests, emerge sounds that 


July 2013 


29 


combine in a polyphonic chorus to contest 
the abstraction and inhumanity of the slave 
trade. These sonic registers transform radical 
unbelonging into, potentially, a form of rad- 
ical resistance — radical, perhaps, precisely 
because it cannot be reproduced by the re- 
cord. 3 


Now with scales dropped from his eyes, 
[Captain Delano] saw the negroes, not in 
misrule, not in tumult, not as if frantically 
concerned for Don Benito, but with mask 
torn away, flourishing hatchets and knives, 
in ferocious piratical revolt. 

— Herman Melville, Benito Cereno 

New ways of reading the archive of Atlan- 
tic slavery are particularly significant at this 
moment. Since 2002, eight major cities — 
Berkeley, Chicago, Detroit, Los Angeles, 
Milwaukee, Oakland, Philadelphia, and San 
Francisco — and three states — California, 
Iowa, and Illinois — have passed slavery dis- 
closure laws. Disclosure laws belong to a his- 
tory of movements to secure reparations for 
slavery: they require companies to research 
and then disclose any ties that these compa- 
nies or their predecessors had to slavery. The 
focus on disclosure — on opening up that which 
was closed or shut, on unclosing, unfolding, 
and unfastening contemporary economic 
and historical ties to the slave trade — points 
to a history that will not be silenced. 

Yet the question remains: whose stories do 
these archives tell? How can one represent 
the (largely) unvoiced experiences of men 
and women on ships traversing the Middle 
Passage? And can this be a story of their voic- 
es and resistance, or merely a repetition of 
historical violence by re-examining the cold 
accounting of the written record? Maritime 
writing may be produced by Europeans, but it 
also reminds us that enslaved peoples formed 
a significant part of an emergent soundscape 


of modernity. Technologies of seeing and 
looking serve as imperial engines that per- 
haps only sound can contest. 

In accounts that record the sounds of insur- 
rection along the routes of colonial slavery, 
we can see — and listen for — histories sunk in 
the sea. 


Notes 

1. Ottobah Cugoano, Narrative of the Enslavement 
of Ottobah Cugoano, a Native of Africa; published 
by himself, in the Year 1787 (1787), 124-5. AH 
references to this text refer to the electron- 
ic version available through the University 
of North Carolina’s Documenting the American 
South digital archive (http://docsouth.unc. 
edu/neh/cugoano/menu.html) . 

2. Saidiya Hartman, “Venus in Two Acts.” 
Small Axe, 12 no. 2 (June 2008): 12. Gilroy pos- 
its “antiphony” as such a model of political 
action. Antiphony literally means “opposite 
voice” and suggests an emphasis on a dialec- 
tical production of meaning located in the 
auditory realm. 

3. All quotes refer to the edition available 
through Archive.org. 


30 


The Appendix Out Loud 


“Come hear this ditty”: 

Seventeenth- Century Drinking Songs 
and the Challenges of Hearing the Past 

Mark Hailwood 


n April, 1612, the constables of Caine, 
Wiltshire, made a desperate plea to 
their superiors — the county magis- 
trates — to help them reverse a surge 
in the number of alehouses in their town. Their 
complaint was that the alehouses “doe all brewe 
and vie who maye brewe the strongest Ale and 
thither do resorte all the great drinkers bothe 
of the Towne and Countrie to spende theyer 
tyme in idleness and theyer monie in excessivie 
drinkinge.” When the constables sought to dis- 
courage such behavior by charging the men in- 
volved with drunkenness, their efforts were un- 
successful, for “all men for the most parte love 
these cupp companions so well, that no man will 
take uppon him to be a sworne witnes against any 
drunkard.” 


This has changed, and historians now see drink- 
ing as an activity that is culturally meaningful. 
Decisions about who to drink with, how to drink, 
what to drink, how to pay, how much to drink, 
how often to drink, and how to judge the drinking 
behavior of others, are thought to provide an in- 
sight into the underlying values of a society. 

But how can we answer these questions for distant 
people who drank in distant contexts, such as the 
denizens of a village alehouse in seventeenth-cen- 
tury England or the “cup companions” of Caine? 
There is no archive expressly designed to capture 
this sort of everyday cultural activity, so we are 
extremely lucky to be able to access it through a 
remarkable source: seventeenth-century drinking 
songs. 



*A survey of the historical blogosphere also 
demonstrates the prominent place of drinking 
in both early modern English and early Ameri- 
can society. 

The phrase "blot out the horror of their lives" 
belongs to Keith Thomas, from his classic work 
Religion and the Decline of Magic (New York: 
Charles Schribner's Sons, 1971). 



As this case shows, alcohol played a central role 
in early modern life, occupying much of the time 
of both law enforcement officers and guzzling 
“cupp companions.” Historians 
have long known this, but until re- 
cently it was not considered to be 
a particularly interesting feature of 
these past societies. Even the most 
astute pioneers of cultural history 
saw it as an inevitable product of 
life in unstable and harsh worlds, 
in which people drank heavi- 
ly to “blot out the horror of their 
lives.” In this interpretation, drink 
served as an anesthetic against an 
oppressive and tedious existence.* 


Anonymous, Peasants in the Tavern, Netherlands, oil on panel, 17th century (detail) 

Wikimedia Commons 


The broadside ballad was a particularly popular 
form of printed product in the seventeenth-cen- 
tury Anglo-American world. These were songs 
printed on a single sheet of paper and sold cheap- 
ly for a penny by sellers who recited them in the 
streets and in alehouses. There were millions of 
these sheets in circulation; the staple subjects 
for the songs included courtship and marriage, 
affairs of state, sensational murders, chivalric ad- 
ventures, and moral guidance. Best of all from the 
perspective of the historian of drinking cultures, 
one particularly popular genre was the “Drinking 
and Good Fellowship” ballad. These were drink- 
ing songs designed to be recited in the alehouse, 
and many alehouse-keepers pasted them up on 
the walls to attract drinkers to their establish- 
ment. 

It is amazing that any of these broadside ballads 
survive. They were cheap and ephemeral prod- 
ucts, and often ended up being used as kindling or 
toilet paper when they became worn and unread- 
able, or when their songs fell out of favor. Thank- 
fully, a handful of gentlemen collectors — most 
notably Samuel Pepys — took an interest in these 
manifestations of “low” culture that many of their 
peers found vulgar, and carefully pasted their pur- 
chases into bound volumes that have survived to 
the present. 

The drinking songs amongst these surviving bal- 
lads are a unique form of evidence for answering 
questions about the character and meanings of 
seventeenth-century drinking culture. They often 
contained warnings about the types of companion 
to avoid, or extrapolated the qualities of the ideal 
drinking companion: 

Roome/br a lusty lively Lad, 
dery dery downe, 

That will shew himselfe blyth be he ne’re so sad, 
dery dery dourne, 

That cryes a fig for pouerty 
And takes all troubles patiently, 

Will spend what he gets, 

And drinke more then he eates, 

That neuer meanes to oary 
From good fellowship free, 

If thou such a one be. 

lie drinke to thee kinde Harry. 


Some contained drinking games within them, 
with each verse including instructions for more 
mugs to be fetched and drained, with drinkers/ 
singers getting through thirteen helpings of beer 
by the end of the song! 

Be merry my hearts, and call/or your quarts, 
and let no liquor be lacking, 

We haue gold in store, we purpose to roare, 
untill we set care a packing. 

Then Hostis make haste, and let no time waste, 
let euery man haue his due, 

To save shooes and trouble, bring in the pots double 
for he that made one, made two. 

Then Hostesse go fetch us some, /or till you do come 
we are ofalljoyes bereaven, 

You know what I meane, make haste come again, 
for he that made ten, made eleuen. 

Then Hostesse lets know, the summe that we owe, 
twelve-pence there is /or certaine, 

Then/ll totherpot, and heres money /ort 
for he that made twelue, made thirteene. 

Other songs attacked those who refused to engage 
in bouts of alehouse jollity as covetous misers, 
whose individualistic worldview posed a threat to 
communal solidarity: 

There’s many men get store of treasure 
yet they liue like uery slaues: 

In this world they haue no pleasure 

the more they haue, the more they craue. 

Hang suchgreedy-minded misers, 
that will ne’r contented be. 

These songs can be read and analyzed to recon- 
struct the key features of seventeenth-century 
English drinking culture and the broader societal 
values and assumptions that underpinned it, and 
doing precisely this has formed a large part of my 
historical research. 

There is a major problem here though: these songs 
don’t really survive at all. I can sit at my desk and 
read their words, but this is hardly giving me ac- 
cess to how these words would have been expe- 
rienced by early modern drinkers. I sit quietly, 


32 


The Appendix Out Loud 


To the fame tune. 


Good Ale for my money. 

The Good-feilowcs refoiution o', ftrong Ale, 

That cures his nofe from looking pale. 


Tothc tunc of, The Counircy Laffe. 



The fecond part. 



H ’reljmcl oSi.totfice Itrtrfatc, towafcrn 

“ ins foes Will an r.nmit. 


uic .rrcticre m.-tll Input foj bccrc 


. — .in go home, nor I w : H nofgo home, ' t 

in long of rheoyle of bitty, &sS-! 

I ftav aU night for my 'Wight. 

and go ho. ,.e in the mom.ng early, 

Iprres ftmjsrtt fatitb *N'<I etjeCoott, 
ana I r ink t pc fin t felt-null tr, - 
Ipetes struen uitib bis Mon Ijookc, 


d cannot chafe bn; tone her : 

©crpnc Unt il dll, Ui.il right joob teilt, 
litres ale 83 b jo®ie 03 a bei re. 

Elsil make an ole monunMnct fojfor. 



J’o) carencertp.no a uo 

'iSSsr- M 

•tsHasHasss"* fcjjj 



tec'll make it up 


» titling*. 


let .f other frohinc,im«29( 


to uii'tlic linger becce: 

3 trait none ofebrs company 
teltbtbrrctecboffenMb. 
Ebercfoicca'lfojvaur jugs a peed 
anbbjinkcoliimcbaivctett-^ ^ 


A Health to all Good-Fellowes : llililSi^liliSSiMIl 

O R, 

The good Companions Aritlimaticke. The fecond part. To the fame tune. 

To the tune of, To drive the cold Winter at>0. 





o go mclloncloltp lofll bjbtgas to follp, 

O ona Hull ointte pilnop.ilt magrat, 

Bin (tliconrli 3 mill take, ft actor Hall mallr, 


nl tills centre 3 tell tahc.tl nitet Ipall made, 3 cermet content rat, lo He tin pot nnptg, 

-"* *? rp<nt ' I «"•?*«» m m elm “S cm ;« to tom 

*si!«srs“- rjaaiBSs 1 -— 


atbom.3tcnfcm.Wlbi 



be gone, 

London Printed for Henry Qojfen. V TN IS. 




English Broadside Ballad Archive, Roxburghe 
collection by permission of The British Library 


July 2013 


33 





alone, peacefully reading and reflecting on a 
ballad. They would have huddled around an 
ale bench, shoulder-to-shoulder with drink- 
ing companions, and bellowed out these 
words — they would have heard these songs as 
much as they read them. 


Historians that have worked on broadside 
ballads have not been deaf to this aspect of 
their source material, and attempts have been 
made to recover something of their sound. 
Most of these songs specified the tune to 
which they should be sung, and it has been 
possible to reconstruct many of these melo- 
dies. The creators of the English Broadside 
Ballad Archive, a free online database of sur- 
viving seventeenth-century ballads, have even 
had a go at singing the ballads along to their 
tunes and recorded the results. Take a mo- 
ment to listen to their version of the drinking 
ballad “A Messe of good Fellows.” 


This is a fabulous resource, but I can’t help 
feel that this still falls short of capturing the 
way drinking songs were experienced by ale- 
house-goers. It gives us a sense of how the 
tunes were simple and catchy, designed as 
much as a mnemonic device as an aesthetic 
one. It may also assist imaginative efforts to 
hear the lone-voice of a ballad singer in the 
street — though even for this purpose it is per- 


A MefTeofgood Eel lows: 

OR, ~ 

TBeeenerous (park who roundly, 
doth ctlMnd faycj for hisp.tr, 

TulbjVre have and (hall haveabundancc, 
come fill usthe other od quart. 

To the tunc of, mrteJ tni tom. 




haps too polished, as one seventeenth-cen- 
tury writer complained that ballad sellers’ 
voices tended to be “as harsh a noise as ever 
Cart-wheel made.” It certainly doesn’t cap- 
ture the atmosphere we would expect to ac- 
company an alehouse ballad performance, 
for which we might imagine background 
noise, rhythmic hand-clapping, and massed 
voices for the chorus.* 

We might also expect instrumental accompa- 
niment. It was common for fiddlers to per- 
form in alehouses, particularly on special oc- 
casions. Drumming might be heard, as it was 
in Glastonbury’s Ship Inn one night in 1657, 
when a gentleman who had planned to lodge 
with a friend there overnight had a change 
of heart due to the presence of “a disorderly 
company ranting and drinking and drum- 
ming,” who “beat the drum all night [such] 
that the neighbors were much disturbed and 
could not sleep.” In another raucous drinking 
bout in a 1609 Cheshire alehouse, one drinker 
repeatedly blasted a trumpet to “call together 
all the drunkards.” 

The sound of a drinking song is likely then to 
have been much more vibrant and boisterous 
than the sound evoked by listening (alone at a 
desk) to the recordings offered by the English 
Broadside Ballad Archive, however innovative 
a resource they are. There are other problems 
here, of course, that even an attempt to create 
a recording that more closely evoked an ale- 
house atmosphere would not overcome. One 
is that a ballad would not only have been sung 
or listened to — it would have been a perfor- 
mance to be seen as well. A wink or a nod to 
accompany certain lines, or a sideways glance 
or grin at a drinking companion, could have 
transformed the meanings of the lines being 
delivered, something which will forever be 
lost to the historian. 

*There are ballad recordings that come closer to this, and do 
include background noise and an attempt to recreate a more 
realistic performance environment. Unfortunately they are 
not freely available, but see Christopher Marsh, Music and 
Society in Early Modern England (Cambridge: Cambridge 
University Press, 2010) which comes with an Audio CD of 
recordings. 


English Broadside Ballad Archive, Roxburghe collection by permission Listen to "A Messe of good Fellows" at 
of The British Library http://appendic.es/m/z 

34 The Appendix Out Loud 



And then, of course, there is the issue of drunken- 
ness. Even if we replace the practice of sitting qui- 
etly at a desk reading a ballad with sitting at a desk 
listening to a recording of a ballad and trying hard 
to imagine drums, trumpets, and raucous merri- 
ment, the average historian (one would expect) is 
still going to be sober. The drinking song experi- 
ence was not. A beer at lunchtime might help, but 
the levels of intoxication that would accompany 
the drinking song experience might again exert 
considerable influence on a song’s meaning, as 
humor and camaraderie become enhanced and 
exaggerated. 

In other words, simply hearing a recording of a 
ballad drinking song may not take us very much 
further towards recovering the way it was experi- 
enced than reading it does. Again, ballad schol- 
ars have not ignored this, and efforts have been 
made at various ballad conferences to try to cre- 
ate a performative atmosphere through collective 
singing, sometimes with alcohol involved. I hav- 
en’t yet had this experience myself — though I will 
at a conference next spring — but I already have 
one major reservation (other than being hopeless 
at singing) about what this can achieve. A group 
of academics closely analyzing every aspect of the 
dynamics is hardly likely to create an authentic or 
natural atmosphere: the whole thing is likely to be 
too self-conscious. 

How, then, can the historian intent on ‘hearing’ 
their source material get closer to doing so? I’m 
not sure we can, but if the answer lies anywhere 
then I’m fairly sure it cannot be found at my desk. 
Arguably my greatest insight into the experience 
of the seventeenth-century drinking song came 
not from a recording, nor any sort of forced imag- 
inative effort. It came when attending a recent En- 
glish football match. Standing shoulder-to-shoul- 
der with fellow supporters of Bristol City, I heard 
the slow, repetitive beat of a drum, and a lone 
voice projecting the words to a familiar exhorta- 
tion of our team’s quality. 

Gradually, those around me took up the song — a 
few knew all the lines, most could bellow out the 
chorus — and we worked our way through a bois- 
terous rendition, complete with well-worn jokey 
asides, reaching a crescendo that delivered with it 
a swelling sense of collective solidarity and cama- 


raderie. It was, admittedly, an almost exclusively 
masculine experience, but this too had echoes 
of many an alehouse drinking bout of the seven- 
teenth century. 

And crucially, of course, we were all drunk. I’d ex- 
perienced this many times before, but not before 
had I made the connections between those imag- 
inative efforts at my desk and these cold Saturday 
afternoon experiences away from it. 

I could be wrong: the experience of a twen- 
ty-first-century English football song and the 
experience of a seventeenth-century English 
drinking song might be some distance apart. Yet 
it seemed there were greater parallels between 
these two experiences than there were between 
some of my more detached academic attempts to 
‘hear’ the songs of the past and how those songs 
were actually experienced. I’m generally wary of 
letting personal experience stand in for historical 
knowledge based on a reading of source material, 
but when we try to recover aspects of the past that 
no amount of reading can achieve, we have to open 
our minds to approaches that transcend the more 
conventionally academic. 

Listening to the past is a step in the right direc- 
tion, but when this too is done in a detached and 
reflective way in the comfort of an office, seminar 
room, or conference gathering, we are still miss- 
ing something — something that we may need to 
move further away from our desks to get close to. 

All together now... 

(To the tune of “Land ofHope and Glory”) 

“We all follow the City, 

Over Land and Sea, 

We all/ollow the City, 

On to Victory” 


July 2013 


35 


Psalms and Silence: 

The Soundtrack of John Williams’s Captivity 

Glenda Goodman 


Ip 1 is December 5, 1706, and John Williams, a 
Sfe olfe minister of the frontier town of Deerfield, 
sk I jjjk has not been among so many godly Chris- 
tians in nearly two years. Cotton Mather’s 
usual 1,500-member congregation at the 
Society of the Second Church in Boston is swollen 
by many on-lookers, and Williams is the object of 
their curiosity. A month before, the people of New 
England had greeted his return to Boston after 
nearly two years of captivity in Catholic Canada as 
a triumph of the Christian faith. Neither the sav- 
agery of his Indian captors nor the idolatry of the 
Catholics he met to the north broke Williams’s re- 
solve. His survival and safe return from the “howl- 
ing wilderness” made him the closest thing colo- 
nial New England had to a Christian celebrity. 


It is Williams’s honor to deliver the sermon, or 
“lecture,” to this righteous congregation. Whatev- 
er trauma Williams suffered, it did not impair his 
ability to craft a powerful lecture, and he is con- 
fident that his stern message about God’s judg- 
ment on those who were taken captive and those 
who remained comfortably behind will resonate 
with the congregants. First, though, he sits on 
the church bench, surrounded by the truly faith- 
ful — the Saints whose experience of their own 
sin and redemption has been hard won through 
great personal questioning, and thus is sincere. 
It is a breathtaking experience, being among Pu- 
ritan brethren after so many months exposed to 
heathens and Catholics, months in which he was 
denied any chance to fulfill his duty to his congre- 
gation and to the Lord, prevented from preaching, 
praying, and singing psalms. Worse still, Williams 
had been forced to attend Catholic Mass, memo- 
ries of which will haunt him for years to come. 


Williams’s reverie is broken as the congregation 
rises to sing a psalm. The sacred song stirs him, 
summoning memories of his captivity. 


000 


Williams took up his pen to write a narrative of his 
sojourn when he returned to Deerfield late in the 
winter of 1706-1707. Just before dawn on Febru- 
ary 29, 1704, he wrote, “the Enemy came in like a 
Flood upon us.” He awoke suddenly as they man- 
aged to “break open Doors, and Windows, with 
Axes and Hatchets,” stormed into the room where 
Williams rested with his wife, “with Painted Fac- 
es and hideous Acclamations.” Struggling out of 
bed, reaching for a weapon, fearing for his family, 
Williams could not identify the invaders. To him 
they were simply “the Enemy.”* 

The raiders were in fact a combined force of Eu- 
ropeans and Indians, consisting of more than 250 
Abenaki, French, Huron, Iroquois, Mohawk, and 
Pennacooks fighters. The attack had several mo- 
tives: a colonial proxy battle in the War of Spanish 
Succession, it was also an act of retribution for 
English encroachment on Abenakis and Penna- 
cooks territory, a ploy to gain high-value captives 
(namely Williams) who could be exchanged for 
French prisoners in Boston, and a strategy for 
native population renewal. These reasons would 
be sorted out later. The immediate effect of the 
attack was deadly: fifty killed, over one hundred 
taken captive. Roughly half of Deerfield’s resi- 
dents were killed or captured — among them Wil- 
liams, his wife Eunice, and their three sons and 
two daughters. Two of the children died in the 
attack, and Eunice succumbed on the second day 
of captivity. The survivors traveled north, wading 
through thick snow and fording icy rivers toward 
New France. * 

* Numerous historians have analyzed the Deerfield raid and John 
Williams's captivity narrative. Of particular note is John Demos's 
narrative history, The Unredeemed Captive: A Family Story from 
Early America (New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 1994), which tells the 
story of John Williams's daughter Eunice, who chose to remain 
with her captors. 

fOn indigenous captivity and adoption practices as population 
renewal strategies, see Brett Rushforth, Bonds of Alliance: Indige- 
nous and Atlantic Slaveries in New France (Chapel Hill: University 
of North Carolina Press, 2012). 


36 


The Appendix Out Loud 


On the sixth day of their jour- 
ney, the minister was allowed 
to lead his reduced congre- 
gation in worship. “On the 
Sabbath Day we rested, and 
I was permitted to Pray and 
Preach to the Captives,” Wil- 
liams recalled. But the Indi- 
an captors interrupted the 
impromptu worship service. 
“Sing us one of Zion’s songs,” 
they demanded. The captives 
complied, timidly singing a 
sacred psalm. But as Williams 
recounted, the captors “were 
ready some of them to upbraid 
us, because our singing was 
not so loud as theirs.” 



^ CetpeAnn 


Deerfield • 
□dy Brook a 


® Massachusetts 
Bay 


Boston 


Plymouth 


Cape Cad Bay 


Hartford 
CONNECTICUT * 


Schaghticoke 

Reservation 




RHODE 

ISLAND 


Nantucket Bound 


agansett Bay 




Aqulnnah' 


Saybrook 


Nantucket I. 


Gardiners I. 


A map of early Puritan settlements and Algonquian groups in the seventeenth century, 
with Deerfield visible at upper left. 

Wikimedia Commons 


The ridicule stung, but it also indicated the 
deep religious and cultural chasm gaping be- 
tween the captives and their captors. To many 
of the Indians, this quiet singing revealed 
a more general weakness of character and 
identity. The captives’ inability to sing their 
own songs was disgraceful and deserving of 
mockery, according to native traditions. Yet 
some of the Indian captors were Catholic con- 
verts, and the Frenchmen who had participat- 
ed in the raid were also Catholic. As Catho- 
lics, they couldn’t help but notice that Puritan 
psalmody was a far cry from the sacred music 
of the Catholic Church, which was complex, 
polyphonic, and in Latin. For the Puritans, 
sacred music (“Zion’s songs”) meant psalm- 
ody, or metricized versions of the verses from 
the Book of Psalms set to simple melodies 
and sung in unison. Although austere and 
plain, psalmody was meaningful for Puritans, 
a fundamental way for the faithful to express 
their devotion to God and their integrity as a 
community. As a deeply affective practice that 
allowed the individual to express his or her 
personal piety, singing psalms also bound the 
congregation together. 

Puritan singing was rarely beautiful. Indeed, 
by the early eighteenth century, congrega- 


tional psalmody was cacophonous. For years, 
declining music literacy and isolation had led 
to the deterioration of musical ability in New 
England congregations. Individuals freely em- 
bellished the tunes. Congregations were un- 
disciplined, not singing together, and singing 
more and more slowly. Usually the congregation 
waded through each psalm tune with each indi- 
vidual improvising his or her own variation. 

Since psalm singing was turgid and disorga- 
nized in the best of circumstances, when the 
frightened, freezing, and exhausted Deerfield 
captives sang, the performance was especial- 
ly sorry. The day before, four women had been 
killed because they couldn’t maintain the brutal 
pace of the march, and the survivors’ fear was 
evident in their quavering song. Their voices 
sounded thin and weak, buffeted by wind, los- 
ing their resonance amid the ice-crusted snow 
and leafless winter trees. Singing reminded the 
congregation of how vulnerable they were, for 
it highlighted the absence of protective wood- 
en church walls to contain and reverberate the 
music. Singing psalms was supposed to provide 
emotional and spiritual sustenance, but instead 
it underscored the tenuousness of the captives’ 
existence. 


July 2013 


37 





Listen to "Litchfield" at http://appendic.es/rn/rn 


Can we know what was sung? In his captivity 
narrative Williams claimed that he preached 
from Lam. 1 . 18, a verse that addresses the im- 
mediate source of and reason for their plight: 
The Lord is righteous, for I have rebelled against his 
commandment: hear, I pray you, all people, and be- 
hold my Sorrow: mg virgins and my young men are 
gone into captivity. What psalm would match 
these repentant words? Perhaps Psalm 69, 
known for its evocation of the inner state of 
the sorrowful and tempted singer lost in deep 
waters, threatened by enemies, awaiting res- 
cue by God. The tune to which Psalm 69 was 
set in the 1698 Bay Psalm Book — the first psal- 
ter published in North America to include 
printed music — was thought to be particu- 
larly consolatory. This tune is called “Litch- 
field.”* 

It is in a delicately modal minor key. The mel- 
ody is made up of a series of intervals, broken 
thirds and fourths in a disjunct motion that 
enhance the searching, yearning mood of the 
minor mode. Even as the tune comes to rest 
at the beginning and end of every phrase on 
the long note, the sense of motion and even 
unease is always present. 

It is possible to imagine Williams and his 
fellow-captives warbling their way through 
this deeply expressive psalm as their un- 
sympathetic audience listened. They would 
have been singing in their peculiar manner, 
however: perhaps more than twice as slow as 
this recording, taking two or three breaths 
with each note, diverging from each others’ 
tempos, improvising on the melody. To the 
listening captors, this weak and discordant 
performance might have seemed to knell the 
captives’ imminent disbanding as a congrega- 
tion. The ruptures were dizzying: first seized 
from their homes, then separated from each 
other, and potentially cleaved from their faith 
by a future conversion to Catholicism. 

‘This is according to the instructions that accompany the 
tune in the Bay Psalm Book (1698), back matter; see Richard 
Appel, The Music of the Bay Psalm Book (Brooklyn: Institute 
for Studies in American Music, 1975). 


Humiliating and destabilizing as the captive 
psalmody performance was, at least it was a 
chance for congregational worship. Four days 
later, on March 9, Williams was allowed to 
pray and sing a psalm with his flock one final 
time. After that, he and the captives were di- 
vided into smaller groups for the remainder 
of the journey. Separated from his remaining 
children, Williams worried and suffered. But 
he found some spiritual relief on the trail: “My 
Master gave me a piece of a Bible,” Williams 
wrote, and “never disturbed me in Reading 
the Scriptures, or in Praying to God.” For 
nearly two months during his journey from 
New England to New France, Williams found 
solace in psalms and Bible verses, though he 
no longer had a congregation to sing with. 
(Williams eventually found out that this tol- 
erant treatment was not unique: “Many of my 
Neighbours also, found that Mercy in their 
Journey, to have Bibles, Psalm-books, Catechisms, 
and Good Books, put into their hands, with lib- 
erty to use them.”) 

The situation changed dramatically once Wil- 
liams arrived in Canada, where he found him- 
self under the control of an “Enemy” far more 
troubling than the supposedly savage Indi- 
ans: Catholic French colonists and their Je- 
suit priests. Williams and his fellow captives 
“were forbidden Praying one with another, or 
joining together in the Service of God.” He 
learned from his fellow captives that “their 
Bibles were demanded by the French Priests, 
and never re-delivered to them, to their great 
grief and sorrow.” The journey north may 
have been exhausting and terrifying, with the 
threat of death ever present, but that danger 
was simply one of mortality. Being delivered 
into the hands of Catholic priests threatened 
their souls. 

What followed was a series of clashes with the 
Jesuit missionaries who led religious life in 
settlements along the St. Lawrence River. Wil- 
liams noticed the comparative successes of 
the Catholics in converting Indians to Chris- 
tianity. Whereas in New England attempts 


38 


The Appendix Out Loud 


to convert the native population had proceeded 
haltingly for six decades, the Jesuits seemed to 
have found ways to lure great numbers of Indians 
to Catholicism. The town from which Williams 
was snatched, Deerfield, was directly tied to Pu- 
ritan missionary history. When the first “Praying 
Town” of converting Indians was founded in 1651, 
the residents of nearby Dedham relocated to what 
became known as Deerfield. Inconvenience and 
sacrifice for the sake of the missionary effort were 
part of Deerfield’s civic memory. Witnessing the 
Jesuit’s triumphs in gleaning more native souls 
than the English had managed was thus especially 
galling for the Deerfield minister. 

In late March 1704, nearly a month into his captiv- 
ity, Williams himself became the target of Jesuits’ 
aggressive conversion efforts. Williams had been 
taken to Fort Francis, north of Montreal along the 
St. Lawrence River, where he met two priests. Lat- 
er he recalled, “One of these Jesuits met me at the 
fort gate and asked me to go into the church and 
give God thanks for preserving my life.” Williams 
rebuffed this obvious ploy to lead him spiritually 
astray. “I told him I would do that in some other 
place,” was his response, he noted later. The next 
day the priests invited Williams to dinner, after 
which they warned that his captors, as Catholic 
Indians, would certainly force him to attend Mass. 
After all, the Jesuits claimed, they “were savages 
and would not hearken to reason.” Presumably it 
was best to simply go into the church voluntarily, 
and after all, “if [the priests] were in New England 
themselves, they would go into the churches to 
see their ways of worship.” Again, Williams de- 
clined their invitation, citing his desire to avoid 
the “idolatrous superstitions” of Catholic wor- 
ship. 

The third day at Fort Francis Williams was no 
longer able to avoid the church; his Indian cap- 
tor dragged him there by force, just as the priests 
had warned. Williams sat as close to the door as 
possible, fascinated and repulsed by what he wit- 
nessed. He had never heard a Catholic Mass be- 
fore, and what he “saw [was] a great confusion, 
instead of Gospel Order.” The elaborate liturgy, 
the polyphonic music, and the overabundance of 
priestly noises paired with the ungodly passivity 
of the silent congregation, were indeed far from 
a Gospel Order that privileges congregational 


An anonymous portrait of Jean-Baptiste Hertel de Rouville, the 

commander of the Deerfield Raid. 

Wikimedia Commons 

comprehension and participation. One priest 
delivered the “Mass in a Tongue Unknown to the 
Savages” — what use was such a performance, Wil- 
liams wondered, if those who listened couldn’t 
understand the words? What’s more, another 
priest was “singing Prayers among the Indians 
at the same time” — cacophony and nonsense! 
Williams grimly noted the ceaseless chanting as 
“many others were at the same time saying over 
their Pater Nosters, and Ave Mary, by tale from 
their ... Beads on a String.” Compared to the sim- 
plicity and clarity of Puritan worship, the Catholic 
Mass was incomprehensible idolatry, the music 
aimed at seducing rather than inspiring sincere 
conversion. Williams was appalled. 

Williams reviled the Mass he attended, and al- 
though he was not permitted to supply himself 
or his congregation with the solace and uplift of 
psalmody, he at least was immune to the exot- 
ic allure of the Mass and its music. Fortunately, 
the Boston judge Samuel Sewall sent Williams a 
psalm book (such “care packages” were carried by 
one of the many negotiators from New England 



July 2013 


39 




The Reverend John Williams House, 
Albany Road, Old Deerfield, MA 
in 1939. 

Courtesy of the Boston Public Library 


who tried to secure the Deerfield captives’ 
release for several years). Unable to lead com- 
munal sacred singing — indeed, forbidden to 
congregate in groups of captives larger than 
three — Williams at least had the comfort of 
the psalms for his private contemplation. 
He was finally “redeemed” from captivity in 
October 1706, and it was a relief to hear the 
psalms sung by a godly congregation on his 
return to Boston. 


Interfaith conflict drives the drama of Wil- 
liams’s narrative, in which sacred music in- 
dexes religious differences. Yet despite the 
fact that Native Americans were key players 
in his captivity, Williams gives no attention 
to the Indians’ music. Surely he experienced 
native song; singing was an integral part of 
traditional indigenous spiritual life as well 
as that of Catholic converts. The absence of 
native song sets Williams’s narrative apart 
from other captivity accounts, including that 
by Mary Rowlandson, the Puritan minister’s 
wife who was taken captive in King Philip’s 
War (1675-1676). Her narrative, published in 
1682, includes numerous mentions of her 
captors’ “hideous” singing. 

Williams’s silencing of Native American song 
is suggestive; Indians’ singing would not gain 
Williams any purchase in the ideological bat- 
tle against the Catholic French. Rather than 


dwelling on the frightening vocalizations of 
his captors, Williams concentrated his rhe- 
torical force on the Jesuit priests. He made 
the Catholic Mass the emblem of Otherness 
and exoticized the performance of Jesuit 
priests. 

Williams’s captivity narrative reinforces what 
we already know about religious life in colo- 
nial North America: mutual distrust pitted 
French Catholics against English Protestants. 
It comes as no surprise that Williams used his 
vantage as a captive among Catholics to high- 
light what he perceived as their grotesquely 
performative ceremonies and dangerously 
misleading theology. Writing after his return 
to New England, Williams was able to win all 
of his arguments with Jesuit priests retroac- 
tively. His scornful description of Catholic 
sacred music fit the larger pattern of Puritan 
contempt for Catholic excesses. Williams 
thrilled readers with his descriptions of his 
perseverance despite personal loss on the 
trek to Canada and his unflagging defense 
of his faith in the face of Catholic pressure to 
convert. The Deerfield congregation’s forced 
psalm singing early in their captivity, galling 
as it was, signaled the Puritans’ unshakable 
faith when compared to the incomprehensi- 
ble liturgy of Mass. In Williams’s narrative, 
music was propaganda, scoring ideological 
points in the deadly transatlantic battle be- 
tween England and France. 




40 


The Appendix Out Loud 



Benjamin Breen's illustration is based on an early 
20th century photograph of an Inuit shaman. 


Toolemak’s voice 

canning the horizon off the coast of Greenland in 1822, William Scoresby wit- 
nessed the impossible: floating in the sky was an upside down ship. “It was,” the 
whaling captain wrote, “so well defined, that I could distinguish by a telescope 
every sail, the general rig of the ship, and its particular character; insomuch that 
I confidently pronounced it to be my father’s ship, the Fame.” And this despite the 
fact that no ship was visible upon the water itself. 



July 2013 


41 



“I was so struck with the peculiarity of the 
circumstance,” Scoresby noted, “that I men- 
tioned it to the officer of the watch, stating 
my full conviction that the Fame was then 
cruising in the neighbouring inlet.” Scores- 
by was correct: the airy phantoms not only 
resembled his father’s ship but, like the su- 
pernatural images seen by those with second 
sight, were premonitions of it. Scoresby se- 
nior’s ship subsequently appeared over the 
horiln the same year, the captain of a North- 
west Passage expedition found his ears play- 
ing even stranger tricks than had Scoresby’s 
eyes. Meeting “a few male wizards,” among 
the Igloolik, George Lyon invited their “prin- 
cipal,” named Toolemak, to demonstrate his 
magical skills: 

[He] began turning himself rapidly round, 
and in a loud powerful voice vociferated for 
Tornga with great impatience, at the same 
time blowing and snorting like a walrus. 

[...] Suddenly the voice seemed smoth- 
ered, and was so managed as to sound as if 
retreating beneath the deck, each moment 
becoming more distant, and ultimately 
giving the idea of being many feet below 
the cabin, when it ceased entirely. His wife 
now, in answer to my queries, informed me 
very seriously, that he had lived, and that 
he would send up Tornga. Accordingly, in 
about half a minute, a distant blowing was 
heard very slowly approaching, and a voice, 
which differed from that at first heard, was 
at times mingled with the blowing, until at 
length both sounds became distinct, and 
the old woman informed me that Torn- 
ga was come to answer my questions. I 
accordingly asked several questions of the 
sagacious spirit, to each of which inquiries 
I received an answer by two loud claps on 
the deck, which I was given to understand 
were favourable. 

At length, the “voice gradually sank from our 
hearing,” Lyon related, only to be replaced by 
an “indistinct hissing” that reminded him of 


the tone produced by the wind on the bass 
chord of an Aeolian harp. This was soon 
changed to a rapid hiss like that of a rocket, 
and Toolemak with a yell announced his 
return. I had held my breath at the first dis- 
tant hissing, and twice exhausted myself; 
yet our conjurer did not once respire, and 
even his returning and powerful yell was 
uttered without a previous stop or inspira- 
tion of air. 

What Lyon witnessed was an Inuit shamanis- 
tic performance. Typically, these performanc- 
es took place within a specially erected tent or 
hut, the unnatural shaking of which formed 
part of the uncanny effect. Lyon recorded the 
ceremony, as he did many Inuit practices, 
with an unaffected curiosity that allowed him 
to be drawn further into Inuit culture than 
most white visitors. His journal suggests that 
the Inuit recognized his open-mindedness 
and engaged with him more closely than with 
any of the other members of the expedition. 





©ic anfrcr. 


Images of kraken, monstrous whales, and "leviathans" proliferated in early modern bestiaries. This engraving is from 

Konrad Gesner's Fischbuch, Der zwolffte theil von de Meertheire (1 598), fol. 97r. 

Wikimedia Commons 


42 


The Appendix Out Loud 


Lyon and Scoresby had more than their north- 
erly location in common. Both men were star- 
tled by their Arctic encounters because they 
were unable to demonstrate the origin of the 
strange events in terms of natural law. And 
in this they were, unwittingly, perpetuating a 
tradition in which the Arctic and its inhabi- 
tants stood for the strange, the sublime and 
the supernatural. Since time immemorial 
seamen had encountered the supernatural on 
their northern voyages: they were wooed by 
mermaids, menaced by kraken, whirled into 
maelstroms, pursued by Flying Dutchmen. 

These encounters were at best the stuff of 
myth — images of an oceanic uncanny accru- 
ing to all who had sailed in strange seas. But 
Scoresby and Lyon were no ancient mariners, 
no gullible deckhands. They belonged to a 
new generation of explorers, who, from the 
1770s onwards, observed the seas with eyes 
trained in mathematical mensuration and 
armed with scientific instruments — tele- 
scopes, compasses, sextants, chronometers. 
This generation could, for the first time in 
history, accurately plot their longitude as well 
as their latitude. They were scientific voyag- 
ers, educated to turn unknown seas and un- 
mapped shores into the calibrated lines and 
accurate figures of the naval chart. Careful, 
empirical, rational, they were not given to be- 
lieving in ghosts or observing superstitions. 1 

It was all the more significant, then, that such 
men reported these uncanny auditory and vi- 
sual phenomena when they voyaged in polar 
regions. Georg Forster, the highly educated 
and skeptical man of science who accompa- 
nied Captain Cook on his cruise into Ant- 
arctic waters, noted incident after incident 
in which nature offered staggering sights 
and sounds: “long columns of a clear white 
light, shooting up from the horizon to the 
eastward, almost to the zenith, and gradually 
spreading on the whole southern part of the 
sky.” Nothing fitted expectations; perspec- 
tives were scrambled: “we saw the sea lumi- 
nous at night”; “we passed by a large island of 


ice, which at that moment crumbled to pieces 
with a tremendous explosion”; “the ice is not 
always entirely white, but often tinged, espe- 
cially near the surface of the sea, with a most 
beautiful sapphrine or rather beryline blue.” 

So too the Arctic: with six months of light and 
six of dark, with all-blanketing white-outs in 
which ground and sky were indistinguish- 
able, with compasses useless near the Pole, 
the region seemed a zone where nature’s laws 
were suspended, where the senses were over- 
whelmed by the unexpected. 


Visible science 

and supernatural sound 

The Arctic was a zone of the uncanny because 
the supernatural was increasingly banished 
from realms closer to home by exactly the 
kind of scientific and technological culture 
to which modern navigators themselves ad- 
hered. The Arctic’s indigenous people fasci- 
nated British travelers because of their very 
obliviousness to the empirical, rational, 
scientific culture to which ‘civilized’ Britons 
were committed. Far from studying this di- 
chotomy, many scholars of Native American 
culture in the Arctic have simply perpetuat- 
ed it without questioning the relationship of 
their own work to earlier white idealizations 
of people who seemed to exist beyond civili- 
zation. 2 

Arctic Indians stood at the inflection point of 
early nineteenth-century culture — the point 
at which scientific rationalists and their Ro- 
mantic opponents articulated their oppo- 
sition to each other and yet revealed their 
mutual dependence. In other words, Indians 
came to voice the persistence of a supernat- 
ural beyond the proliferation of texts (math- 
ematical, cartographical, statistical, literary) 
that claimed to comprehend nature. 


July 2013 


43 


In the Romantic era, science had demystified 
the senses, sight especially. By the early 1820s, 
the disciplines of surgery, instrument-mak- 
ing, and physics had advanced enough to 
enable anatomists and oculists to conduct ex- 
periments which changed our understanding 
of the way we see. After Thomas Young and 
Charles Bell’s work on the eye, vision became 
a subject for anatomical analysis rather than 
religious inquisition. If it showed unfocused, 
elusive spirits, these could be understood as 
flaws in the eye or brain, medical conditions 
rather than an actual perception of supernat- 
ural beings. 

It was the application of technology, as much 
as the science of optics itself that removed the 
supernatural from the enlightened world. But 
technology also conferred an unparalleled 
ability to manufacture the supernatural. By 
the 1820s, engineers had constructed a se- 
ries of vision-machines capable of produc- 
ing ghosts at the turn of a handle such as the 
phantasmagoria — essentially an updated and 
moveable magic lantern capable of project- 
ing magnified images through a gauze screen 
into smoky air. The images grew and shrank 
in size and fluttered as the air moved: they 
seemed, like spirits, to have animate life but 
no material substance. In 1833, David Brew- 
ster, by now the foremost scientific expert on 
optics, designed an improvement to allow 
the phantasmagoria to project not just imag- 
es painted on glass, but also reflections of the 
living human body. Flesh could now become 
spirit with the aid of smoke, mirrors, and the 
latest precision lenses. 

Fig. 4. 



In 1832, Brewster published his Letters on Natu- 
ral Magic — a book dedicated to demonstrating 
how many of the encounters that had once 
been thought to be supernatural were now 
explicable as being purely natural. Paradox- 
ically, this demystifying work related many 
stories of hauntings and miracles, as if Brew- 
ster, despite his intention of explaining them 
away, was swayed by their narratives of belief 
in a world that could never be ultimately re- 
duced to empirical facts. Brewster’s ambiv- 
alence about the supernatural was apparent 
in his discussion of the Arctic: he related at 
length Scoresby’s vision of ships in the air 
only to explain it away as a manifestation of 
natural law. Scoresby’s polar miracle was, in 
fact, only a mirage, now explicable by the lat- 
est experiments, demonstrated with mathe- 
matical formulae and geometrical diagrams. 
No longer did the Arctic defy scientific au- 
thority as it did the evidence of the senses. Its 
visions were reducible to abstract knowledge, 
number-relationships illustrated by nothing 
more sensual than a series of angular lines. 

Yet as vision grew increasingly technologized, 
the Poles became landscapes in which a dif- 
ferent kind of supernatural encounter persist- 
ed — an encounter dependent on a sense that 
was not yet subject to mechanical reproduc- 
tion and mathematical explanation: the sense 
of hearing. Sound, whether inarticulate noise 
or articulate voice, was hard to pin down. Its 
origins, movement, and reception were diffi- 
cult to fix and had not yet been captured by 
technology — as the phonograph and tele- 
phone were still nearly a century in the future. 

Not just sound, but indigenous people’s use 
of it, fascinated Victorians because they de- 
fied scientific explanation. Thus it’s notable 
that, as his chief example of the haunting 
power of sound, Brewster chose none other 
than Lyon’s account of his encounter with the 
Inuit shamans who ventriloquize the voices 
of the spirits — reproducing it in full. Even 
for this arch-scientific explicator, then, the 
encounter with the Inuit shaman testifies to 


An illustration from Charles Brewster's Letters on Natural Magic. 

Internet Archive 


44 


The Appendix Out Loud 


sound’s power to elude the knowable — and con- 
tains an attraction to and fascination with the su- 
pernatural. 

This is what Brewster says: 

The ventriloquist ... has the supernatural always 
at his command. In the open fields, as well as 
in the crowded city — in the private apartments, 
as well as in the public hall, he can summon up 
innumerable spirits; and though the persons 
of his fictitious dialogue are not visible to the 
eye, yet they are as unequivocally present to the 
imagination of his auditors as if they had been 
shadowed forth in the silence of a spectral form. 

For Brewster the haunting by voices is an illu- 
sion — a ventriloquism, but he writes as one who 
is convinced by it. The spirits are summoned. The 
speaking persons are present to the imagination. 
And so the Inuit shaman is a talismanic figure be- 
cause he marks the limit at which scientific demy- 
stification — a logical, textual discourse — breaks 
down, precisely because the shaman’s oral powers 
defy the explanatory resources of scientific meth- 
od. The scientific mind knows it can’t be real yet 
believes anyway. 

In fact Brewster’s text and Lyon’s narrative testify 
in their/orm as well as in their content to the capac- 
ity of the oral/aural to elude them and the kinds 
of knowledge they epitomize. Effectively, Brew- 
ster and Lyon, following several earlier visitors to 
the Arctic Indians, write a demonstration of their 
inability to grasp, in their most powerful technol- 
ogies (the textual technologies of measurement 
and record), the Arctic natural world vocalised by 
the shaman. In the process, they reveal both their 
bewilderment at the ineffectiveness of their tech- 
nologies and their fascination by people who are 
not governed by such technologies. 

To such Britons it seemed that the voices uttered 
by the shaman, because they were seemingly with- 
out body yet inhabited a body not their own, called 
his presence into question. It is as if what became 
manifest in the body of the shaman was the con- 
dition of all voices — an unfixable, mobile sound 
that moves through, but is not wholly possessed 
by, a body. 


Apprehended in the shaman’s body, the voices 
that speak through him seemed like the essence 
of speech/sound — articulated spirit, passing into 
and out of body. For an observer educated, like 
Lyon and Brewster, in the European tradition, 
this voice is analogous to the Muse occupying 
the poet (rates), or the god occupying the proph- 
et (Cassandra) — a matter of inspiration. Thus the 
Inuit becomes a present-day example of a figure 
confined, in enlightened countries, to the past (or 
to the uneducated) — the figure of the prophetic 
oracle. For the Indians, however, the shaman mo- 
bilizes the voices of the spirits who animate the 
natural world — plants, rocks animals, sea, sky, 
storm — and the spirits of the dead. By so doing, 
he demonstrates his access to a real spirit world, 
enabling him to interpret dreams, predict future 
events, and cure the sick. In both traditions, then, 
the shaman accesses power via possession. He be- 
comes uncanny, a double presence: he is at once 
himself and more than himself. 

This uncanniness made the shaman enthralling 
for many of the voyagers and men of science who 
visited the Arctic. Although as late as 1750 very few 
Britons had come into contact with Arctic peoples, 
by 1830 a succession of travelers had described 
both the Inuit and the ‘northern Indians.’ Most 
of these travelers were employees of the Hudson’s 
Bay Company (HBC) — traders who lived among 
the Cree and Ojibwa Indians in northern Canada; 
some were trappers who dwelt among the Inuit on 
the Labrador coast; a few were, like Lyon, polar 
explorers who met native people who came out to 
trade with the white men’s ice-bound ships. 

All of these Britons were intrigued by the shaman, 
who became one of the chief figures about whom 
they commented in their journals. When those 
journals were published as travel narratives, they 
established ‘Eskimos’ and ‘northern Indians’ as 
oracular, sublime, ‘prophets of nature’ in Brit- 
ons’ imagination — as well as ‘primitives.’ These 
writings thus shaped Indians in a rather different 
popular image from the images attached to more 
southerly Native Americans with whom white col- 
onists had had centuries of contact (stereotypes 
including drunken savages, brave warriors, noble 
innocents). 


July 2013 


45 


One witness was the HBC trader George Nel- 
son, who had more than twenty years’ experi- 
ence of working with the Cree and Ojibwa. In 
a journal composed in 1823 at Lac La Ronge 
(Northeast Saskatchewan), Nelson recorded 
his profound “astonishment” at the sights 
and, most of all, sounds of the shamans in the 
shaking tent ceremony: 


only white man in the expedition, Hearne was 
dependent upon his companions for survival, 
following their lifeways and directions rather 
than vice versa. From this position, he laud- 
ed the power of shamans’ oral performances, 
revealing a society from which belief in the 
supernatural had not been banished in the 
name of science and civilization. 


The ratder is shaked at a merry rate and all 
of a Sudden, either from the top or below, 
away flies the cords by which the Indian 
was tied into the lap of he who tied him. ... 
It is then that the Devil is at work — Every 
instant some one or other enters, which is 
known to those outside by either the flut- 
tering, the rubbing against the Skins of the 
hut in descending (inside) or the shaking 
or the rattler, and sometimes all together. 
When any enter, the hut moves in a most 
violent manner — I have frequently thought 
that it would be knocked down, or torn out 
of the Ground. 











ich the 
Indian was tied... 

It is then that the 
Devil is at work. 


In 1795 a still stranger account of Indian sha- 
mans was published — Samuel Hearne’s A 
Journey from Prince of Wales’s Fort in Hudson’s Bay 
to the Northern Ocean. Hearne was an employ- 
ee of the HBC who in the early 1770s, led by a 
party of Cree and Dene, walked through the 
Canadian interior to the Arctic shore. The 


Hearne revealed that the shamans mobi- 
lized spirits to cure and curse their fellow 
tribe-members: 

When a friend for whom they have a par- 
ticular regard is, as they suppose, danger- 
ously ill, ... they have recourse to another 
very extraordinary piece of superstition; 
which is no less than that of pretending 
to swallow hatchets, ice-chissels, broad 
bayonets, knives, and the like; out of a 
superstitious notion that undertaking such 
desperate feats will have some influence in 
appeasing death, and procure a respite for 
their patient. 

Reading Hearne in 1797, Samuel Taylor 
Coleridge was fascinated by his account of 
shamanistic practices and the belief these 
practices engendered among the Indians. 
Hearne prompted him to write poetry that 
defers to the oral, as if tracing a passage of 
sound too elusive to be caught on paper — 
what he called “strange power of speech.” 
In this poetry he sought to make the super- 
natural encounter believable for his readers, 
to turn them away from too materialist a cul- 
ture. Coleridge explained that 

I had been reading ... Hearne’s deeply 
interesting anecdotes of... workings on 
the imagination of the Copper Indians ... 
and I conceived the design of showing that 
instances of this kind are not peculiar to 
savage or barbarous tribes, and of illustrat- 
ing the mode in which the mind is affected 
in these cases. 


io'i 


46 


The Appendix Out Loud 



The Arctic as a space of supernatural wonder, as depicted in 
Gustave Dore's 1 876 engraving of Coleridge's epic. 

Wikimedia Commons ,^8il 


A new sonic aesthetic: Coleridge, 
orality and arctic shamanism 

Coleridge’s interest in Hearne was both psy- 
chological and cultural. He wanted to remind 
his educated readers of the power of imagi- 
nation — of what they dismissed, when they 
encountered it among uneducated peasants, 
as superstition. Because its effects among 
the Indians and Inuit were so startling and so 
novel, they were less likely to be so dismissed. 
For Coleridge it was sound more than sight, 
and, in particular, the sound uttered through 
the shaman, in which the supernatural could 
be credibly apprehended — or rather, through 
which enlightened readers could access the 
belief that the occult manipulation of voice 
embodied by the shaman does indeed give 
them spiritual power. 



their abnormality. They seem like shamans — 
voicing spirits who utter through, but are not 
circumscribed by, the body: 


‘The Rime of the Ancyent Marinere,’ 
Coleridge’s greatest poem, was written after 
his exposure to Hearne. The polar region, as 
Coleridge’s mariner describes it, resembles 
Hearne’s (as well as Forster’s and Cook’s) in 
that it is a place of unaccountable phenomena 
that defy mensuration — especially of myste- 
rious sounds: 

The Ice was here, the Ice was there, 

The Ice was all around: 

It crack’d and growl’d, and roar’d and 
howl’d — 

Like noises of a swound. 

(lines 57-60) 

The sonic uncanniness of the Antarctic — a 
place at the opposite pole to enlightened, 
domesticated, and charted Britain, a place 
escaping the scrutiny of science’s visual tech- 
nologies, prepares Coleridge’s readers for 
the later emergence of the supernatural in 
the form of voices emanating from sea and 
sky. The zombified crew, for instance, utter 
sounds that are their own and more than 
their own, sounds profoundly disturbing in 


Sweet sounds rose slowly thro’ their 
mouths 

And from their bodies pass’d 

Around, around flew each sweet sound, 

Then darted to the sun: 

Slowly the sounds came back again 
Now mix’d, now one by one. 

(lines 341-346) 

Intriguingly, the elusiveness of these sounds 
is produced in visual terms — we see them fly- 
ing like birds — although sound, obviously, is 
always invisible. By describing sounds thus, 
Coleridge asks us, as readers, to see what we 
have no experience or possibility of seeing, 
thereby causing us to doubt both the sep- 
arateness of the senses and their efficacy in 
comprehending the phenomenal world. 

By the climax of the poem, sound is the chief 
mode through which the supernatural is en- 
countered, precisely because it cannot be 
fixed or calibrated and because the reader 
cannot simply translate it into a more mea- 
surable form of data. The mariner is as over- 


July 2013 


47 


come by its power as were the Dene who, hearing 
the spirits voiced through the shaman, fainted 
and wasted away: 

The Boat came closer to the Ship 
But I ne spake ne stirr’d! 

The Boat came close beneath the Ship, 

And strait a sound was heard! 

Under the water it rumbled on, 

Still louder and more dread: 

It reach’d the Ship, it split the bay; 

The Ship went down like lead. 

Stunn’d by that loud and dreadful sound, 

Which sky and ocean smote: 

Like one that hath been seven days drown’d 
My body lay afloat; ... 

(lines 575-86) 

Matching its form to its content, ‘The Rime of the 
Ancyent Marinere’ offers itself as a vindication of 
an oral culture. Still apprehended by indigenous 
Americans and uneducated villagers, that power 
would, harnessed in Wordsworth’s and Coleridge’s 
new poetry, give their readers a taste of what their 
commitment to materialist culture deprived them 
of. It would alert them to the sensory and spiritual 
deprivation that this culture enforced in the name 
of measurable knowledge — and thereby puncture 
their complacent participation in that culture. 

In this respect Native Americans were vital fig- 
ures in the development of a revolutionary new 
aesthetic — a sonic aesthetic in which orality was 
both supernatural subject-matter and the osten- 
sible mode of artistic delivery: Wordsworth and 
Coleridge made their poems as ballads to be spo- 
ken, sang, and chanted. This sonic aesthetic had 
spiritual and perceptual revolution as its aim and 
Indians at its root, as Blake acknowledged when, 
in The Marriage of Heaven and Hell, he paid tribute to 
“the North American tribes” who “practise ... rais- 
ing other men into a perception of the infinite.” 

The Romantic shaman was a new, anti-Enlight- 
enment figure shaped by what scientific travelers 
guiltily half-revealed: he was uncannily desirable 
as well as alien because his voicings delimited the 
explanatory power of science. This process had 
consequences for real, as well as poetic indigenes: 


making the northern Indian and the Inuit uncan- 
ny figures conditioned the way Indians were seen 
not just by nineteenth-century poets but also by 
twentieth-century anthropologists (there was far 
greater interest in shamans than, for instance, in 
Inuit women, and in ritual than in domestic work). 

In short, the process shaped Romanticism in 
Britain but also romanticized, for both poets and 
scientists, the Arctic into a zone of exotic other- 
ness. It became a place beyond empirical grasp: 
the real/fantasy land of orality about which those 
living within the textual horizon of rational empir- 
icism dreamed with fear and longing. 


Notes 

1. Scoresby designed a ‘marine-diver’ for taking 
the sea temperature at different depths. See Fer- 
gus Fleming, Barrow’s Boys (London: Grove Press, 
1998), p. 31. 

2. A notable exception being Hugh Brody, The 
People’s Land: Eskimos and Whites in the Eastern Arc- 
tic (New York: Penguin, 1977). A modern travel- 
er’s take on his journey in relation to this histo- 
ry is Jonathan Waterman, Arctic Crossing: A Journey 
Through the Northwest Passage and Inuit Culture (New 
York: Alfred A. Knopf, 2001). 


48 


The Appendix Out Loud 


"Vague Religious Feeling," "Upward Rush of Devotion," and "Re- 
sponse to Devotion," illustrations of mental states from the 1901 book 
Thoughtforms, by Annie Besant and C. W. Leadbeater, 



“To Wait Together upon the 
Lord in Pure Silence” 

Rachel Ozanne 


“The voices of the past are especially lost to 
us. The world of unrecorded sounds is irre- 
claimable, so the disjunctions that separate 
our ears from what people heard in the past 
are doubly profound.” 

When historians say they hope to retrieve the 
“lost voices” of the past, they typically mean 
that they wish to uncover the lives of people 
who did not leave behind written records. His- 
torian Leigh Schmidt, however, reminds us that 
when we talk about historical voices, we can 
also refer to actual uoices. The past was full of 
sights and sounds that we can only imagine. Yet 
if the sounds of the past are “lost to us,” how 
much more are the silences? How did people 
of the past experience silence? In the history 
of the United States, one group in particular 
spent a lot time thinking about and practicing 
silence — Quakers. Because silence was so inte- 
gral to their worship, Quakers, or Friends, can 
help us understand how some people experi- 


enced silence. They can also illuminate how re- 
ligious communities use their understanding of 
what constitutes appropriate religious sound to 
define themselves.* 

Quaker worship services have always consist- 
ed of long periods of silent reflection. In the 
late eighteenth century they faced challenges 
to their silent practice from the rapid growth 
of new evangelical groups, such as the Bap- 
tists and the Methodists. Indeed, as Friends 
ministers encountered the ecstatic, emotional 
worship services of Methodists, they began to 
define their practice of silence not only in tradi- 
tional Quaker terms, but in opposition to these 
evangelical groups. Whereas Quakers perceived 
their own worship as reflecting godly silence, 
they believed that Methodists’ loud, noisy 

*The title for this article comes from a book on Quaker worship 

practices. George Keith, The Benefit, Advantage and Glory of 

Silent Meetings (London, 1670), p. 14. 


July 2013 


49 


worship would lead them astray from the true 
guidance of the Inner Light, or the Holy Spirit. 
Quakers believed that such noisy behavior had 
no place in the true Christian community.* 

Late eighteenth-century Quaker ministers’ 
journals reveal that, for them, “silence” meant 
more than the simple absence of speech or 
singing that characterized their worship ser- 
vices. Silence also referred to an internal con- 
dition — one that minister Job Scott described 
as a “silent introversion and feeling after God.” 
Scott’s contemporary Elias Hicks explained 
that silent worship was most effective “when 
the mind is silently prostrated at the throne 
of grace, and helped to be sequestered from 
all intruding thoughts, and wholly centered in 
and upon Jehovah.” True experience of silence 
occurred only when the individual experienced 
“entire sequestration from everything of an out- 
ward or external nature.” Only then would his 
or her soul be “permitted to enter into the holy 
place.”* 

Silence, then, required Quakers to quiet not 
only their voices, but their minds as well. Si- 
lence could also refer to a lack of speech — the 
result of individual, silent practice. Scott ex- 
plained that he sometimes “felt great caution 
not to move in words” — not to speak during 
worship — “unless a fresh opening induced 
me” — unless he felt certain that the Light in- 
spired him to speak. He believed that minis- 
ters were “often closed up in profound silence 
by the outward expectations of the people, not 
having liberty ... to gratify those itching ears.” 
In other words, ministers were in fact prevent- 
ed from speaking, because the people around 
them expected to hear something that the Spirit 
did not want them too. Priscilla Hunt reportedly 
described this phenomenon as “something cast 
in my way . . . whereby the pure flowing of gospel 
communication is obstructed.” Hicks believed 
that sometimes it was the minister’s responsi- 
bility to set the example of “silence” to other 
Quakers by refraining from speaking, if he did 
not feel genuinely moved by the Light to speak. 


*By the beginning of the eighteenth century their ecstatic prac- 
tices had been mostly tempered, but silent worship remained 
central to Friends' worship. From its beginning in the 1640s, 
George Fox and other leading Quaker ministers emphasized 
the importance of individual connection to the Inner Light, their 
term for the Holy Spirit. They taught that the way to achieve 
this union with the Light was to practice silent contemplation 
during meetings for worship. Instead of listening to a pre-pre- 
pared sermon by an educated minister, any Friend could 
potentially be moved by the Light during worship to stand and 
address the group. During the seventeenth century, Quaker 
silences were nevertheless characterized by ecstatic worship 
practices; the name "Quakers" came from the way that they 
shook and quaked when filled with the Holy Spirit. Thomas 
Hamm, The Quakers in America (New York: Columbia Univer- 
sity Press, 2003), p. 13ff. 


f All Friends' worship meetings featured a period of silence 
at the beginning that would give way to informal preaching 
by one or more Quakers, if they were inspired to speak. In 
theory, any Friend could speak if they felt so compelled but 
in practice recognized ministers spoke most frequently. They 
were also most likely to leave behind an account of their 
experiences because they often wrote about their ministerial 
journeys. Though Quaker journals followed a general formula, 
individual ministers frequently embellished their narratives 
with reflections on theology and Quaker worship practices, 
making them a good source of information about the internal, 
individual experience of silence during worship. 

The ministers’ experience of silence was also 
sometimes painful — as though it were a palpa- 
ble absence of God. Scott in particular recalled 
many instances in which an extended period 
of “silence,” meaning lack of communication 
from God, became emotionally distressing to 
him. In December 1779, he visited a number of 
families in Dartmouth. He reported, “It was a 
time of great trial: I was shut up in silence, pain, 
and poverty of spirit ... .” He persevered in visit- 
ing families in the area, but “still for sometime 
found no relief,” because the Light did not com- 
municate with him for weeks. Eventually, how- 
ever, his “tongue again was loosed,” and his 
“confidence” was “renewed.” For Scott, God’s 
“silence”, or lack of spiritual communication, 
could be incredibly emotionally taxing because 
of his fear that God might never “speak” to him 
again. 


50 


The Appendix Out Loud 


In addition to internal practices of silence, 
however, Friends in the late eighteenth centu- 
ry defined silence in opposition to the behav- 
iors they observed of both Baptists and Meth- 
odists. Quakers objected to these groups’ 
worship services because of their tendency to 
wordiness and speeches. Even though he had 
been raised in the Society of Friends, Scott 
went through a rebellious period in which he 
attended Baptist services. He explained that 
when he was young, he attended Baptist wor- 
ship services because “Friends meetings were 
oftener held in silence than suited my itching 
ear.” He “loved to hear words,” especially on 
“doctrines and tenets of religion,” and “the 
Baptist preachers filled [his] ears with words, 
and [his] head with arguments.” As an adult, 
however, he returned to the Quaker church, 
because all of those words at the Baptist meet- 
ings failed to touch his “heart.” In 1790, Hicks 
visited a group of former Friends in Vermont. 
He recalled that they had initially been “con- 
vinced of the principle of the Inward Light.” 
Over time, however, they had abandoned “the 
principle of Divine Light and Grace.” Instead, 
“those who apprehended it their duty to teach 
had got too much into words and speculative 
preaching and doctrine — which soon pro- 
duced discord and a schism among them.” 
According to both Hicks and Scott, silence 
meant that people did not become enamored 
with hearing words but instead kept quiet. 
This silence was necessary in order for them 
to experience genuine, personal connec- 
tion with the Holy Spirit. Only true spiritual 
communion with the Spirit could provide the 
truth, and Friends were not supposed to rely 
on others’ words but their own experiences.* 


*Of course, Scott and Hicks were both known for their 
preaching. The difference for them would have been 
that their sermons were unprepared, and that they did 
not have formal ministerial training. Additionally, they 
believed that spending too much time on doctrinal dis- 
cussions distracted Friends from true worship. Beginning 
in the early nineteenth century, Hicks would come into 
conflict with Friends who had been influenced by their 
interactions with evangelical groups and therefore want- 
ed to impose stricter doctrinal standards on the Society 
of Friends as a whole. Scott died in 1793 before this 
conflict began. H. Larry Ingle, Quakers in Conflict: the 
Hicksite Reformation (Knoxville, TN: The University of 
Tennessee Press, 1986). 


Even more disconcerting to Friends, how- 
ever, were the Methodists’ “noisy” worship 
practices. In 1797, Hicks reported that a joint 
meeting of Friends and Methodists in Saint 
Michaels, Maryland went very well, except 
for the presence of one man who made “loud 
groanings” while another Friend was speak- 
ing. As he sat in silence, Hicks felt inspired 
to stand up and inform the group of people 
there of “the hurtful tendency of such incon- 
sistent conduct” — the groaning — and he en- 
couraged them to practice “stillness” in wor- 
ship meetings. 

Scott was less put off by this behavior than 
Hicks, but he still believed that noisy worship 
would lead the Methodists astray. In 1788, 


* THE QVAKERS DREAM; 

0 R, 

h The Devil's Pilgrimage in England ; 

p, - BEING 

Aft infallible Relation of their feveralMeetings, 

^teeklftgt,Sh ( k!ngr,Quk!ri|» : ftoitli>gi, Yellihit^Howllngt, Ti am* 
Biifgiin tht Batdsi, undHlftngr In ih« Bdlltii With aNirratlaeof 
«h»Vr fever*; Argunw»ti,Ttneii,PriJtclplci,an(l ftrarge D ftrlnr : The 
Grange and wonderful Saunical Apparlciont,*r!d the appearing of ite 
Devil unto them fa thaiikenala of* black Bo*r,s0,g with 0 r tiring c> r, 
and * black man without ahead, cauliag the Doga to bark, the Swine 
tocejr, and the Cat tel to run, to the great adnioniion of all that IhiU 
read the lame. 



irfOdBgfmteei for G. Horten, and are to he fold at the ffoyal 
E*dung«iaG»rBhi!,»<$5. 


The Quakers were originally associated with noise, not silence: 
this 1655 pamphlet attacks their supposed "Shreekings, Shak- 
ings, Quakings, Roarings, Yellings, Howlings, [and] Tremblings in 
the Bodies." The accompanying woodcut shows Quaker women 
parading nude and a kissing couple, amongst other sins. 
Wikimedia Commons 


July 2013 


51 


he attended a meeting at which the Friends met 
“mostly among such as were not of our society, 
many of them called Methodists.” He explained 
positively that “some of their hearts have been 
touched with a life coal from the holy altar.” He 
saw in their excited form of worship a genuine 
connection to the Holy Spirit. He was neverthe- 
less troubled because they seemed “very unset- 
tled, many having hurried forward into much 
religious activity, being very noisy, talkative, and 
almost if not quite ranting.” He believed that 
their energetic worship practices distracted them 
from “the truth,” but he remained hopeful that 
they would “finally shake off their religious exer- 
cise,” which indicated a hasty entrance “into reli- 
gious performances without the pure leadings of 
truth therein.” Scott implied that Quaker silence 
demonstrated the patience necessary for a true 
communion with the Inner Light, rather than 
the distraction of the physical demonstrations of 
Methodist worship. 

For some Quakers, even being in the tumult of a 
Methodist worship service caused great uneasi- 
ness, because their style of worship felt wrong. On 
one occasion, Joseph Hoag attended a service in 
a Methodist meetinghouse. He was immediately 
uncomfortable there, because the Methodists in- 
vited him to preach from a pulpit, which Quakers 
did not use. At first he concluded that he “could 
not open [his] mouth,” because of the inappropri- 
ateness of the setting. After sitting in silence for a 
while, however, he felt “the Word of Life to arise in 
[his] mind,” and he decided to speak to them. Ini- 
tially “there was considerable whispering over the 
meeting,” but he claimed that “the first sentence 
spoken stilled them.” Despite his perception that 
“Truth reigned” during the meeting, when it end- 
ed he “felt a caution to take care not to be drawn 
away by the affections of the people.” Instead, he 
left immediately to stay with a Friend who lived 
nearby, “away from all the noise.” 

Just as Quaker ministers cautioned against wor- 
ship services that emphasized wordy sermons, 
they warned against the noisy bodily demon- 
strations of Methodists and other evangelicals, 
because they distracted from the Inner Light’s 
ability to touch their hearts. Scott described sev- 
eral meetings with Methodists in 1788. Though 
at times he was encouraged by their occasional 


silent behavior during worship, more frequently 
he observed their noise. He explained that he at- 
tended many meetings with Methodists and Bap- 
tists during his trip to the south. He felt kinship 
with them, because their “societies” were in their 
“infancy” and their spirit was “near to [his] life.” 
He worried, however, that they were “in imminent 
danger of being stifled by a multiplicity of lifeless 
performances.” In 1793, Hicks argued that “true 
worship” would not reflect “the fruitlessness of 
mere bodily exercise in our religious performanc- 
es.” These practices, he claimed, were meaning- 
less without “quickening virtue of the Word of 
Eternal Life influencing and assisting the soul in 
that solemn act.” 

In the late eighteenth century, one religious 
group’s “noise” could be another group’s pas- 
sionate expression of religious fervor. Where one 
group saw “lifeless” physical exercises, another 
witnessed powerful spiritual expression. Quak- 
ers understood themselves as a “silent” people in 
contrast to the behaviors of their contemporaries, 
like the Methodists. They defined silence not only 
by their own practices but by comparing them- 
selves to others: silent, and therefore genuine, 
worship was not present in the loud, noisy, ecstat- 
ic Methodist meetings. Thus, through their expe- 
riences with Methodists, Quakers reinforced their 
own group identity as a people who did not make 
noise during worship. Methodists, by contrast, 
used ecstatic worship practice to gain and consol- 
idate a community, attracting a steady stream of 
new converts. In either case, the community’s re- 
lationship to holy sounds — whether silent or out 
loud — was essential to defining who belonged.* 


*This argument bears a certain similarity to Ann Taves's argu- 
ment that Methodists disputed among themselves what con- 
stituted authentic religious experience and what was merely 
"enthusiasm." Ann Taves, Fits, Trances, and Visions: Experienc- 
ing Religion and Explaining Experience from Wesley to James 
(Princeton, New Jersey: Princeton University Press, 1999], 

This relates to Jacques Attali's idea that the "organization 
of sounds is ... a tool for the creation or consolidation of a 
community, a totality." Jacques Attali, "Noise: the Political 
Economy of Music," in The Sound Studies Reader, ed. Jona- 
than Sterne (New York: Routledge, 2012), 32. 


52 


The Appendix Out Loud 


Fiction Excerpt: 

The Descent of the Lyre 

Will Buckingham 


For several years, I traveled in pursuit of a strange image: 
an icon of a guitarist-saint with bandaged hands. Looking 
back, I am no longer sure how it was that I first imag- 
ined or dreamed of this image; but it must have been some 
time back in 2005 or 2006, when I made two short visits 
to Bulgaria, claimed home 0/ the mythical musician-king 
Orpheus. On those two visits, I spent a lot of time visiting 
mountain valleys and hillside chapels; and after my return 
from one or another 0/ these journeys, the image of this 
saint appeared to me — the guitar, the bandaged hands, 
the grave expression. As time went on, this image came to 
obsess me so much that eventually, despite the fact that I 
am not a painter, I sat down and painted my jirst and only 
icon painting, working in gouache on board. 

There is and never has been any such saint; but having 
painted the icon of this strange figure, I felt somehow 
bound to him. Then back in 2007, I had the opportunity 
to travel to Bulgaria/or a third time. On this third journey, 
I set out with three things: a guitar, the crude icon paint- 
ing, and the intention to write a novel about this invented 
saint, this unorthodox Orthodox saint. His name, I al- 
ready knew, was Ivan of Gel a, or Ivan Gelski, his surname 
taken from the name of the Bulgarian village that is said to 
have been the birthplace of Orpheus. 

I spent eight weeks traveling through the mountains and 
small towns of Bulgaria, accompanied by my guitar and 
my patron saint; and I returned home with a clutch of 
notes and drafts that eventually became my novel, The 
Descent of the Lyre (2012). 



in the Rodopi mountains, to his adulthood as an outlaw in 
the hills of Bulgaria, to his success on the concert stage of 
Paris as a guitarist, to his eventual return home as a saint 
of sorts. Here, I reproduce three extracts from the novel: 
three variations that relate, in one way or another, to the 
story 0/ Orpheus. 

The book is finished and is now in the hands 0/ readers, 
but that original image of Ivan Gelski still stares down at 
me from the mantelpiece. As I meet his gaze, I still feel a 
shudder 0/ obligation towards him as his jirst and perhaps 
only disciple. I had not expected to spend so much time re- 
counting his life — his zhitie, or saintly biography, as they 
say in Bulgaria. 

Painting saints, it turns out, is something of a perilous 
undertaking. 


This novel, in the form that it has eventually taken, is per- 
haps best seen as a series of variations on the theme 0/ Or- 
pheus — following the life of Ivan Gelski from his childhood 


July 2013 


53 




Extract One: 


Thejirst extract comes from the very beginning of the book, 
set in the village of Gela before I van’s birth. It tells the tale 
of how the future guitarist’s uncle meets with his untimely 
death, and how loan, even whilst still in the womb, has 
already become a musician. 



^3 | he music was already there before 
fsSr j he was born. He lay in his mother’s 


| womb and listened to her heart thud 
like a tupan. His eyes were closed, 
but his ears attuned to the rhythms of his moth- 
er’s body — the unsteady ruchenitsas of her laugh- 
ter, the slowing and quickening kopanitsas of her 
changing moods, the steady pravo horo of the 
hours she spent weaving at the loom. The music 
was there, as if awaiting his arrival, lying in am- 
bush for him as he made his way down the road 
that led into existence. 


He was the first of his mother’s children to live 
beyond the womb, the first to open his eyes and 
see the soft green of the upland fields and mead- 
ows of the village of Gela. An elder brother and 
sister, twins, had died the year before his birth. 
His mother would later consider him to be not the 
first, but the third. 

The music was already there, not only before 
his birth, but before his conception. His uncle, 
his mother’s brother, had been a musician. His 
name, also, was Ivan. And he plucked the strings 
of the tambura with such sweetness it was said to 
bring peace to the animals of the forest, to calm 
the hearts of bears and wolves, so that they would 
lumber away and cause nobody any harm. Like 
Orfei, the old women of the village said: like Or- 
fei, who once had been king. But uncle Ivan had 
killed himself in the spring before the child’s 
birth, whilst his nephew swam, no larger than the 
length of a human thumb, in the many rhythms of 
his mother’s womb. 


They found the body hanging from a cherry tree, 
drenched in a rain of yellow blossom. When the 
fruits budded and swelled later that year, they 
were more abundant than anybody could remem- 
ber. 


Nobody asked why uncle Ivan took his life. In 

54 The Appendix Out Loud 


times such as these — when the countryside was 
full of robber bands who would cut a man’s throat 
for a few coins, when Sultan Selim III sat uneasily 
on his throne listening to a million insects gnaw- 
ing at the foundations of the empire, when those 
who toiled for a living on the hillsides were at the 
mercy of the rich, as they always are and always 
have been — in times such as these, what requires 
explanation is not why a man should wish to die, 
but rather why life persists at all. 

A child, no more than seven or eight, brought the 
news of the suicide. Wandering on the hillside he 
had seen the man’s body hanging from the tree. 
He ran to the village in tears. The dead man’s sis- 
ter, on hearing the news, touched her hand to her 
belly, retired to the house and closed the door. 
Through her tears she murmured blessings upon 
the child; and the child, shut in the singing, puls- 
ing cauldron of her womb, listened as she sang 
her brother’s name, over and over, two syllables, 
the second stressed, like the uneven steps of a 
dance: Ivan, Ivan, Ivan. 


000 


Extract Two: 

I van is now living in the hills, having taken to banditry 
ajter the abduction of his bride-to-be on the night before 
their planned wedding. Seueral years have passed, and he 
is now leader of an outlaw band. It is here, in the moun- 
tains, that he meets with the Jewish-Croatian guitarist 
Solomon Kuretic, who is captured while traueliny to the 
court of the Ottoman Sultan. Ajter his capture, I van offers 
a challenge: either the guitarist must play something to 
ease the suffering of the outlaw’s heart, or he will be killed. 

Solomon did not need to wait long. Ivan returned 
to the encampment within the hour. The first sign 
of his arrival was the gaidar, who ceased playing 
his pipes. Then Ivan appeared out of the darkness, 
on the further side of the hill. As he came close to 
the fire, Solomon noticed the grave, bearded face, 
the deep-set eyes that had something wild about 
them. The new arrival, the Voyvod, spoke with 
Boyko the standard-bearer, then he came from the 
fire to the tree where Solomon was tethered, ac- 
companied by the German-speaker. He crouched 
down in front of the prisoner and looked into his 
eyes. Solomon looked back, blinking occasionally. 


For the first time since his capture, he felt afraid. 
And cold, too, with the wind that came across the 
hillside. His head throbbed where it had hit the 
rocks. The moment he thought of the pain, it came 
flooding back, and he winced. He could smell 
Ivan’s breath, and the animal reek coming off the 
furs he was wearing. The one who spoke German 
muttered something to the Voyvod, who broke his 
gaze and turned his head. The two men conversed 
for a while in Bulgarian. Then the Voyvod walked 
over to Solomon’s guitar case, which was lying to 
his side. He kicked it with his toe, but gently, and 
asked the German-speaker something. 

“He wants to know what it is,” the German-speak- 
er translated. 

“Tell him it is a guitar.” 

The Voyvod looked puzzled. 

“Music,” said Solomon. 

“Muzika,” the translator said. 

“Muzika,” Solomon repeated. 

Ivan Voyvoda frowned, and then muttered some- 
thing else to the translator. 

“He says that he wants you to open the case. He 
wants to see the instrument.” 

“You will have to untie me first.” 

After a short discussion, Ivan leaned over, and 
taking a knife cut the ropes that tied Solomon. He 
said something to the translator, who had taken 
his pistol from his belt and was pointing it at the 
musician. 

“Open.” 

Solomon got to his feet, but he was stiff from long 
sitting, and he wavered a little, steadying himself 
by reaching out to the trunk of the tree. Then he 
undid the latches of the case and opened it. The 
top of the guitar glowed dull orange. 

“Tambura,” said Ivan. 


“Kitara,” the translator replied. 

Ivan stood over the captive, watching him lift the 
guitar from its case. As the prisoner picked up 
the instrument, his hand brushed lightly over the 
strings, which hummed in the night. The image 
passed through Ivan’s mind, so fleetingly that he 
hardly noticed it, of a blizzard of yellow blossom. 

Solomon stood, holding his guitar in his hand. 
“Kitara,” he said, and he smiled. 

Ivan did not smile back. He spoke to the translator 
for a few moments more, then turned and headed 
back towards the fire. The translator, who was still 
pointing the pistol at the musician, spoke softly. 
“The Voyvod has offered you a wager,” he said. 

“What kind of wager?” 

“It is simple. He has gone to prepare a place for 
you by the fire. Tonight, the Voyvod will give you 
food and drink, and all the hospitality that is 
proper for an honored guest. Then he will ask you 
to play.” 

“And the wager?” Solomon said. 

“The wager is this. If you play with sufficient skill 
to ease his suffering, he will spare you. But if your 
playing does not please him, if it does not still his 
rage and his pain, he will kill you.” 

“If I am to die,” Solomon said slowly, “how shall I 
die, and when?” 

“Our Voyvod will make sure your death is quick. 
If you have not succeeded by the time that the sun 
rises over the hill, then he will plant a bullet here.” 
The translator gently pressed his gun into the 
middle of Solomon’s forehead. Then he placed it 
back in his belt and put his arm around the musi- 
cian. “But that is for later,” he said. “For now, let 
us eat and drink as brothers.” 

So the two men went to join the circle by the 
flames, the tall, pale Jewish musician who held 
his guitar in his hands, and the merchant who had 
fallen on hard times; and when Solomon took his 
seat, the haiduti welcomed him, as if he was al- 
ready one of their number. 


July 2013 


55 


Ivan sat on the far side of the fire, poking at the 
embers with a stick. 

Solomon shivered as the haiduti passed around 
clay cups, glazed with green and filled with rakiya. 
Ivan Voyvoda offered a toast, raising his cup, and 
the men all responded, taking care to look each 
other in the eye in turn. Solomon swallowed the 
brandy and tried not to wince, but in truth he was 
not feeling much like feasting. 

The German speaker, who only now introduced 
himself as Asen, and who became increasingly 
voluble and friendly the more they drank, trans- 
lated for the musician, and the other men pressed 
him with questions about life in Vienna, about the 
women there, and about his music. It would have 
seemed that the band were a model of hospitali- 
ty were it not for the fact that hanging over Solo- 
mon’s head was the threat of death the following 
dawn. Yet in this respect, he was no different from 
the others, for whom every day offered the pros- 
pect of a new and different death. Solomon was 
not the only man on that hillside who was living in 
the shadow of his own destruction, and perhaps 
it was this, above all, that led to the sense of kin- 
ship, even of friendship, that his captors felt to- 
wards him. 

Whatever the reason, they broke bread togeth- 
er, drank rakiya and wine, feasted on fish pulled 
from the streams and the rivers — silvered trout 
that crackled as they cooked on the embers, and 
on mutton and on blackened peppers that tasted 
of sun. And although Solomon wanted more than 
anything to keep his head, so that he might play 
well — he had played for love before, for the hearts 
of women, but never for his life — he could not re- 
fuse the endless toasting, so that by the time the 
evening was well advanced, he was singing haid- 
ut songs along with the others, accompanied by 
the gaidar, songs of bold raids, of fallen friends, 
of hatreds and revenge and of quiet meadows 
where the trees sang with the sounds of finches 
and sparrows. And even though he did not know 
the words, it did not matter. He made up his own 
words, singing about his home, about the Danube 
he loved, about Clara, about his childhood, so that 
had he not been already driven half-mad by his 
long journey, by the blow to his head, by the fear 
that was growing inside him moment by moment, 


by the drone of the pipes and the rough sound of 
so many men’s voices, he might have stepped back 
and wondered that this was a strange way to spend 
what could be his final night on earth. 

But he sang also because whilst he sang, the mo- 
ment when he would have to play had not yet 
come; because whilst he sang, he could imagine 
that he was simply a traveller enjoying the hospi- 
tality of shepherds and villagers, a traveller who 
might, when the dawn came, depart on the road 
that led east to Constantinople. 

When the moon was high overhead, the singing 
came to a close. The gaidar ceased playing, and 
Ivan Voyvoda said something in a low voice, some- 
thing that made all the men laugh, all except Sol- 
omon. Asen did not translate. Solomon was sway- 
ing a little, more drunk than he could remember 
having ever been; and when he managed to focus, 
he saw that there all of the men were staring at 
him. 

Solomon took the guitar and placed it in his lap. 
He wrapped his arms about it and closed his eyes. 
The world was pitching and reeling like a ship. 
Ivan Voyvoda muttered something else, and this 
time Asen did translate. “The Voyvod asks you to 
play,” he said. “He asks you to play to ease his suf- 
fering heart.” 

Solomon ran his fingers along the strings. His 
pale right hand hovered over the sound hole, his 
left crouched on the fingerboard. He paused, 
tested the tuning, and made what adjustments 
he could; but because of the drink it was hard to 
be sure whether he was making things better or 
worse. Then he played a chord — an E minor that 
set the four open strings thrumming — just to test 
the sound. He ran through another few chords. 
Then he looked into the fire. 

What can a man play, he wondered, to save his 
life? And because none of those things he had per- 
formed on the concert stage were adequate to the 
occasion, because an encampment in the Rhodope 
mountains, surrounded by men who have just 
slaughtered every last one of your travelling com- 
panions, is no place for delicate Viennese waltzes, 
for the fripperies of the salons of Europe, he sim- 
ply let his fingers guide him. He played the light- 


56 


The Appendix Out Loud 


est of passages in harmonics, echoed them on the 
bass strings, playing in heavy rest-strokes with his 
thumb, a melody that came to him from nowhere, 
or perhaps from everywhere, from the long road 
he had travelled, from his regret at leaving Clara, 
from the fear that was settling in his belly, coiled 
like a guard dog only half-asleep, from these hill- 
sides with their gorges and valleys, their upland 
meadows and rushing streams filled with trout 
and fringed by green ferns, from the music he had 
heard played in the houses of peasants along the 
way, from the sky above with its incomprehensible 
stars, and from the eyes of the men who sat lis- 
tening to him, immobile, no longer even passing 
around the rakiya, but simply listening. The melo- 
dy inched its way up the stave, fugue-like, repeat- 
ing each time, but never quite the same, a melody 
like the river that, as some sage once said, one can 
never step into twice, but that remains the same 
river. There were waterfalls of arpeggios, swirl- 
ing whirlpools of triplets, slow-moving depths 
on the lower strings, clashes that were only part- 
ly resolved before becoming still further clashes, 
dissonances and tensions and cross-rhythms that 
built upon each other until Solomon’s hands were 
a blur; but somehow, out of this chaos of notes, 
the same melody, returning again and again. Then 
his hands slowed, and his left hand moved up to 
the top of the fingerboard where the melody ap- 
peared once more, modulating into the minor key 
with such extraordinary sweetness that — had he 
still been walking in those hills, had he not been 
torn to pieces by savage women as a punishment 
for spurning their advances — even Orfei himself 
would have wept to hear it. Solomon pulled the 
melody from the guitar in long skeins, drawing it 
out like silk. And then the tempo quickened, the 
discords becoming more pronounced, rhythms 
of the soil and of the rocks and of the trees, un- 
countable rhythms felt only in the body, begin- 
ning to take over. The gaidar smiled and leaned 
forward. He had heard nothing like this before, 
and yet it was as if he had always been waiting to 
hear it. His fingers twitched, following the flood 
of ornaments and grace notes. Asen leaned back, 
breathless. Boyko put his face in his hands, for 
what reason it is impossible to tell. And Solomon 
played on, as the sparks flew up into the night, 
and the dead on the hillsides, unseen, clustered 
around to listen, because it is not every day that 
you get a concert such as this, and if the dead are 


not easily roused, they are not entirely intractable; 
and as the dead assembled, although they could 
not be seen, the haiduti shivered at their presence 
and at the strange spell that Solomon was weav- 
ing, not a music of the head, nor even of the heart, 
but of the hands that danced like ghosts in the 
firelight, the hands and the body and the ancient 
earth singing through the body and the sinews 
and the blood. 

Then the melody eased, became simple again. 
Played on the bass strings. Echoed once in the 
higher register. Again, but more gently, in the 
bass. And again at the top of the guitar, but in har- 
monics, clear and pure as a mountain spring, the 
final note so quiet that it was not certain whether 
it was played, or simply imagined. 

Solomon opened his eyes. His head was pounding 
and he was damp with sweat. He looked around 
the fire. Nobody clapped. Nobody moved. Then 
he saw Ivan Voyvoda: and tears were streaming 
down the man’s face. 

The Voyvod rolled his shoulders and cleared his 
throat. His men turned and looked at him with 
astonishment, for they had never once seen him 
weep. He then let his head hang, so that the tears 
fell into his lap. His verdict was murmured so soft- 
ly it was almost inaudible. “The Jew lives.” 


a©© 




As the dead assem- 
bled l although they 
could not be seen , 
the haiduti shivered 
at their presence 
and at the strange 
spell that Solomon 
was weaving. 



July 2013 


57 


Extract Three: 

The jinal passage comes from a later section of the book, 
loan’s encounter with Solomon eventually leads him to 
take up the cjuitar and trauel to Paris; but the protagonist 
in this final extract is not Ivan. Instead it is the Spaniard 
Fernando Sor, one of the greatest guitarists of the early 
nineteenth century, and the catalyst for Ivan’s eoentual 
trans/ormation/rom guitarist to saint. 

The sickness was getting worse, and the rain did 
not help. It made him long for the clear cold of 
Moscow. Or for the warm sun of Spain. But not 
London, that wretched town with her mist and her 
foul odours that drifted up from the all but life- 
less river, and her squat, charmless citizens. He 
longed for everywhere except London. 

Ferdinand pulled the blankets more closely 
around himself, and leaned towards the fire. The 
rain was streaming down the window with steady 
determination, as if it did not intend to let up 
for weeks. Through the glass, he could see low 
clouds, brown and heavy. He shivered again, and 
muttered a prayer to the Virgin in Spanish, the 
prayer that as a boy he had intoned every morning 
in the monastery school of Montserrat, and that 
was almost the only thing that remained of what 
had once been his faith. These days, he only used 
Spanish for prayers and curses, an exile not only 



from his homeland but also from his own tongue; 
and the memory of that monastery between those 
strange rocks, where you could smell the sea on 
the air, and where the hillsides were filled with 
the sounds of the practicing choirs, was one that 
made the cold seem even more severe. He sneezed 
and looked gloomily into the flames. 

This sickness had happened before, and he knew 
it was not serious. He had learned to endure 
much worse cold during those crystalline winters 
in Moscow when Felicite, wrapped in furs, her 
cheeks red as apples, would put her small gloved 
hand in his, and they would walk through the 
streets nodding to acquaintances and admirers. 
She had been the brazier at which he had warmed 
himself for those years in Russia, and despite her 
small frame, he had believed then that her body 
could provide fuel and warmth enough for the re- 
mainder of his life, were it not for the others who, 
his jealous eye had already long noted, clamoured 
to steal a bit of that same warmth for themselves. 

He had endured much worse, and yet this late au- 
tumn damp, without Felicite to make him warm 
broth and to put her arms around him and to re- 
assure him that the sickness would not last, was 
insufferable. Their journey back from Moscow 
had been frigid, despite the clear and generous 
sunshine that is peculiar to September and that 
had blessed them for every mile of the way. It had 
been so different from the journey they had taken 
together from London to Moscow three years be- 
fore, cuddling in the back of the coach, giggling 
in lodging houses, when he had been astonished 
at her youth and her beauty and the suppleness of 
her body. 

He heard a knock at the door. It opened before he 
could say anything. He hoped it might be Felicite, 
for he had not seen her for several days; but in- 
stead it was Antoine Meissonnier, dressed immac- 
ulately, an urbane smile that was impossible to 
read on his face, and a sheaf of papers underneath 
his arms. The sufferer sneezed again. 

“Ferdinand,” said the visitor. “You are still sick?” 

Ferdinand sneezed again by way of assent. 

“I trust that Felicite looks after you well.” There 


58 


The Appendix Out Loud 


was a kind of flicker in his smile that made 
Ferdinand uneasy. 

“Very well, thank you,” he said. 

“She is acclimatising to Paris again, after so 
long away?” 

“I believe so. Antoine, please, sit down.” Fer- 
dinand indicated to a chair. 

Antoine arranged himself in the chair careful- 
ly, crossing his long legs. “I have brought the 
proofs,” he smiled. “Would you care to take 
a look?” 

Ferdinand reached out from underneath 
the blanket and took the papers. He looked 
through, nodding as he did so. 

“Of course, you will want to examine them 
more carefully when you are not so inconve- 
nienced by illness, but you should find every- 
thing is in order. It is, if you do not mind me 
saying, a fine collection. A first-class collec- 
tion. I am particularly moved by the Opus 28. 
It was written, I presume, in Moscow?” 

“Torzhok,” the other man said. “We spent 
several days in Torzhok. They embroider the 
most beautiful figures out of gold. I bought 
a dress for Felicite to wear. We walked along 
the river in the sunshine under the willow 
trees...” The memory seemed to precipitate 
him into a fresh bout of melancholy and he 
shuddered pathetically, his teeth chattering 
together. “Antoine,” he said after a few mo- 
ments, regaining a sense of his composure, 
“may I offer you brandy?” 

“No, thank you,” Antoine smiled. “It is still 
early.” 

“You do not mind if I do?” 

“By all means.” 

He placed the papers down on a table, slipped 


off the cocoon of blankets and got to his feet. 
Antoine suspected that he was afflicted more 
by sadness than by the cold that was causing 
him to sneeze, and as he watched the sick 
man pour himself a brandy, he wondered at 
the precise reason for this gloomy humour. 
Ferdinand drank the brandy standing up, 
then he returned to his chair by the fire and 
enshrouded himself once again in the blan- 
kets. Antoine looked out of the window. The 
rain was easing a little. “I should be depart- 
ing,” he said. “I only wished to bring you 
the proofs for your approval. It is, as I have 
already said, magnificent work.” He smiled 
with his teeth but not with his eyes. 

Ferdinand propped his head on his hand. He 
could feel the hot brandy as it burned some- 
where half way down his throat. 

“You are performing tonight?” Antoine asked. 

Ferdinand nodded. “Will you be there?” 

Antoine looked apologetic. “I am a busy man, 
Ferdinand. I have an appointment to keep, 
so I will not be present. But I wish you well. 
I hope that the performance is a success.” 
He got to his feet. “I should depart,” he said. 
“Goodbye.” 

Ferdinand opened his eyes and looked up. 
“Goodbye,” he said. 

When Antoine had left, Ferdinand coughed 
for a while, as if he wished to remind himself 
that he was still ill, and then he pulled the pa- 
pers towards him and placed them on his lap. 
He started to leaf through the pages. Opus 
numbers twenty-four to twenty-nine. He 
turned to number twenty-eight and looked 
through the music. Antoine was right: it was 
magnificent. He started to hum, following 
the lines of the staves with his eyes. 

The composer turned the pages of the proofs 
and hummed through the variations. Outside 
the window the rain continued to come down 


July 2013 


59 


The Barbarian 

Allegro - Con Fuoco For F. H. Par Ferdinand Sor 1827 




in sheets. Somewhere not far away, the com- 
poser’s publisher, the estimable Antoine Meis- 
sonnier of the Boulevard de Montmartre, went 
hurrying through the streets on his way home. 

As the afternoon wore on, the sick man (let 
us not call him a malingerer, for not knowing 
the condition of his soul, we would be unwise 
to sit in judgement upon him) tired at last of 
sitting by the fire which had begun to burn 
down in the grate; and so he got to his feet 
and, taking the sheaf of papers left by Meis- 
sonnier, he walked to the next-door room, 
where his guitar lay upon a couch. He picked 
up the instrument and slumped into the seat, 
swinging his feet up, so that the guitar was laid 
across his belly. With the flesh of the thumb 
of his right hand, he stroked the strings. He 
deplored the barbarism of Aguado, convinced 
that the touch of soft flesh on the strings better 
suited the intimacy of the salon. To play with 
the flesh or with the nails? The difference was 
like that between a harpsichord and a piano- 
forte. So with the bare flesh of his thumb, he 
played the opening phrases of his Opus 28. He 
stopped before he even reached the theme. 

What terrible weather, he thought. 




60 


The Appendix Out Loud 





Urate 5 A 


Solitude and S andaya: 

The Strange History of Pianos in Burma 


Jonathan Webster 


- Jifr'i 




^^yyiSSaaoc 


I UJ 






n a quiet evening in March 1988, Aung San 
Suu Kyi’s telephone rang. The Burmese 
expatriate was reading quietly with her 
I husband at her home in Oxford, England, 
when she learned of her mother’s stroke. Two days 
later, she left her family in the UK and returned 
to Burma for her first extended visit since the age 
of fourteen. In her thirty-year absence, little had 
changed politically. Although the country would 
soon rename itself Myanmar, it was still governed 
by the same brutal military dictatorship, and in- 
ternal conflict had been raging for decades. To- 
day, that dictatorship is the world’s oldest, and 
Burma’s civil war is the world’s longest-lasting. 


Aung San Suu Kyi at the piano, screenshot from the the BBC 2 
documentary Aung San Suu Kyi: The Choice (201 2). 


Aung San Suu Kyi did not intend to dedicate her 
life to helping the people of her home country 
when she returned to care for her ailing mother, 
but events soon spun out of her control. Her fa- 
ther was a national hero who had helped free Bur- 
ma from colonial rule. A national memorial day 
commemorates his assassination, and thousands 
of student protesters carried his portrait as they 
were gunned down in 1988. Her lineage and the 
timing of her visit made Aung San Suu Kyi an ideal, 
if accidental, leader. She soon relented to the call 
of her compatriots and helped form the Nation- 
al League for Democracy (NLD). In July 1989, the 
army arrested key members of the new party and 
confined Aung San Suu Kyi to her home, spared 
imprisonment only because of her public stature. 
She continued to lead, launching a twelve-day 
hunger strike to ensure humane treatment of her 
supporters. Her party, the NLD, won the election 
of 1990 in a landslide victory, but the results were 
ignored. Aung San Suu Kyi remained under house 
arrest for most of the next twenty years. 


Aung San Suu Kyi’s husband, Michael Aris, was 
permitted to travel from Oxford to visit his wife 
only five times after her initial arrest. He was de- 
nied a visa during his two years fighting terminal 
cancer because the army hoped Aung San Suu Kyi 
might finally then be compelled to leave Burma. 
She remained in her home, a prisoner of con- 
science. Soon after one Christmas-time visit, Aris 
wrote of his wife’s “strict regime of exercise, study, 
and piano.” 


62 


The Appendix Out Loud 


The poignancy of Aung San Suu Kyi playing pi- 
ano in rebellious isolation was not lost on the 



world. Concerned supporters reportedly snuck 
within earshot for assurance she was still alive. 
Famous Europeans who publicized her struggle 
sympathized with her as musicians. U2 called her 
“a singing bird in an open cage.” Annie Lennox 
tried to send her a new piano. The top prize in the 
Leeds International Piano Competition was re- 
cently renamed the Daw Aun Suu Kyi Gold Medal 
for its fiftieth anniversary. 

Musicians have succeeded in turning the image 
of her piano, sometimes singing proudly, some- 
times rendered unplayable due to the unavailabil- 
ity of qualified technicians, into an emblem of 
Aung San Suu Kyi. Most of the world had long ago 
already deemed her the principal, if not the only, 
symbol of opposition to Myanmar’s dictatorship. 
In a piece from November 2012, the Los Angeles 
Times connects the dots, calling the piano itself 
“a symbol of Myanmar’s struggle for democracy.” 
This web of symbolism is easy for Westerners to 
appreciate. The movement for democracy in Bur- 
ma and the instrument played by its most famous 
champion were both neglected and silenced un- 
der tyranny. 


The untold dimension of this relationship is that 
pianos, often in less-than-perfect condition, have 
been a fixture of Burmese culture since well before 
Aung San Suu Kyi. A century earlier, pianos were 
dragged through forests by elephants and ravaged 
by termites in the tropical heat. Improbably, this 
Western instrument became a focal point for mu- 
sical innovation and cultural hybridity in Burma 
long before it found international prominence as 
a symbol ofBurmese liberation. 


Before Burma was annexed by the British Empire, 
the music of the royal courts and the homes of the 
elite was similar to the musical accompaniment of 
outdoor festivals in the countryside. Ensembles 
in different settings used different instruments, 
but the music was based on the same collection 
of traditional melodies, the Mahagita. There was 
certainly a division between “classical” and “pop- 
ular” styles, but it was never as stark as the parallel 
split in Western music after the Christian church 
began to consciously distance its music from folk 
music a millennium ago. 


Burmese musicians playing traditional instruments, including the 
pattela, at the Shwedagon Pagoda in 1 895. 

Wikimedia Commons 



July 2013 


63 



The penultimate Burmese king, Mindon Min, 
was a reformer whose reign from 1853 to 1878 
enjoyed relative prosperity, thanks in part to 
high cotton prices resulting from the Amer- 
ican Civil War. He learned of the piano from 
a minister he had sent to England to report 
on Western technology. When an instrument 
was delivered to him as a present from the 
Italian ambassador, he reportedly ordered his 
court musicians to figure out how to translate 
the music of the Mahagita into something 
that could be played on the piano. These Bur- 
mese may have had some previous familiarity 
with piano music, but it would seem that little 
concession was made to established Western 
technique. Instead, the musicians used their 
existing pattela and pat wring music as a ref- 
erence. 

Burmese musicians enthusiastically adopted 
the new instrument, which they called san- 
daya — but on their own terms. Kit Young ex- 
plains how “a completely unique technique of 
interlocked fingering with both hands extend- 
ing a single melodic line allowed for agogic 
embellishment.” She describes its sound as 
“fleeting grace notes in syncopated spirals 
around a steady underlying beat.” The most 
obvious and seemingly natural element of all 
Western piano writing was absent from early 
sandaya music: the right hand playing high 
notes and the left hand playing low notes. 
Hundreds of years of Western music featured 
melody in the right hand with the left hand 
providing supporting harmonies. Burmese 
musicians made no such distinction. The two 
basic components of their music, melody and 


*The pattela is a type of xylophone and the pat waing 
is a set of 21 tuned drums played with bare hands. 
Both instruments allow only two different pitches to 
be struck simultaneously and this feature is built into 
early sandaya music. The piano's unique ability to 
imitate those traditional instruments was likely part of 
its appeal. 


Listen to U Ko Ko performing "When The Saints Go 
Marching In" at http://appendic.es/m7j 


embellishment of the melody, were equally dis- 
tributed between the two hands across the whole 
range of the keyboard.* 

This method allowed for very rapid playing, and 
the more notes per second that could be played, 
the more complex embellishments could become. 
By the 1930s, extremely fast, florid ornamentation 
adapted from the style of virtuoso saung ga uk (a 
type of harp) players was expected in all Burmese 
music. The piano made such figuration easy. A 
1980s recording of the famous U Ko Ko playing 
“When The Saints Go Marching In” demonstrates 
the distinctiveness of typically elaborate Burmese 
ornamentation: the tune is almost unrecogniz- 
able to Western ears. It is as different from clas- 
sical or jazz piano playing as those styles are from 
each other. 

Sandaya was born in the courts of the last two Bur- 
mese kings, but it blossomed in the cinemas that 
popped up all around the country in the first half 
of the twentieth century. The burgeoning silent 
film industry, offering both movies made in the 
West and ones made at home in Burma, required 
a steady stream of experienced pianists to accom- 
pany them. Burmese music was ideally suited to 
the task. Listeners already associated different 
melodic themes and playing styles with corre- 
sponding dramatic concepts (such as love scenes, 
battles, and scenes with horses). The songs of the 
Mahagita had been used to accompany traditional 
theater for centuries, creating a musical language 
that was richly descriptive. Robert Garfias writes 
of the silent film era, “Pianists were expected to 
‘explain’ and highlight the actions on the screen 
with the appropriate traditional Burmese music.” 

Although the piano was not native to Burma, it 
became a naturalized citizen within a few decades 
of its arrival. The early sandaya players not only 
invented their own technique based on existing 
percussion instruments, but also retuned their 
pianos to more closely resemble the scales of Bur- 
mese instruments. In Rangoon circa 1925, despite 
the British colonial presence, a person could sit in 
an entirely Burmese audience, watch a film made 
in Burma, and listen to music from Burma played 
by a Burmese musician in a Burmese style and 
tuning. The presence of a piano made it no less an 
authentically Burmese experience then the pres- 


64 


The Appendix Out Loud 


ence of a film projector. It could be argued that 
their music was Westernized by the piano. But it is 
more appropriate to see the piano’s arrival as giv- 
ing birth to something entirely new: a distinctly 
Burmese tradition based on a foreign instrument. 

When Western listeners hear “world music” 
played on piano, it is almost always the result of 
a composer incorporating elements of other mu- 
sical cultures into the fabric of an established 
Western style. Folk melodies are quoted in sona- 
tas; drones are imitated for meditative, New Age 
effects. The evolution of sandaya in the twentieth 
century essentially represents the reverse of that 
process. The piano was a Burmese instrument 
that gradually became a vehicle for experiments 
with Western tonal language, structures, and fin- 
gerings. To many, those foreign ideas were an ex- 
citing addition to sandaya music; to others, they 
diluted its uniqueness. 

One of the most fundamental shifts in the sound 
of piano in Burma concerned its tuning. The Cine- 
ma de Paris in Rangoon adopted a policy of show- 
ing Western films and Burmese films in alternat- 
ing two-week spans. Two separate pianists were 
employed to accompany them, a man named Ko 
Oo Kah handling the locally-made films, and an 
Anglo-Indian named Mr. Robbins playing for the 
Western films. Once a month Mr. Robbins would 
come in, complain about how out-of-tune the pi- 
ano was, and adjust it to the Western equal-tem- 
perament system. 

Ko Oo Kah disagreed. The piano was retuned back 
and forth so many times that the action of the 
white keys on the instrument was eventually ren- 
dered unfixable, leaving Ko Oo Kah to take ham- 
mers and screws from the black keys and rebuild 
the instrument such that only his music would be 
performable. 

Burmese aesthetic convention won that partic- 
ular battle, but with regard to tuning, there can 
be no doubt it has lost the war. Today, the orig- 
inal intonation of Burmese piano is difficult to 
find. According to Kit Young, “U Ko Ko used to 
play with tunings on his midi-electric keyboard, 
but for performances in studios and theaters, he 
stuck to equal-tempered tuning.” There are a few 
older sandaya recordings available in the West 


that sound vaguely out-of-tune to our ears, but 
they are more likely the result of heat warping the 
instrument than documents of a true equidistant 
heptatonic Burmese scale. The piano in Myanmar 
still speaks Burmese, but its original accent has 
been lost.* 

*This scale was realized roughly on the piano by lowering the 
pitch of the E keys, raising the F keys, and then doing the same 
for B and A, respectively. In early sandaya playing, black keys 
were generally not required. The clearest expression of Bur- 
mese tunings can be found in saung gauk playing, where they 
are also likely in decline. Kit Young, personal communication, 
April 14, 2013. 


In 2011, the isolationist Burmese military demon- 
strated that they were not immune to political 
pressure and shifting internal attitudes when they 
released Aung San Suu Kyi (likely permanently) 
and began a series of limited reforms. It is impos- 
sible to know the exact motivations of those new 
policies, but it is clear that some kind of change 
is happening behind the curtain. Aung San Suu 
Kyi was silenced during her many years of house 
arrest, but she was not entirely isolated. She likes 
to say that her daily habit of listening to the radio 
probably kept her better informed than most peo- 
ple not under house arrest, and she has emerged 
confident in the company of world leaders. 

It is helpful to remember these varieties of isola- 
tion when considering the history of sandaya. As 
Burmese musicians became exposed to Western 
sounds via films and radio, they produced a vari- 
ety of syncretic, experimental styles. Isolation did 
not prevent this music from being performed and 



July 2013 


65 


recorded, but it did prevent anyone in the West 
from hearing it. As Timothy Rice explains, “The 
reclusive policies of the ruling dictatorship have 
retarded access to, and study, of Burmese music, 
and to a significant degree they have limited cul- 
tural and commercial exchange...” Only two discs 
devoted to sandaya have ever been available in 
America and Europe; one is long out of print, and 
both are flawed. 

The decision of many Western countries to im- 
pose trade sanctions on Myanmar, suspend aid, 
and boycott tourism may have pressured the dic- 
tatorship to move towards democratic reform, but 
it also may have impeded that progress to some 
degree. In either case, dismissing the country as 
an off-limits “outpost of tyranny” certainly has 
done little to facilitate cultural understanding. 
The obscurity of sandaya is the result of internal 
repression, but also of the West’s own reluctance 
to engage with Burmese music directly. 

The two discs of Burmese piano available in the 
United States feature Burmese musicians, but 
they are recorded, mixed, mastered, and edited 
by Westerners, and marketed towards a Western 
audience. Lacking sufficient reverb and tradition- 
al bell and clapper accompaniments, they do not 
represent how most Burmese musicians expect 
their performances to be heard. Sandaya: The Spell- 
binding Piano of Burma, released by Shanachie Re- 
cords, almost appears to be presenting the music 
as an ancient artifact, preserved under glass from 
a time before the military coup. Packaging san- 
daya as the product of a happier Burmese past in 
a clean, uncluttered recording makes for a more 
palatable (and profitable) disc for international 
audiences, but it shields us from the reality of a 



Cassette tapes for sale at a Yangon market in 2006. 

Wikimedia Commons 


much messier, more varied, more interesting cen- 
tury of music.* 

* Kit Young, a pianist who lived in Asia for twenty years and 
founded the Gitameit Music Center, is planning a book of 
essays on sandaya and Burmese music in general, but she 
acknowledges that translating Burmese writing is an equally 
pressing task. "Outsiders must read these writers," she notes. 
"It is only by learning the flavor of talk, the modality of 
another ear appreciating music with the cultural detail behind 
a musical event that we can begin to 'hear from the inside.'" 
Personal communication, April 14, 2013. 

More recently, the Gitameit Music Center in Yan- 
gon has digitized 3,500 sides of 78s and recorded 
interviews with older performers. The project 
needs help to continue, but when it becomes avail- 
able online it will be most listeners’ first opportu- 
nity to hear sandaya unmediated by outsiders. At 
present, the only commercially available examples 
of sandaya actually produced by and for Burmese 
people can be found on compilations released by 
the record label Sublime Frequencies — but they 
are still compilation cuts, not original records. 
The Sublime Frequencies discs will soon by joined 
by Longing for the Past, a 4 CD collection of South- 
east Asian 78s to be released on Dust-to-Digital, 
which will include two tracks of sandaya playing. 

Myanmar is opening up, and Aung San Suu Kyi 
is free. She is now more than an advocate for de- 
mocracy and human rights: she is an active pol- 
itician. As the West alternately celebrates her re- 
lease and struggles to make sense of her puzzling 
stance on certain issues of ethnic violence, we 
might remember sandaya and the hybrid culture 
it represents. The piano in Burma was more than 
a sentimental symbol or an exotic museum piece: 
it was an important player in a tumultuously cre- 
ative century of Burmese music. “What the Bur- 
mese have done with a piano,” write the compilers 
of Princess Nicotine, “is so precise in the adaptation 
to their existing form and melody that one would 
think they invented it.” Yet this was not the case. 
Perhaps the hybrid origins of the Burmese piano 
and sandaya might point a way forward toward a 
Myanmar that forges connections with the West 
even as it retains a Burmese soul. 

The author would like to thank Kit Young for her 
kind assistance. 


66 


The Appendix Out Loud 



Listening to the Past: 

An African-American Lullaby 

Mary Caton Lingold 


My research tries to capture the sounds of the 
past before the advent of recorded music. I’m cu- 
rious about ideas that were spoken and sung and 
shouted and strummed, focusing particularly on 
musical sounds produced by Afro-Atlantic peo- 
ple in the long eighteenth century. A few of these 
sounds were transcribed into dots and lines on pa- 
per. The descendants of others survive in thriving 
contemporary music genres. These imprints con- 
tain clues about the sounds that weren’t so lucky. 

The musical expression of early musicians has not 
been entirely lost; much of it has been preserved 
or resurrected in a variety of print and perfor- 
mance-based archives that are available for study. 
In my work, I question the primacy of documents 
in the pursuit of knowledge about the sonic past 
and show that our conventional modes of study 
can make it difficult to explore aural culture 
through textual records. 


In what follows I share an experimental encounter 
with a particular song that found its way before 
my eyes and into my ears. It is not the perfect ob- 
ject through which to answer my questions about 
the musical life of Afro-descendant people in the 
Americas, but this little lullaby taught me some- 
thing about how to hear the past.* 



*lt also provoked me to think more deeply about the role of 
ephemeral sounds in history. What about the sound of a pen 
gently tearing against the paper of a used napkin? What 
about the humming that accompanied the dishwashing as the 
napkin was tossed into the trash? Is our imagination powerful 
enough to render these events as history? 


July 2013 


67 



JUNGLE MAMMY SONG 


Margaret Johnson of Augusta, Georgia, heard her mother sing this, year on year, a, U* 
had learned it from the singing, year on year, of a nep-o woman who comforted children with rt . 
Tlic source of its language may be French, Creole, Cherokee, or mixed. The syllables are ^ 
for hinging; so is the tune It may he, as provisionally tilled, a Jungle Mammy Song, in the ^ 
that all mothers are primitive and earthy even though civilized and celestial. 



Ah yah, tair uni bam, boo wah, Kee lay zee day, Nic o lay, mah 





lun dec. Nic o lay ah pool a way, Nic o lay ah wah roee— At 



yah, tair urn bam, boo wah, Kee lay zee day, Nic o lav. mah lun dee. 


MS 


The "Jungle Mammy Song" from Carl Sandburg's American Songbag. 


“Jungle Mammy Song” — a cringe-worthy title if 
ever there was one. The transcription provided 
by Carl Sandburg in his collection of folk music, 
American Songbag (1927) explains: 

Margaret Johnson of Augusta, Georgia, heard 
her mother sing this, year on year, as the mother 
had learned it from singing, year on year, of a ne- 
gro woman who comforted children with it. The 
source of its language may be French, Creole, 
Cherokee, or mixed. The syllables are easy for 
singing; so is the tune. It may be, as provisionally 
titled, a Jungle Mammy Song, in the sense that 
all mothers are primitive and earthly even though 
civilized and celestial. 

The compiler, though most famous for his work 
as a poet and a biographer of Abraham Lincoln, 
was a musician and avid song-collector. His Amer- 
ican Songbag was published during an era in which 
fascinations with blackface minstrelsy and “coon 
songs” were giving way to more folldoric presenta- 
tions of American musical forms. The book offers 
arrangements of many different kinds of music, 
including cowboy songs, work songs from rail- 
roads and logging camps, and a sizable number of 
pieces emanating from the black experience.* 


*Sandburg was a labor-activist and consummate pop- 
ulist who championed the culture and political causes 
of the working classes. The American Songbag is em- 
blematic of his curiosity about diverse traditions across 
the United States (he traveled widely as an orator) as 
well as the evolving appetites for homegrown music in 
the country at large. For more about his life and work, 
see the recent PBS American Masters documentary. 

The Day Carl Sandburg Died (201 2). 

The title of the tune recalls "coon songs" that 
popularized racist stereotypes and mythologies of 
African-American music. These representations were 
complicated because they denigrated black music and 
lauded it at the same time. Undoubtedly influenced by 
the music created by enslaved people and their de- 
scendants, coon songs were sometimes authored and 
performed by African-Americans. This song's title nods 
to the genre, whose popularity was waning around 
the time that Carl Sandburg published the American 
Songbag in 1927. For further reading on coon songs 
and the ragtime era and their connection to (and 
departure from) both white and black minstrelsy, see 
Lynn Abbot and Doug Seroff, Ragged but Right: Black 
Traveling Shows, "Coon Songs, " and the Dark Path- 
way to Blues and Jazz (Jackson, MS: University Press 
of Mississippi, 2007). 


68 


The Appendix Out Loud 


In the volume, Sandburg’s appreciation of 
African-American music competes with his 
choice to refurbish long-standing stereotypes 
about “mammies” and render song lyrics in 
“negro dialect.” The Songbag is no outlier in 
this regard. It has long been common for 
white authors to denigrate and laud black 
music culture in the same breath. Many of 
the earliest accounts of Afro-Atlantic mu- 
sical practices include this type of reckless 
and self-important ambivalence. Seemingly 
uncomfortable with all that the term “jungle 
mammy” implies, Sandburg wades into sexist 
territory while addressing the derogatory ti- 
tle by reassuring readers that “all mothers are 
primitive and earthly even though civilized 
and celestial.”* 

Both during slavery and after, the power 
structures of American society confined 
many black women to the role of caretakers of 
white families — creating a legacy of close yet 
troubled relations between black nurses and 
white children. In addition to the “mammy” 
stereotype, this arrangement has long been 
romanticized and idealized in literature and 
images emerging from white perspectives, 
particularly in the South. But rather than fo- 
cusing strictly on the ways in which the image 
of the “negro woman” who sang this tune was 
degraded in Sandburg’s introduction and at- 
tending cultural norms, I want to ask whether 
this imperfect, highly mediated artifact bears 
witness to her experience, history, and voice. 

If we can mute the iconography of The Black 
Mammy, what might we hear ? 1 

*"ln the afternoons on Sundays, they have their Music, 
which is of kettle drums, and those of several sizes; 
upon the smallest the best Musician plays, and the 
others come in as Choruses: the drum all men know, has 
but one tone; and therefore variety of tunes have little 
to do in this music; and yet so strangely they vary their 
time, as 'tis a pleasure to the most curious ears, and it 
was to me one of the strangest noises that I heard made 
of one tone; and if they had the variety of tune, which 
gives the greater scope in Music, as they have of time, 
they would do wonders in that Art. And if I had not fall- 
en sick before my coming away, at least seven months 
in one sickness, I had given them some hints of tunes, 
which being understood, would have served as a great 
addition to their harmony; for time without tune, is not 
an eighth part of the Science of Music." Richard Ligon, 

A True and Exact History of the Island of Barbados 
(London: Peter Parker, 1673), 50-51 . 


Because we do not know much about the 
woman who is said to have comforted chil- 
dren with this song, it is difficult to imagine 
the contours of her life, much less the tim- 
bre of her voice. We are left to wonder many 
things like, did she work as a nurse and if so, 
how did she feel about her job? Did she sing 
this song to her own children? What other 
musical practices did she participate in? As 
a researcher, I would love to verify that the 
song was originally authored or transmitted 
by a newly enslaved person or from an es- 
tablished slave culture, since both scenarios 
would strengthen the song’s ties to early Af- 
ro-diasporic musical practices. Whatever the 
case may be, the musical transcription is a 
rare artifact because it connects listeners to 
the artistry of a female singer whose musical 
expression would otherwise be lost to usd 

f I haven't been able to identify a particular creole origin of the 
words and it may well be that the description is right in that the 
words are a blend of different language traditions. 

Though little is clear about the vocalist’s biog- 
raphy, we do know something about the way 
her song was circulated. She is said to have 
“comforted children” with it and Margaret 
Johnson’s mother appears to have done the 
same, transmitting the piece across at least 
three generations as it was sung “year on 
year .” 2 

I am curious about why the music made such 
a strong impression on those who encoun- 
tered it. Perhaps the original singer had an 
especially beautiful voice or an especially 
beautiful way with children. Maybe she sang 
it passionately to honor the memory of a par- 
ticular child who had loved the piece — a first 
born or a dear younger sister. Or alternatively, 
perhaps she invented the song to shush fussy 
white children with a supposedly “authentic 
negro” lullaby as a kind of joke or a subtle act 
of resistance. Or the tune could have entered 
Sandburg’s Songbag simply because it is catchy 
and easy to remember. 


July 2013 


69 


Whatever the original inspirations for the melody 
might have been, the history of its circulation is 
a testimony to its resonance with listeners. It en- 
dures, year on year. 


The song is so resonant, in fact, that it found its 
way from Sandburg’s page into my voice — and 
from there, into the voices of a new generation. 
When I first thumbed my way through the facsim- 
ile of American Songbag that my mother had ordered 
for me over the Internet on a whim, “Jungle Mam- 
my Song” immediately caught my eye. At first 
disgusted by the title, I was then intrigued by the 
headnote and even more so by the undecipherable 
lyrics. I wanted to learn it so that I could hear it, 
hoping that it would yield some sonic information 
about the early music cultures I study. I also won- 
dered if the music-making would be able to drown 
out Sandburg’s disrespectful story-telling. 

Learning the song was a process of creation as 
well as discovery. At first using a mandolin to 
pluck out the notes, I learned the melody and fi- 
nally the words — an interesting task because the 
unfamiliar language required a lot of guesswork. 
In addition to selecting a key, note values, and 
time-signature, the arranger took it upon them- 
selves to punctuate the words in the same way 
that they would familiar syntax. Lyrics are often 
accompanied by dashes and commas that indicate 
the manner in which they should be expressed 
musically. 

It seems bizarre to do this to an unknown lan- 
guage, but the directions helped me to deliver 
word-strings as musical phrases. The arranger 
probably followed the musical line when deciding 
how to punctuate the lyrics, rather than the other 
way around. Here is a recording of one of my early 
attempts to render the song: 

Listen to an early attempt by the author to render the 
lullaby at http://appendic.es/m/w 

I immediately enjoyed singing the melody and es- 
pecially the expressive first words, “Ah yah.” The 
relaxed, open syllables and the descending notes 
feel quite a bit like sighing. Though I love the way 
the song feels in my voice, I am not entirely taken 


with my musical interpretation. In the recording 
you will notice that my vocal style is informed 
by classical singing and that I use a vibrato and a 
clear “attack” in my pronunciation. By that I mean 
that the syllables are not obscured by elision and 
the initial parts of words and notes are articulated 
more forcefully than they might be in other tradi- 
tions. 

When I learn music by reading, I find it difficult 
not to perform in the conventions of my classical 
training; much as a long-dormant accent emerges 
when I go home to my native East Texas. Context is 
everything. By contrast, in my activities as a blue- 
grass fiddler, I learn primarily by ear. Bluegrass 
is one of many music traditions that prides itself 
on a dependence on aural transmission. When I 
learn a fiddle tune, or a vocal melody by ear, I find 
it much easier to be expressive in my initial inter- 
pretations. To be sure, many classically trained 
musicians have a deft facility with sheet music and 
can perform it with far greater flexibility.* 

*When you ask for help learning a tune, you will never hear 
someone suggest that you purchase a book of sheet music and 
learn it. They will recommend that you listen to famous recordings 
or that you learn new tunes directly from another player. This is 
also true in jazz circles, where sheet music and charts play an im- 
portant role, but are nearly eclipsed by an emphasis on recording 
history and classic interpretations. I find it telling that we "learn by 
ear" rather than learn by listening. No one would ever say that 
they learn sheet music "by seeing." The subtle implication is that 
learning by ear is somehow natural, and thereby less studied. I 
can assure you that it takes a lot of work to be able to learn music 
by ear efficiently. 

I bring up issues of acquisition and style because 
they are uniquely challenging when singing (or 
transcribing) for historical purposes. Because I 
study an early oral music culture in which there 
are very few transcriptions and no audio-record- 
ings, I am interested in gleaning whatever infor- 
mation I can from sources that might otherwise 
seem only distantly connected to earlier centuries. 

It is so rare to find an example of women’s music 
from this period, and I wanted to do this song and 
its original performer justice. But I felt inhibit- 
ed by my performance style and frustrated that I 
would never be able to really know how the wom- 
an who popularized this song would have sung it. 
Because my interest is in vernacular music and its 
aural circulation, it felt odd to encounter the piece 
through a textual transcription. 


70 


The Appendix Out Loud 


I decided to enlist some help. What if I shared 
the song with someone else so that I could 
hear it outside of my own voice? How might 
that open up possibilities for interpreting the 
piece? I teach a singing class to young women 
between the ages of seven and fourteen at a 
non-profit children’s theatre. Every once in a 
while I throw a strange tune at the students 
and let them in on my research. I explained 
that the song was a lullaby. It was original- 
ly sung by an African-American woman in 
Georgia, probably just after the era of slavery 
and it had been passed from woman to child. 
Though some of the students in my class read 
music, we learn by ear. I handed out copies 
of the song made directly from the book, but 
without the title or headnote.* 

Ah yah, tair um bam, boo wah, Kee lay zee 
day, Nic o lay, mah lun dee. 

Nico lay ah poot a way, Nic o lay ah wah 
mee — 

Ah yah, tair um bam boo wah, Kee lay zee 
day, Nic o lav. mah lun dee. 

Before learning to sing it, we talked about 
what the words might mean. They laughed 
hard at “poot a way” . . . and not just because it 
sounds like a reference to flatulence, but be- 
cause several of the young women are native 
Spanish speakers and one of the syllable com- 
binations sounds like a particularly bad curse 
word in that language. The girls were fixated 
on “bam, boo” possibly meaning something 
about bamboo trees and a forest. We all de- 
cided that “Wah me” sounds like “Why me?” 

Though it was impossible to locate a fixed 
meaning, thinking through the possibilities 
allowed us to imagine certain emotional sce- 
narios that would help us musically express 
the song. My students ended up interpreting 
the piece much as I had, but they added their 
own touches. 


Listen to the students sing the lullaby at http://appendic.es/m/x 

We made this recording soon after learning 
the song. At first, I hesitated to share it be- 
cause the singers don’t perform particularly 
well. However, I think that some of what we 
might hear as ‘errors’ in terms of technique 
open up possibilities for new interpretations 
and can teach us quite a bit about the process 
of oral circulation. In the recording, the young 
singers are more playful with pitch than I am 
and because I have no verification that Sand- 
burg’s transcription is accurate by any means, 
it’s fun to imagine that by failing to execute 
the lyrics or music perfectly, they may not be 
any more ‘incorrect’ than his version. 

After all, wouldn’t a song like this have 
changed from woman to child, from day to 
day, from generation to generation? I love 
the way the girls’ pitch slides throughout the 
piece, as if their voices are determined to find 
a more comfortable key. They reach unison 
on certain notes and stray and wander on 
others. 

This rough performance exemplifies music 
as a process: how a single piece of music can 
evolve as it circulates across voices and time. 

It is, in a way, a sonic illustration of musical 
variation, helping us to perceive how a tune 
can exist in various forms and still be consid- 
ered a single entity. Also, by encountering the 
song through a multi-vocal recording, we can 
lift it off the page and back into the realm of 
the vernacular. Though I don’t wish to over- 
state the distinction between the two modes 
or to romanticize the one over the other, my 
point is that the media through which we en- 
counter music makes a strong impression on 
our understanding of it. Because I am inter- 
ested in exploring vernacular music cultures 


*1 decided not to use the title "Jungle Mammy Song" when I introduced it to the young women because I didn't want to taint 
their musical encounter with the stereotype. Because I don't normally teach history or literature to ten-year-olds, I chickened out 
and kept the story simple. In retrospect, I think it would have been worthwhile possibly to lay all the cards on the table and 
explain the context of the American Songbag and the negative stereotypes that it participated in. On the other hand, I'm glad 
that we were able to explore the song together without reproducing the stereotype. 


July 2013 


71 


historically, restoring transcriptions to aural 
performances is a useful way to de-privilege 
print and text in our efforts to hear the past. 

Here is an example of one of the students, Na- 
dia, performing the piece solo. 

Listen to Nadia sing the lullaby solo at 
http://appendic.es/m/y 


By sharing the lullaby with a new generation 
of singers, I have been able to experience the 
song as far outside its textual representation 
as I can as a historical observer. Margaret 
Johnson’s story, Sandburg’s title and narra- 
tion, and the transcription into sheet music 
all threatened to overpower the possibil- 
ity that the song could speak its own histo- 
ry. Though I wanted to listen to the woman 
who initiated the chain of transmission that 
brought the piece to me, I continued to be 
distracted by the writing that accompanied it. 

I felt persuaded that the song was a lullaby, 
for example, and because I myself shared the 
piece with children, I wanted to interpret the 
music and my encounter with it as something 
connected to childcare and a genre of mu- 
sic-making predominated by women. Maybe 
one can’t press a mute button on stereotypes. 
Now, having written this essay, I realize that 
by listening to the sounds themselves in the 
form of my students’ performances, I learned 
more than I anticipated about the nature of 
aural transmission and music transcription. 

But what of the singer whose story I longed 
to uncover? 

Though she remains distant and opaque to 
me, hidden among the silences of history and 
the words framing her performance in the 
book, her music is frequently in my ears and 
on my mind. It may be that knowing her song 
means simply that, to know it. Listening is 
often understood as a means to receive rather 


than perceive information. (“I hear you” and 
“I’m listening” come across a bit differently 
than “I see what you mean.”) By staging op- 
portunities to listen to historical performanc- 
es, we can mobilize both our fields of percep- 
tion and reception. Emphasizing auditory 
culture also helps us to engage with historical 
actors who did not author their own narra- 
tives in print as subjects rather than as sim- 
ple objects of history. The song, then, is not 
a portal into an understanding of a particular 
woman’s story, but an opportunity to witness 
something that her voice made known. Rath- 
er than repackaging the music and its creator 
like Sandburg did, this time, I’d rather just 
listen . 3 

I wish to thank the young women in my sing- 
ing class for sharing their voices with me and 
for challenging my assumptions. I dedicate 
this essay to them and to the memory of the 
woman who first sang this song. 


The author would like to acknowledge Whit- 
ney Trettien, Darren Mueller, Ben Breen, and 
the Appendix editorial team for their insight- 
ful contributions to this essay. 


72 


The Appendix Out Loud 


Notes 


1. The Association of Black Women Histori- 
ans’ open letter to fans of the book and film 
adaptation, The Help (2011) is an excellent 
primer on stereotypes of black domestic 
workers in the Jim Crow South and how they 
serve to misrepresent the history and legacy 
of black domestic workers. 

I am inspired by the work of Jade Davis, 
whose website Vintage Black Beauties celebrates 
early photography of black women. Some of 
the archival images she circulates are visually 
framed according to racist and primitivist ste- 
reotypes of the sort that Sandburg’s terrible 
title recalls. She has written about how she 
attempts to override the power of the stereo- 
types in her digital circulation by “whisper- 
ing” to the women in the images as well as 
contemporary black female viewers, “you are 
beautiful.” 

2. Offering another example of the oral trans- 
mission of music from Afro-Atlantic woman 
to child, W.E.B. Dubois wrote about a song 
that was passed down in his family from his 
great-great-grandmother, who had been en- 
slaved by a Dutch trader in the eighteenth 
century. W.E.B. Dubois, The Souls of Black Folk, 
Essays and Sketches (Chicago: A.C. McClurg & 
Co., 1903), 254. 

3. In the introduction to Audible Past: Cultural 
Origins of Sound Production, Jonathan Sterne 
describes the way our relationship to sound 
is culturally constructed and historically 
specific. In what he dubs the “audiovisual 
litany,” he lists common assumptions about 
the nature of hearing that scholars of sound 
should question: “hearing is spherical, vision 
is directional; hearing immerses its subject, 
vision offers a perspective; sounds come to 
us, but vision travels to its object; hearing is 
concerned with interiors, vision is concerned 
with surfaces.” Jonathan Sterne, Audible Past: 
Cultural Origins of Sound Production (Durham: 
Duke University Press, 2003), 15. 



Inside the American Museum of Natural 
History’s Hidden Masterpiece 

Jonathan Meiburg 


Visitors to the American Museum of Natural His- 
tory’s popular Butterfly Conservatory could be 
forgiven a moment’s confusion when they enter 
the exhibit through an archway marked ‘Birds 
of the Pacific.’ A framed mayoral proclamation, 
signed by Ed Koch in 1989, hangs on the wall by 
the entrance. It commemorates the fiftieth anni- 
versary of the museum’s Whitney Wing “and its 
two public exhibitions, the Whitney Hall of Oce- 
anic Birds and the Sanford Hall of Bird Life, which 
have enlightened millions of students, scholars, 
and visitors from around the world and will con- 
tinue to be sources of knowledge and enjoyment 
for generations to come.” 1 


Neither hall, however, really exists any more. The 
Sanford hall was dismantled in 1999 to make room 
for an expansion of the planetarium, and the Whit- 
ney hall’s fate is ambiguous: like an abandoned 
subway station, it can be glimpsed, but is most- 
ly hidden. Ten of its eighteen dioramas are con- 
cealed behind the conservatory’s cocoon-shaped 
enclosure, where live tropical butterflies land on 
visitors’ heads and outstretched fingers.* 

*As of this writing, the museum's official web site [www. 
AMNH.org] does not list the Whitney hall among its permanent 
exhibitions, and mentions it only as the location of the Butterfly 
Conservatory. The museum's Wikipedia page also does not 
mention the Whitney hall, even in a section devoted to "The art 
of the diorama." 


74 


The Appendix Out Loud 




The Whitney hall was once one of the crown j ewels 
of the museum, alongside the halls of African and 
North American mammals, and like them it was a 
reminder of a time when the museum pushed the 
boundaries of dioramas as educational objects 
and as art. Over the years, even as range maps 
and species names have become outdated, the art 
has remained potent; the mammal halls’ diora- 
mas retain an eerie, sublime power. At their best 
they seem deeply and strangely alive. The Hall of 
North American Mammals was lovingly restored 
and reopened in 2012, and the numinous indoor 
courtyard of the African hall, whose dark-paneled 
galleries surround a parading family of elephants, 
remains the museum’s literal and figurative cen- 
terpiece. But of the three halls, the Whitney might 
have been the most ambitious, if not quite in gran- 
deur, then at least in scope. Oceanic birds were its 
alleged focus, but its true aim was to create “the 
Pacific in microcosm,” cramming the landscapes, 
seascapes, and feathered wildlife of nearly half the 
globe — all Oceania — into one room. 


The hall was the brainchild of Frank Chapman, 
the visionary chairman of the museum’s Depart- 
ment of Ornithology, and Leonard C. Sanford, a 
deep-pocketed New Haven surgeon with an orni- 
thology habit. Chapman arrived at the museum as 
a volunteer in 1887 and didn’t retire until 1942, at 
age 78. He more or less acquired Sanford along the 
way: in 1912, Chapman convinced him to store his 
personal collection of bird skins at the museum 
and installed him in an office next to Chapman’s 
as an unofficial member of the staff. 


It was a shrewd, if unconventional, move. Sanford 
was well-connected, ambitious, persuasive, and 
competitive, especially with his friends at Har- 
vard’s Museum of Comparative Zoology. Robert 
Cushman Murphy, who came to the museum as a 
young man in 1912 and later chaired the depart- 
ment after Chapman retired, noted that Sanford 
“particularly enjoyed possessing things which the 
other fellow did not have, and partly because the 
other fellow did not have them.” 


Sanford’s new position let him scratch this itch in 
ways he could only have imagined as a private col- 
lector. He was especially keen to send collecting 
expeditions to poorly-surveyed parts of the world, 
and he had a gift for convincing his well-heeled 


The dome above the Whitney Hall as it looks today. 

Branan Edgens 


The dome above the Whitney Hall as it originally appeared. 

AMNH Photo #315991 


July 2013 


75 




Rollo Beck preparing the skin of a tropicbird aboard the France 
on the Whitney South Seas Expedition. 


AMNH Photo #107954 


ing oily bits of meat and offal from the boat as 
he drifted with the current, then rowing back 
and picking off the birds that collected to 
scavenge on the slick. This technique amazed 
Beck’s companions, who couldn’t understand 
how he could so confidently set out to bag 
seabirds where there weren’t any to be seen, 
but he knew from experience that seabirds 
can detect food from miles away just as tur- 
key vultures do on land - with a keen sense 
of smell. Beck’s wife, Ida, who often accom- 
panied him on collecting trips, sometimes 
waited for him on the shores of Monterey Bay 
until well after dark.* 


friends to share his enthusiasm. It was a 
golden age for field ornithology; steamships, 
railroads, and the fledgling automobile had 
made the world newly accessible, but vast re- 
gions remained unsurveyed. Sanford’s first 
major effort was a marine expedition to col- 
lect shorebirds and seabirds around the coast 
of South America, a huge job that would take 
years to complete. After persuading a muse- 
um trustee to help fund the project, Sanford 
hired an unusually gifted Californian bird col- 
lector named Rollo Beck to see it through. 2 

Beck was one of a kind. He only had an 
eighth-grade education, but he was hardy, 
brilliant, and brave — a “tough little bastard,” 
as a friend described him, who could spend 
days in a skiff or rowboat alone at sea col- 
lecting birds, skinning them, and living off 
the meat of their carcasses. He pioneered the 
technique of “chumming” for seabirds, toss- 


The Becks-adventuresome, childless, and 
equally handy with a scalpel and a shotgun — 
seemed tailor-made for Sanford’s South 
American expedition. With his backing, they 
spent the years from 1912 to 1917 circumnav- 
igating the coast of the continent, returning 
to the United States via the West Indies. The 
thousands of specimens they collected sur- 
passed the museum’s expectations — Murphy, 
who used them as his primary reference for 
his landmark Oceanic Birds of South Amer- 
ica, gushed that “no other ornithological 
collector has carried through a similar cam- 
paign, or matched such scientific spoils.” 3 

Rollo and Ida, for their part, seemed to have 
enjoyed the challenge. A photograph of them 
on Christmas Day, 1914, aboard the small sail- 
boat Leguri, shows them looking weathered 
but sturdy and good-humored as they prepare 
“Christmas dinner” among the fjords and is- 
lands of southern Chile. They seem 
to be sharing a private joke with the 
photographer; Ida smiles warmly and 
Rollo, wearing an impish expression, 
looms like a Cheshire Cat out of the 
darkness of the hold to her left. An- 
other image from the same day, taken 
by Rollo, shows a gracefully posed Ida 
reading The Ladies’ Home Journal on 
deck with a young gentoo penguin by 
her side. Three days later, Ida appears 
perched on a cliff, gazing toward the 


* It's worth a word, here, about study skins. Birds are unusual among 
animals in that their feathers give them their distinctive shapes; unfeathered, 
most birds more or less resemble a plucked turkey. So it's possible to pre- 
serve the shape and plumage of a freshly-killed bird with a sort of shorthand 
field taxidermy. Turning a bird into a 'skin' (which, unless there's a freezer 
handy, has to be done within a few hours of its death) involves opening its 
abdomen with a vertical incision, removing nearly all of its muscles and 
viscera (including the brain, which can be drawn from the skull by gently 
turning the neck inside-out), stuffing the body cavity with straw or cotton 
batting, and stitching it back up, leaving the beak, feet, wings, tail, and 
overall form of the living bird intact. In the hand, these skins have a faintly 
talismanic power; they evoke not just the animal they once were, but the 
time and place in which they were collected. Rollo and Ida Beck's skills in 
preparing these skins in the field were exceptional, and even now, you can 
usually spot a Beck skin in a drawer of specimens without looking at the ID 
tag. They're clean, artful, and remarkably uniform, and it's hard to imagine 
them being prepared at sea, much less in a rowboat. 


76 


The Appendix Out Loud 



famous silhouette of Cape Horn. It looks like a 
good place to be in the second year of the First 
World War. 


50? 


Buoyed by the South American expedition’s suc- 
cess, Sanford decided to set his sights on an or- 
nithological holy grail. He wanted to send the 
Becks on another multi-year collecting trip, this 
time to the far-flung islands of the South Pacific. 

The Pacific islands were both known and ru- 
mored to be the home of many rare and unde- 
scribed birds — jewel-like honeyeaters and sun- 
birds; the collected-once-and-never-seen-again 
Meek’s Pigeon; the leggy, flightless Kagu of New 
Caledonia — but Sanford wasn’t only interested 
in trophies and bragging rights. Like his friend 
Walter Rothschild in England, Sanford wanted a 
complete “series” of bird skins from each island, 
even where species were duplicated, to create a 
picture not only of what birds existed in the world, 
but exactly where they were, reflecting a growing 
scientific interest in small geographical variations 
among related species. Nowhere were these varia- 
tions more pronounced than among island birds, 
and nowhere were there more islands than in the 
Pacific — some twenty to thirty thousand — many 
of them never surveyed by ornithologists. San- 
ford wasn’t deterred by the fact that these islands 
were spread over an area almost as large as all the 
world’s land masses combined. 

Finding the money for such a wildly ambitious 
project, however, was another matter. Sanford 



Rollo and Ida Beck on the 1912-1917 Brewster-Sanford 
expedition. 

AMNH Photos #102034 



AMNH Photo #102045 AMNH Photo #102032 


July 2013 


77 



The France (second ship from right) at anchor in Tarohae bay, 
Nukuhiva, Marquesas. 


AMNH Photo #108858 


Children on Christmas Island. 

AMNH Photo #105869 


eventually coaxed it from Harry Payne Whitney, 
husband of Gertrude Vanderbilt Whitney (who 
later endowed the Whitney Museum of Ameri- 
can Art). Whitney contributed $100,000, which 
provided for the purchase of a battered-but-stur- 
dy schooner, the France, and funded its operation 
for five years. The Becks set sail for Fiji in 1920, 
launching the Whitney South Seas Expedition-an 
unprecedented collecting effort that ultimately 
stayed in the field for the next two decades. 4 

Life aboard the France was trying. The ship’s en- 
gine was unreliable at best, and it was so hot and 
cramped in the cabin that everyone usually slept 
on deck, where they were often drenched by night 
rains. The crew endured dengue fever, malaria 
and dysentery, and choked down a monotonous 
diet of rice and tinned salmon. They also con- 
tended with an infestation of cockroaches and the 
smells of what was basically a floating abattoir. 
“It was not,” one participant recalled, “a glorious 
expedition in any sense of the word.” Added to 
all this was the danger of visiting islands whose 
residents might not welcome strange foreigners. 
En route to a notorious island near New Ireland, 
an official of the then-British territorial authority 
gave the bird collectors a fifty-fifty chance of mak- 
ing it back alive. 

Nevertheless, the expedition was an unqualified 
success, and the Becks’ casual photographs of the 
birds and people of the south seas suggest a world 
that was unfamiliar but not unfriendly. After five 
years, the France hadn’t even left the many islands 
of Fiji, but the Becks’ steady pace and remarkable 
skill resulted in a comprehensive collection, en- 
abling Sanford to secure continued funding from 
the Whitneys. (The Becks, possibly out of exasper- 
ation with the Ivy League boys the museum kept 
sending them as field assistants, left the expedi- 
tion after nine years and traveled on their own to 
Australia and New Guinea, where Rollo discov- 
ered a new species of bowerbird.)* 


Conversation with Mary LeCroy, May 2013. LeCroy, who 
still has an office in the Department of Ornithology, is the 
museum's closest remaining link to the Whitney expeditions. 
She was hired as an assistant to curator Thomas Gilliard, who 
participated in expeditions that collected material for the Hall 
of Oceanic Birds, including the New Guinea and Philippines 
dioramas. 



78 


The Appendix Out Loud 


In 1929, Sanford went back to the Whitneys again, 
not only for more money for the South Seas Ex- 
pedition, but with something even grander and 
pricier in mind. Birds were pouring into the De- 
partment of Ornithology from the Pacific and 
from separate expeditions to the interiors of Af- 
rica and South America, and a new facility was 
urgently needed to keep the specimens safe from 
fire, rot, and vermin. Sanford asked the Whitneys 
to fund the construction of an entire new wing of 
the museum, purpose-built to house and display 
its overflowing bird collection. The wing would 
also include two permanent exhibit halls, one of 
which would showcase the birds of the Whitney 
expedition and their home islands, bringing the 
distant worlds of the Pacific — previously known 
best to the public from the works of Gauguin and 
Melville — to Manhattan.* 

The Whitneys, once again, capitulated. They gave 
an enormous sum of stock to the project, the city 
provided matching funds, and the museum broke 
ground on the Whitney Wing in 1931. The South 
Seas Expedition, having expanded its geographi- 
cal scope as far as New Zealand and the Marian- 
as, now added a new dimension to its mission: to 
bring back not only island birds, but the islands 
themselves. 5 

Frank Chapman was ahead of his time in his belief 
that museum displays should present animals in 
the context of their habitats, and insisted that di- 
oramas should depict actual places, not idealized 
composites. To prepare for the construction of an 
exhibit hall devoted to Pacific birds, the museum 
hired plant collectors and photographers for fore- 
ground material and visual artists charged with 
absorbing the colors, textures, and moods of the 
Pacific islands for the backgrounds of the Whitney 
hall’s exhibits. 6 



Rollo Beck photographing a blue-faced booby on its nest 
on Christmas Island. 

AMNH Photo #106524 



Photographing a red-footed booby on its nest 
on Christmas Island. 

AMNH Photo #105896 


*Shortly after construction began on the Whitney Wing, the museum received a dramat- 
ic windfall in the form of a letter to Sanford from Walter Rothschild, offering to sell his 
globally representative collection of 280,000 bird skins to the American Museum. The sale 
was made, with funds provided (again) by the Whitneys. At the time, Sanford was led to 
believe that Rothschild had sold his collection for tax reasons, but Rothschild's niece Miriam 
revealed in a 1 983 biography of her uncle that the cause of the sale was blackmail: 
Rothschild's former mistress, a "charming, witty, aristocratic, ruthless" woman, "who, aided 
and abetted by her husband ... ruined him financially, destroyed his piece of mind for forty 
years and eventually forced him to sell his bird collection." Miriam Rothschild, Dear Lord 
Rothschild: birds, butterflies, and history [ London: Hutchinson, 1983). 


July 2013 


79 





AMNH Photo #326159 


Francis Lee Jaques, a gifted painter of birds in 
flight who conceived the eighteen-window design 
of the hall, accompanied the Whitney expedition 
to eastern Polynesia and in 1936 was selected for 
the career-defining job of painting all of the hall’s 
dioramas. In hiring a single artist for this massive 
endeavor, Chapman and Sanford hoped to pro- 
duce a feeling of unity and coherence among the 
disparate landscapes. 7 

Jaques’ career wasn’t the only one shaped by the 
expedition. Among its alumni was an energetic 
young German ornithologist named Ernst Mayr, 
who left an isolated field camp in New Guinea to 
join the crew of the France in 1930. In 1931, Mayr 
accepted a post at the museum, where he began 
the mammoth job of describing and analyzing its 
growing backlog of bird skins. Many of the speci- 
mens were new to science, and Mayr drew on the 
incredible breadth of the expedition’s collection 


and his own field experiences as the basis for his 
still-definitive list of the birds of New Guinea and 
his landmark Systematics and the Origin of Spe- 
cies (1942), which essentially created the modern 
field of evolutionary biology. 

It’s probably fair to say that the birds collected 
by the Whitney expedition were as significant for 
Mayr, and for science itself, as the birds of the 
Galapagos were for Darwin. As the Hall of Oce- 
anic Birds took shape, Mayr must have seen it as a 
monument to a part of the world to which he owed 
a great debt. It probably pleased him when Mur- 
phy’s staff installed a medallion-shaped display 
of the outlandishly decorated New Guinean crow 
relatives dearest to Mayr’s heart, the birds of par- 
adise, facing visitors as they entered the Whitney 
hall. 


80 


The Appendix Out Loud 



Thirty-two years elapsed between the launch 
of the France and the final stroke of Jaques’ 
brush on the dioramas of the Hall of Oce- 
anic Birds, which now contained mounted 
specimens of more than 400 species, some of 
which could be seen nowhere else outside of 
their home islands, and several of which had 
rarely been seen at all. 


It was 1952. The South Seas Expedition had 
continued under different leaders until the 
outbreak of World War II, when many of the 
islands visited by the bird collectors became 
scenes of heavy fighting. The war delayed 
work on the hall itself for several years, but it 
also gave the far reaches of the Pacific an im- 
mediacy and interest for Americans that San- 
ford couldn’t have anticipated in 1920. Jaques 
had already officially retired, and Mayr, who 
would become one of the most revered biol- 
ogists of the twentieth century, would soon 
move on to a new position at Harvard. Leon- 
ard Sanford, Frank Chapman, Rollo Beck, 
and Harry Payne Whitney had died.* 

But their vision was realized. From the center 
of the hall, visitors were surrounded by a uni- 
fied, 360-degree panorama with a consistent 
horizon that embraced every Pacific land- 
scape, from coral atolls to volcanic peaks, 
from the high seas to sub-Antarctic forests. 
In the domed ceiling above, painted like the 
sky, soared delicate snow petrels, giant alba- 
trosses, and blade-winged tropical frigate- 
birds. At the hall’s dedication in January 1953, 
Whitney’s son Cornelius declared: 


*Ernst Mayr, who had supervised the design and construction of 
the now-dismantled Sanford Hall of Bird Life at AMNH, remained at 
Harvard until his death in 2005 at the age of 1 00. I visited his office 
at Harvard's Museum of Comparative Zoology shortly before he died; 
it was flanked by two sections of tree trunks that contained nest cavities 
excavated, respectively, by Ivory-Billed Woodpeckers ( Campephilus 
principalis ) and Imperial Woodpeckers ( Campephilus imperialis). Both 
species-huge, beautiful birds with bold markings and trumpeting calls— 
were alive when Mayr was born, and extinct by the time of his death. 


Here tonight we may all feel privileged to 
observe a dream come true. ..there is sweat, 
toil, and tears represented here. There is 
success and failure. There is devotion to sci- 
ence, loyalty to friends, and high romance. 
There is a past, a present, and a future. 
There is a corner of knowledge added to the 
mysteries of the universe in which we live. 
There is a thing of beauty, and so, of truth.* 


fThe dome of the Whitney hall was the only project on which Francis 
Lee Jaques and James Perry Wilson (the museum's most famous painter 
of dioramas, including most of the African and North American Mam- 
mal halls) ever collaborated. 


July 2013 


81 



The Galapagos diorama of the Whitney Hall 
as it appeared in 1953. 

AMNH #315935 



The New Zealand diorama, one of the few still visible today. 

AMNH #322577 


A child inspects the Snow Mountains of New Guinea. 

AMNH #326158 



The Little Diomede diorama. 

AMNH #313007 



The Great Barrier Reef diorama. 

AMNH #318616 



82 


The Appendix Out Loud 




Peter Capainolo in his office. 

Branan Edgens 


“It was incredible,” said Peter Capainolo, scien- 
tific assistant for ornithology at the museum, 
closing the brass gate of the Whitney Wing’s orig- 
inal freight elevator. “It was like you were there.” 
Capainolo, balding and soft-spoken with a gray 
mustache and a convivial Long Island accent, has 
worked in the department for over a decade and is 
especially fond of birds of prey. A very convincing 
golden eagle, rescued from an eddy of the collec- 
tion, perches on a filing cabinet in his office. 

He pulled a lever, and the elevator descended from 
the offices of the Department of Ornithology to 
the basement of the Whitney Wing, past the halls 
built to contain and showcase the museum’s vast 
bird holdings, which long ago left Harvard’s in the 
dust. New acquisitions have slowed to a trickle, 
but the wing now holds nearly a million speci- 
mens — skins, skeletons, and whole birds in for- 
malin gathered from every part of the living world 
at immense cost and effort over many decades. 

Most of them remain stored in metal cabinets, laid 
side by side in long trays. Capainolo led the way 
into the lab where study skins are still occasionally 
prepared; a female turkey he’d shot upstate a few 
days earlier was pinned out to dry on a table. The 
turkey was one of about 250 skins Capainolo has 
contributed to the collection over the course of 
his career. Rollo Beck, at the museum’s last count, 
supplied at least 44,000.* 

Two floors up, the elevator’s doors opened to ad- 
mit a blast of warm, humid air pumped from the 
butterfly exhibit’s ventilation system. Capainolo 
smiled at a surprised guard resting in a folding 
chair and opened a door into the corner office of 
Ben King, the museum’s partly-retired expert on 
Southeast Asian birds. King wasn’t in. The office 
was like a time capsule from an earlier age of the 
museum, spacious but cluttered, piled with books, 
maps, bones, every volume of the immense Hand- 
book of Birds of the World, and, against one wall, a 
Victorian-era collection of miscellaneous North 
American birds in a dusty glass case. 

The birds in the case were arranged like flowers 
on a stylized tangle of branches and vines. It was 
an undeniably beautiful object, but more whimsy 
than science, and Capainolo noted the presence of 


*The turkey, which Capainolo had nicknamed "Mrs. Beasley" 
had been in at the height of its breeding cycle; an index card 
pinned next to the skin noted "no molt; heavy fat; ovary huge 
- 4 large ova, 3 collapsed follicles, 1 egg in cloaca, ready to 
lay." I asked him about the egg. "I ate it," he replied. "It was 
fresh." 


a European starling - a recent introduction to the 
continent at the time the case was built. “That’s 
how they used to do it,” he said. “Lots of pretty 
birds.” He opened another small door in the far 
wall of the office and stepped through it into a 
dim, narrow, high-ceilinged passage that ran the 
length of the Whitney hall. 

Inside the passage, nine metal-ribbed half-silos 
stretched from floor to ceiling, like columns of 
a massive temple: these were the curved backs 
of the hidden dioramas, sealed in the dark for 
the past fifteen years. To preserve the illusion of 
their seamless backgrounds, there were no secret 
doors; access was only through the glass in front, 
covered over now with plywood. Hidden inside 
were the landscapes and birds of Fiji, Papua, the 
snowy peaks of western New Guinea, wind-blast- 


ed Little Diomede (a tiny spot of land in the Ber- 
ing Sea), and the shores of the Great Barrier Reef. 
Piles of cardboard boxes choked the corridor, an 
antique Underwood typewriter rested against the 
wall, and a decades-old can of Schaefer beer was 
tucked behind a railing. Capainolo nodded toward 
a ladder that ascended into darkness near the 
doorway. “There’s a little platform up there that’d 
be a good place to take a nap,” he said. “You go up 
there, nobody’ll find you.” 


On a recent afternoon in the Butterfly Conserva- 
tory, a museum volunteer armed with a spray bot- 
tle misted the branches of potted Norfolk Island 
pines, and a family from Pittsburgh admired a trio 
of resting monarchs. These butterflies, explained 
the guide, were imported as pupae from farms 
where they were specially raised for exhibits like 
this one. They’re also the stars, he added, of the 
film on butterfly migration showing downstairs 
in the IMAX theatre. The monarchs, their folded 
underwings the pale brown of dead leaves, were 
North American, but their cellmates were cosmo- 
politan: bouncing against the lights or uncurling 
their tongues to drink condensation from the 
walls, they hailed from the Amazon, East Afri- 
ca, Malaysia. Rows of unhatched chrysalides in a 
narrow glass box bulged and twitched, and a tow- 
headed little girl contemplated a female swallow- 
tail flopping in a plate of orange slices, its wings 
grown ragged in the final hours of its few weeks 
of life. 

The Butterfly Conservatory, sponsored by Lord 
& Taylor, was installed in 1998 as a temporary ex- 
hibit — the Whitney hall had been meticulously 
cleaned, and its signage updated — but the but- 
terflies’ popularity has endured. Visitors paying 
a special exhibition fee are allowed in every half 
hour, and on most days between October and June 
a steady stream of people files out of the conser- 
vatory’s double doors past four of the still-visible 
dioramas of the Hall of Oceanic Birds: tropical Sa- 
moa, the wild seas of the high southern latitudes, 
the Snares Islands, and New Zealand. Though the 
most colorful birds are slightly faded after sixty 
years on display, the scenes remain remarkably 
fresh and real: Samoa’s lorikeets, honey-eaters 
and fruit-doves blithely perch in view of a con- 


cealed barn owl, the yellow-crested penguins of 
the Snares nest in a weird forest of tree daisies, 
and elegant, wave-hugging cape petrels and pri- 
ons soar over the bow of the France. 8 

New Zealand, however, stands out from the oth- 
ers, as its centerpiece is an elaborate fake. Dom- 
inating the scene is a model of a moa, an os- 
trich-sized grazing bird which no one has seen 
alive for centuries. It was probably an irresistible 
temptation to include it for Murphy, who spent 
time digging up sub-fossil moa bones on New 
Zealand’s South Island, but it’s an odd moment of 
scientific nostalgia in a hall so dedicated to pre- 
serving the Pacific as it was in the early twentieth 
century that a bullet-pierced American soldier’s 
helmet lies in the foreground of the Philippines 
diorama. 9 

The moa, with its long, curved neck, shaggy feath- 
ers, massive feet, and golden eyes, peers out at the 
viewer from a remote beach among the fjords of 
the South Island, surrounded by a host of strange 
birds that are now extremely rare — an enormous, 
flightless parrot, a crow-like bird with odd blue 
wattles, a purple-and-green moorhen with a huge 
red beak. The scene is rendered so lovingly and be- 
lievably that it elicits a pang of regret, as it seems 
meant to, that this version of the world is gone, 
that these giants no longer walk among us. 10 

A sign by the exit reads: “The Whitney Hall of Oce- 
anic Birds is temporarily closed. We apologize for 
the inconvenience.” 


I would like to gratefully acknowledge Michael 
Walker, Peter Capainolo, Mary LeCroy, Paul 
Sweet, and Barbara Mathe of the American Mu- 
seum of Natural History in New York for being so 
generous with their time and attention, and for 
granting me “backstage” access to the Whitney 
hall and its archives. I would also like to thank 
Branan Edgens for his photographs, and Robin 
Woods for pointing me toward the remarkable 
life stories of Rollo and Ida Beck. 


84 


The Appendix Out Loud 


Notes 



OMUL O I THE MAYOR. CITY OF NEW YORK 


THE WHITNEY WING FOR BIRDS AT THE AMERICAN MUSEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY 
IS CELEBRATING ITS FIFTIETH ANNIVERSARY THIS YEAR. ITS EXHIBITION 
AND RESEARCH FACILITIES HAVE ENABLED THE MUSEUM TO BECOME A WORLD 
RENOWNED CENTER FOR ORNITHOLOGICAL RESEARCH. THE SPECIMENS HOUSED IN 
THIS BUILDING ARE AN IRREPLACEABLE RESOURCE AS WE SEEK TO UNDERSTAND 
THE DIVERSITY OF BIRDS AND HOW WE MIGHT PROTECT THEM IN A WORLD 
PLAGUED BY THE DESTRUCTION OF THEIR HABITATS. 

THF MAGNIFICENT GIFT OF THE WHITNEY WING TO THE CITIZENS OF NEW YORK 
WAS MADE POSSIBLE THROUGH THE GENEROSITY OF THE WHITNEY FAMILY, THF 
SANFORD FAMILY, THE CITY OF NEW YORK, AND NUMEROUS OTHERS. THE 
WING'S PUBLIC EXHIBITIONS - THE WHITNEY HALL OF OCEANIC BIRDS AND THE 
SANFORD HALL OF BIOLOGY OF BIRDS - HAVE ENLIGHTENED MILLIONS OF 
STUDLNTS, SCHOLARS, AND VISITORS FROM AROUND THE WORE 0 AND WILL 
CONTINUE TO BE SOURCES OF KNOWLEDGE AND ENJOYMENT FOR GENERATIONS TO 
COME. 


NOW, THEREFORE, I, EDWARD I. KOCH, MAYOR OF THE CITY OF NEW YORK, DO 
HEREBY PROCLAIM OCTOBER 18, 1989, TO BE 


Mayor Ed Koch's declaration. 

Jonathan Meiburg 


2. Once, during after-dinner coffee at the Universi- 
ty Club, an inebriated donor sidled around a mar- 
ble column and warned a bemused Murphy not 
to “give the old rascal a cent more than $25,000.” 
Mary LeCroy, “Ernst Mayr at the American Muse- 
um of Natural History,’ Ornithological Monographs p. 
33- 


Scenes from the visible Whitney hall dioramas today. 

Branan Edgens 



Jonathan Meiburg 


3- 



Tag from a female kelp goose, prepared in the 
Falkland Islands by Rollo Beck in 1916. 

Jonathan Meiburg 


4. Rollo and Ida were occasionally separated 
during the Whitney expedition. Dumbacher & 
West (2010) write that “By all accounts, Ida was as 
tough as nails. She suffered terribly from seasick- 
ness, and like Darwin, she never really got over it, 
yet this did not prevent her from traveling. Photos 
typically show Ida in nice dresses and shoes not 
typical of field attire.” They also write that “she 
was good-natured, quick to laugh, and she adored 
Rollo.” 


July 2013 


85 




5. Luckily for the museum, the Whitneys’ gift of 
stock was swiftly liquidated by the museum’s 
comptroller before the 1929 stock market crash. 


9- 


6 . 



GROUPS COMPLETED 


* JOB NUMBERS ARE THOSE OF PREPARATION ONLY • 


Progress on the Whitney hall by 1 940. 

AMNH Library Services 


7. Stephen Quinn, the Museum’s Senior Project 
Manager for Exhibitions, writes that “Jaques, with 
no formal art or science training, was nothing less 
than a genius... to this day no artist is thought to 
paint birds in flight as well as Jaques.” 



Jaques constructed an ingenious scale model of the 
hall for use in planning and mocking up the displays 
from a visitor's eye level. 


AMNH Photo #3 14355 



Robert Cushman Murphy, at the official dedication of 
the Whitney Hall in 1953, talking to Eleanor Searle, 
aka Mrs. Cornelius Vanderbilt Whitney. 

AMNH Library Services 


10. This bird, the flightless takahe Porphyrio hoch- 
stetteri, the largest living member of the rail family, 
was thought to be extinct until 20 November 1948, 
when a small population was discovered in the re- 
mote Murchison Mountains of southwestern New 
Zealand. Only 263 individuals remain as of 2013. 
Like the moa, the takahe in the Whitney hall is a 
model. 


8. According to Peter Capainolo, during the clean- 
ing of the Whitney hall’s dome, a conservator 
working on scaffolding looked down, spotted ac- 
tor Bill Murray looking at the dioramas, and called 
down, “I loved you in Ghostbusters!”, to which 
Murray replied, “I loved you in The Agony and the 
Ecstasy!” 


86 


The Appendix Out Loud 





"Sustained Anger," "Explosive Anger," "Greed," and "Fear," by the synesthetic artist Annie Besant, 1901 . 

Wikimedia Commons 











a'V' >-> 



27 


2'i 


Controlling Sound: 
Musical Torture from the Shoah to 
Guantanamo 

Melissa Kagen 



“Purely physical torture is losing importance,” 
observed the psychologist Gustav Keller in 1981. 
“Psychological and psychiatric findings and meth- 
ods are taking its place, planned and sometimes 
administered by white-collar torturers.” This 
statement, though prescient, is debatable: plen- 
ty of purely physical torture has been reported by 
former prisoners of Guantanamo and Bagram. 
The implication, however, is one of progress: that 
torture has been civilized, professionalized, in 
some way stripped of its teeth. 


After the news broke that American soldiers 
were torturing detainees in secret prisons like 
Guantanamo, the idea spread that so-called “no 
touch” torture is more humane than more con- 
ventional methods involving violence to the body. 
No-touch torture utilizes methods like sleep 
deprivation, temperature regulation, violation of 
cultural and religious taboos, the playing of loud 
music, and psychological manipulation while in- 
terrogating prisoners. These methods, though of- 
ten brutal, frequently don’t leave physical marks, 
thus nebulizing the concept of torture and leaving 
the act more open to interpretation. 


July 2013 


87 


Music torture at Guantanamo is a prime example 
of this mindset. Endless news cycles discussed 
whether waterboarding, hooding, and playing 
loud music could even be considered torture. Mu- 
sicians, when asked for comment about “music 
torture”, sometimes responded dismissively: Me- 
tallica’s James Hetfield replied to the news with 
the comment, “We’ve been punishing our par- 
ents, our wives, our loved ones with this music for 
ever. Why should the Iraqis be any different?” Bob 
Singleton, who composed the often-used Barney 
the Purple Dinosaur theme song, wrote in the Los 
Angeles Times, “Would it annoy them? Perhaps ... 
But could it ‘break’ the mental state of an adult? If 
so, that would say more about their mental state 
than about the music.” 

The implication that these torture methods are 
somehow softer or easier to withstand than tra- 
ditional methods is an interesting but dangerous 
fallacy. In no-touch torture, the torture weapon is 
the prisoner’s own body, which aches in stress po- 
sitions, shivers, sweats, and demands sleep. The 
body itself becomes the enemy, psychologically 
destroying the prisoner from the inside out.* 

During war-crime trials, the torture weapon is 
often used as a synecdoche for the torture itself: 
a hammer, thumbscrew, or bathtub presented as 
evidence manifest the experience of that torture 
in an object. But with no-touch torture, where the 
weapon is the prisoner’s body, no such object ex- 
ists to display as a remnant of the event. In the ab- 
sence of a clearly identifiable torture weapon, the 
torture practiced on a prisoner becomes nearly in- 
visible to outsiders, and the room itself becomes 
toxic for the victim.* 

As a physical torture, music is rarely used by it- 
self; instead, it’s a component of the toxic envi- 
ronment. By blasting music, blaring lights, and 
keeping a cell ice cold, a prisoner is prevented 
from sleeping, and this deprivation is the ostensi- 
ble goal. After enough of this treatment, prisoners 

*No-touch torture is what Scarry might as well be describing 
when she writes that "this unseen sense of self-betrayal in pain ... 
is objectified in forced exercises that make the prisoner's body an 
active agent, an actual cause of pain." Elaine Scarry, The Body In 
Pain: The Making and Unmaking of the World (New York: Oxford 
University Press, 1987), p. 38. 


are apparently easier to interrogate. As Sergeant 
Mark Hadsell of the 361st PsyOps Company in Iraq 
explained in 2003, 

These people haven’t heard heavy metal. They 
can’t take it. If you play it for 24 hours, your brain 
and body functions start to slide, your train of 
thought slows down and your will is broken. 

That’s when we come in and talk to them. 

Beyond its psychological power, music’s phys- 
ical properties also mean that it can be used as 
a weapon by itself. The US has used LRADs and 
infrasonic weapons, causing reports of blown 
out eardrums, dizziness, ringing, and temporary 
deafness. ‘Safe’ levels of sound are articulated in 
scientific language. 

In Guantanamo, music’s physical and psycholog- 
ical properties interrelate. Not only does the mu- 
sic cause headaches and sound like loud, painful 
banging, its aesthetic qualities demand an innate 
human reaction. When we listen to music repeat- 
edly, it inscribes itself in our brains (think of ‘get- 
ting a tune stuck in your head’ or a German ‘Ohr- 
wurm’). 

Musicologist Christian Grimy writes about a for- 
mer prisoner of Guantanamo who was tortured 
with David Grey’s “Babylon,” a soft rock ballad 
seemingly chosen for the geographical coinci- 
dence (Babylon as a location in the Middle East). 

Years after his torture, when Grimy played a part 
of the song for him, he immediately burst into 
sobs. Suzanne Cusick describes how music’s cul- 
tural connotations come to symbolize the military 
power of the torturer. Because of music’s ability to 
get inside its listener, musical torture represents 
“the overwhelmingly diffuse Power that is outside 
one, but also is inside, and that operates by forc- 
ing one to comply against one’s will, against one’s 

t "The torture room," according to Elaine Scarry, "is not just the 
setting in which the torture occurs. ..it is itself literally converted 
into another weapon, into an agent of pain. All aspects of the 
basic structure— walls, ceiling, windows, doors— undergo this 
conversion." By turning the environment itself into a weapon, 
torture unmakes the world, undoes its normal referents. Part of this 
process requires the "mutilation of the domestic," the perversion of 
quotidian objects— chair, light, bed, or music — into torture weap- 
ons. Elain Scarry, The Body In Pain: The Making and Unmaking of 
the World, pp. 40, 45. 


88 


The Appendix Out Loud 


interests, because there is no way, not even a 
retreat into interiority — to escape the pain.” 

How do interrogators choose the soundtracks 
of musical torture? During the siege of Fal- 
lujah in November 2004, the 361st PsyOps 
company bombed the city with Metallica. As 
PsyOps spokesman Ben Abel explained at the 
time: 

It’s not the music so much as the sound. It’s 
like throwing a smoke bomb. The aim is to 
disorient and confuse the enemy to gain a 
tactical advantage ... our guys have been 
getting really creative in finding sounds they 
think would make the enemy upset ...These 
guys have their own mini-disc players, with 
their own music, plus hundreds of down- 
loaded sounds. It’s kind of personal prefer- 
ence how they choose the songs. We’ve got 
very young guys making these decisions. 

During the siege of Fallujah, mullahs re- 
sponded to American rap with “loudspeakers 
hooked to generators, trying to drown out 
Eminem with prayers, chants of Allahu Ak- 
bar, and Arabic music.” 1 


In the course of my doctoral research, I’ve had 
the chance to reflect on the parallels between 
these news stories and the long history of 
musical torture. The other half of my project 
involves mapping some of the music heard in 
the infamous Nazi concentration camp Aus- 
chwitz. In some ways, the projects are so dif- 
ferent as to seem unconnected: music played 


at Auschwitz was part of an overall culture of 
terror and control, but not a torture in itself. 

However, the same idea, that musical space 
is a metaphor for control, can be seen all 
over the camp. A particularly clear example 
can be heard in the hospital barracks at Aus- 
chwitz-Birkenau. 

Szymon Laks, a survivor who was forced to 
play in the camp orchestra, describes how his 
ensemble was sent to the barracks on Christ- 
mas of 1943 to console the sick with carols, 
specifically “Stifle Nacht” (“Silent Night”): 

After a few bars quiet weeping began to be 
heard from all sides, which became louder 
as we played and finally burst out in general 
uncontrolled sobbing. I didn’t know what to 
do. To play on? Louder? From all sides, spas- 
modic cries began to roll in on me. ‘Enough 
of this! Stop! Clear out! Let us die in peace!’ 

Laks, though a prisoner himself, appears 
here as a representative of Nazi power, sim- 
ply because he’s playing Christmas carols to 
dying (largely lewish) inmates. 

Laks, though a prisoner himself, appears here 
as a representative of Nazi power, simply be- 
cause he’s playing Christmas carols to dying 
(largely Jewish) inmates. 

The prisoners wished to die in peace — which 
is to say, they wanted the barest hint of auton- 
omy over the space in which they die. This 
music, to which they are forced to listen, dis- 
turbs them not only because it disrupts that 

Listen to "Stifle Nacht" (Silent Night) at http://appendic.es/rn/10 



=r fl'iIffflOO‘DD 


“00000000 


=OOOODO 
= 00 D 
= D0D 
= 000 


A map of the sonic 
environment at the Aus- 
chwitz-Birkenau camp 
in 1943. 

Melissa Kagen and Jake 
Melrose, 2012 


July 2013 


89 



space, but because it invades their bodies. A piece 
played inside a brick barrack would be audible 
on the path outside, and the march played next 
to the path would be audible to anyone within. 
Moreover, there is a limited distinction between 
sounds heard by guards and sounds heard by pris- 
oners — a difference in psychological affect, cer- 
tainly, but not in the music itself. 

In other words, the sounds heard by guards and 
prisoners were often the same and, in this strange 
sense, prisoners and guards were and are united 
in their experience. In the case of musical torture 
during the war on terror, this sharing was, at least 
in one instance, more radical. Jonathan Pieslak 
records the following quote from U.S. soldier C.J. 
Grisham, who used music during interrogations 
in Iraq: 

As long as they were listening to babies crying, 

I had to listen to babies crying ...You are not al- 
lowed to do anything to the enemy, by law, that 
you wouldn’t do yourself. So if I’m getting eight 
hours of sleep, the people I’m interrogating have 
to get eight hours of sleep, if I’m only getting 
two hours of sleep, then my prisoners are only 
required to get two hours of sleep. We can’t treat 
them any worse than we treat ourselves. 

This inference of shared experience through music 
is reminiscent of the musical warfare at the Siege 
of Fallujah, where opposing soundtracks compet- 
ed for control of the city in a sonic analogue to the 
battle. It also articulates the sonic hegemony I’m 
investigating: how sound equalizes all ears, while 
still demonstrating an unequal power relation. 

Grisham’s description of this army guideline, 
requiring a certain equality between prisoners 
and guards, provides an interesting inversion of 
a traditional understanding of torture. For Scar- 
ry, torture’s premise is the utter gulf between a 
person being tortured, who experiences the pain 
as world-destroying, and a person not being tor- 
tured, who doubts the existence of that pain be- 
cause of its utter unsharability. The boundaries 
between torturer and victim blur — not in their 
power relations, but in the similarity of their expe- 
rienced environment. 

That shared environment is part of what I find so 
interesting about music in Auschwitz, and it is a 
feature of the camps that I have tried to visualize 


in my work. My partner Jake Melrose and I mapped 
forced music (which prisoners were required to 
play) in red, and voluntary music in blue. Perfor- 
mance allowed for a modicum of creative expres- 
sion, an outlet not readily available for manual 
laborers. For example, after a rehearsal in Block 
24 of Auschwitz I (the Main Camp), a Hungarian 
pianist played Chopin’s Funeral March (Piano Sonata 
#2 in B-jlat minor), saying it was the only appropri- 
ate music considering the circumstances. This 
same Block 24, however, transformed into a per- 
verse jazz club when SS officers came to unwind 
after a long day. They would ask musicians to play 
prohibited American jazz and ragtime songs like 
“Dinah,” “Sweet Sue,” “I Can’t Give You Anything 
but Love,” and “Alexander’s Ragtime Band.” 

Listen to Alexander's Ragtime Band at 
http://appendic.es/rn/! 1 


Listen to Chopin's Piano Sonata in B Flat Minor, Op. 35, 
"Funeral March" at http://appendic.es/rn/12 


Listen to Julius Fucik's "Florentiner Marsch" at 
http://appendic.eS/m/l 3 

Directly outside Block 24 was the area through 
which work gangs marched into and out of the 
gates, accompanied by various marches like 
Fucik’s “Florentiner Marsch,” Liebling’s “Wenn 
Ich Traurig Bin,” and the “Horst Wessel Lied.” 
Obviously, this area could become a very different 
musical environment at different times of the day. 
By having the freedom to choose the music they 
wanted to hear, the guards made their authority 
clear and their control absolute. Moments of mu- 
sical mourning, like the pianist playing Chopin, 
had to be squeezed in when no one was listening. 

Music played in Guantanamo is similarly varied. 
The most confusing category to me is emotional, 
nostalgic music: Fleetwood Mac, Matchbox 20, 
Chris Christopherson, David Grey’s “Babylon” 
as well as children’s songs — notably the themes 
from Sesame Street and Barney the Purple Dino- 
saur. To me, this bespeaks a strange nostalgia for 
a specifically American childhood, even as those 
American children have grown up to inherit a 
world that is nothing like what they anticipated 
while watching Sesame Street. 


90 


The Appendix Out Loud 


“American Pie,” another song in this category, 
similarly invokes nostalgia for a lost past, in ad- 
dition to carrying a religious implication — one 
verse reads, “the three men I admired most, the 
father, son, and holy ghost, they caught the last 
train to the coast, the day the music died” — in a 
kind of requiem for a nation that’s strayed from 
its God. The emotional thrust of this piece would 
hit American soldiers much harder than prisoners 
less familiar with Americana. This is a particu- 
larly American kind of abuse: aggressive exertion 
of cultural hegemony mixed with physical force, 
ostensible compliance with the “good guy” rules, 
and nostalgia for the lost American dream. 


Notes 

i. I haven’t clarified how music in torture differs 
from music in wartime. I have been treating them 
similarly here, since several of the same principles 
are at play: using music to exert cultural hegemo- 
ny, playing it to emphasize control over space, 
physically assaulting the enemy with soundwaves. 
One major difference is, of course, that musical 
torture takes place in a small, circumscribed place 
and is completely inescapable, whereas music in 
wartime forms only one aspect of a nightmarish 
landscape. Music in Auschwitz was therefore used 
more as a wartime weapon than a torture device. 




My project began as an attempt to think about 
music in space. How does music work to control 
space, and how can it affect bodies inhabiting that 
space? What does an environment that has been 
saturated with an enemy culture’s music sound 
like, and is the music functioning as anything be- 
yond cultural aggression? 

But one of the most interesting aspects for me, 
beyond those initial questions, has been the re- 
sponses. The first comment from almost every- 
one who hears about my project is either a joke or 
a respectful “hmm,” depending on which case I 
begin with. If I start to describe music torture in 
Guantanamo, the comment will usually be a quip 
about what musical genre or artist they would 
consider torturous: country music, Yoko Ono, 
Justin Bieber, insert-hated-group-here. If I begin 
by describing the Auschwitz maps, the comment 
is something quiet, curious and respectful. It 
seems like firsthand evidence of the way we differ- 
entiate history from current events, and American 
behavior from everyone else’s. 

And this American exceptionalism can prevent 
us from hearing crucial voices coming out of 
Guantanamo now. An op-ed in The New York Times 
on Sunday, April 14, 2013 by Samir Naji al Hasan 
Moqbel reported on a hunger strike in Guantana- 
mo. It ended with the plea, “I just hope that be- 
cause of the pain we are suffering, the eyes of the 
world will once again look to Guantanamo before 
it is too late.” 


July 2013 


91 


Biophony and the 
Deep History of Sound 

Bernie Krause 



A man of man y talents, Bernie Krause got his start as a 
musician in the early 1960s, playing with The Weauers 
and appearing as an occasional backup session musician 
on early Motown recordings. He was a pioneer of electron- 
ic music, studying with Karlheinz Stockhausen and intro- 
ducing — with his late music partner, Paul Beaver — the 
Moog synthesizer to The Doors, the Byrds, Stevie Wonder, 
and George Harrison, among many others. In the 1970s, 
Krause and Beauer released their own charted series of in- 
novative synthesizer recordings and began to incorporate 
jield recordings of natural soundscapes into their composi- 
tions — whatKrause calls ‘biophony.’ 

Today, Krause produces highly sophisticated recordings of 
ecosystems around the world. He has been hailed as “one of 
the world’s leading experts in natural sound” by Sir George 
Martin, and Jane Goodall writes that he “speaks to us of 
an ancient music to which so many of us are deaf.” His 
Wild Sanctuary Audio Archiue features recordings of more 
than 15,000 species and 4,500 hours of marine and ter- 
restrial habitats, including recordings of biomes that haoe 
since been destroyed by human activity. 


For The Appendix’s third issue, we focused primarily on 
human-made sounds. But Krause offers an important re- 
minder that man-made noise (anthrophony) is only one 
component of the earth’s soundscape. In his book The 
Great Animal Orchestra, he argues that the earliest 
music and speech was inspired by early humans’ encoun- 
ter with animal uocalizations and other sounds from the 
natural world. 

Krause is also a remarkably vivid writer. His descriptions 
of biophonies evoke the mysterious beauty of natural 
soundscapes that long predated humans, and may well 
outlast us. In the audio excerpt and transcription below, he 
recounts a meeting with a hungry jaguar, its growls picked 
up by the hyper-sensitiue recording equipment Krause em- 
ploys in his field recordings. 

“I don’t especially refer to that or similar situations as 
‘close calls,”’ Krause told us. “They were just within the 
range of expected encounters one anticipates when fully 
engaged with the natural world.”- The Editors 


92 


The Appendix Out Loud 



Listen to a recording, transcribed below, of Krause's encounter with a jaguar at 
http://appendic.es/ m/k 


Transcript: 

Recording late one night deep in the Amazon 
jungle, my colleague Ruth Happel and I were 
alone in the forest several kilometers from 
camp with no light apart from the beams of 
our flashlights. Hoping to record the night 
ambience at several locations, we walked the 
trail quite aware of the tapestry of sounds 
around us. Along the way, we also picked up 
the unmistakable marking scent of a nearby 
jaguar. We never saw or heard the animal, 
but we knew it was close, perhaps even just a 
few feet away; it was frequently scent-mark- 
ing as it followed us. 

The musky feline odor was a constant 
presence. Our senses were heightened, but 
neither of us was afraid or perceived any 
immediate danger. Sitting quietly about 
fifty meters apart, we recorded the acoustic 
texture of the nighttime rain forest — the del- 
icate admixture of raindrops on leaves, and 
insects, birds, frogs, and mammals perform- 
ing their unified chorus as they have each day 
and night since the beginning. 

After about an hour, we packed our gear and 
hiked deeper into the forest, listening for 
recording sites with more varied combina- 
tions. Then, around midnight, we decided 
to split up in order to gather the even greater 
variety of night sounds we hoped to encoun- 
ter in this wonderfully rich environment. 
Ruth went down the path in one direction, 
and I went off in another. 

After trekking for about fifteen minutes, I sat 
down beside the trail and began to record the 
intense tropical choruses of frogs, insects, 
and reptiles. Only then did I hear the cat’s 
low growl in my headphones. It must have 
singled me out and followed me. Because I 
had the headphones’ volume turned up to 
catch the fragile acoustic composition and 
detail of the forest, I wasn’t attuned to my 


unlikely visitor — or aware that it had come 
that close. The sudden register of the jag- 
uar’s growls in my headset indicated that the 
cat was not more than an arm’s length from 
the mics I had set up about thirty feet down 
the trail. 

Fully alert in an instant, a rush of adrenaline 
catching me off guard, I felt my chest con- 
vulse. Trying to think of an exit strategy — 
there was none — I made some effort to calm 
down. In the moment, I thought that the 
sound of my heart was so audible, it would 
startle the animal. But I kept absolutely still, 
holding my breath in the darkness. 

The incident lasted no more than a minute, 
but it seemed like a couple of hours as I sat 
mesmerized by the power of the animal’s 
voice, its breathing, and the sounds of rum- 
bles in its stomach. Then, as suddenly as it 
appeared, the jaguar moved silently off into 
the forest, leaving behind rhythmic waves of 
frog and whirring insect choruses, and what 
remained of my pounding heart. 


In April 2013, we corresponded with Krause about the 
encounter, his work, and how the sounds of nature 
might interact with human culture and history. 

That jaguar recording is remarkable. Haue you had 
any other brushes with dangerous creatures? 

Others include intruding in polar bear terri- 
tory and getting in between two mountain 
gorillas having a dispute. 

Your book/eatures a fascinating transcription of the 
birdsong of the musician wren into musical nota- 
tion, which follows the pentatonic scale. What oth- 
er animal sounds haue you transcribed in this way? 

Among them — aside from several species of 
birds — there are amphibians, insects, hump- 


July 2013 


93 


back whales, killer whales, some species of dol- 
phins, and bats. 

Can you speak about music as a cultural middle ground 
in the different places you’ue traueled to — but also per- 
haps about its role as a signifier of difference as well? 
Elsewhere in this issue, /or instance, Glenda Goodman 
writes about the differences betioeen Puritan and Algon- 
quian Indian singing styles and the conflicts this caused. 
Can sound be a point 0/ contention as well as something 
that unites us? 

This is an area that deserves much more attention 
and study. My gut response is that music has al- 
ways been a result and indicator of — originally, at 
least — both our connection to the natural world 
and its biophony and geophony which we’ve ele- 
gantly mimicked. Either that, or it has become a 
solipsistic reflection of our own need to control 
sound and, in the process, thinking that we could 
transform it to ‘improve on nature,’ we’ve become 
immersed in the illusion that we can do much bet- 
ter, with compositions that suggest a radical and 
detached departure from natural world experi- 
ence. In the case of religious music, for example, 
natural soundscapes are thought of as evil in some 
quarters. (I like to think of biophonies and some 
geophonies as the true voice of the divine and the 
way the gods speak to us directly about the state of 
our own existence... such as it is.) 

In your book you cite the music of the Ba’Aka 0/ south- 
western Africa as suggestive of an ancestral linkage be- 
tween human music and natural soundscapes, but are 
also careful to remind us that the Ba’Aka are a lining 
culture and that their music remains fluid. To what de- 
gree do you think distinct traditions of music and sound 
might remain embedded in a culture for centuries or mil- 
lenia? How does one make deductions about ancient mu- 
sic based on contemporary societies? 

These are deep questions that go way beyond my 
level of experience and knowledge. I am not a mu- 
sical anthropologist and cannot begin to extrapo- 
late indigenous musical styles and how they might 
be transformed in the future. I do know that Na- 
tive American music and that of other cultures has 
been greatly influenced by what the missionaries 
have brought into the lexicon; it is an effect that 
is profound and deeply troubling to me. But that’s 
the way it goes when those of us of one cultural 


background hear and integrate the music of oth- 
ers. We’re mimics. 

What do you consider the most beautiful bird or animal 
call, and can you share a recording of it? 

Probably the flute-like sounds of the thrush fam- 
ily... Swainson’s and hermit thrushes. I love those 
sounds. But also, whole biophonies. 

Listen to the Swainson's Thrush's call at 
http://appendic.es/m/l 

Do you think music is what makes us human? 

No. That answer is addressed in the writing of the 
late Paul Shepard and his book, The Others: How An- 
imals Made us Human. As a matter of fact, the sug- 
gestion that animals taught us to dance and sing 
came directly from that source. 

In our interuiew with Alexander Rose of the Long Now 
Foundation, Rose discusses the Clock of the Long Now 
and the concept 0/ extremely long-term thinking. Have 
you thought about partnering with other sound recorders 
to create a massiue database of what life on planet earth 
at this moment sounds like, as a record for future genera- 
tions? A sort of audio Noah’s ark? 

Yes. For over a dozen years, now, I have sought out 
an institutional repository for my natural sound 
archive — the rarest of its kind for two reasons: 
(1) because it includes biophonies recorded over a 
wide span of time (1968 - present) and (2) because 
fully 50% comes from habitats so radically altered 
that they are either altogether silent or the biopho- 
nies can no longer be heard in any of their original 
form. Part of that transfer includes the establish- 
ment of an academic chair specifically directed to 
include a wide range of related disciplines related 
to natural soundscapes, a center for soundscape 
studies, and the global soundscape project. 


94 


The Appendix Out Loud 


From Folklore to Exotica: 
Yma Sumac and the 
Performance of Inca Identity 

Zoila S. Mendoza 


The Voice 

Born high in the Peruvian Andes, a descendant 
of the last of the Incan Kings, Yma Sumac spent 
her childhood literally ‘talking’ with the birds, 
the beasts, the winds, the sound of life and 
nature surrounding the little village of Ichocan. 
While still a small girl she began taking part in 
the religious services of the sun-worshipping In- 
dians and became almost deified by them. Word 
of her phenomenal vocal powers reached Lima, 
the Peruvian capital, and an official government 
delegation traveled into this remote mountain 
region to see and hear what they secretly be- 
lieved to be a myth. 

ma Sumac, the Peruvian singer, star- 
tled audiences in the United States 
and Europe with her remarkable 
voice, beauty, and mysterious “Inca” 
princess/priestess persona. Accounts of Sumac’s 
life — like the largely fictional narrative quoted 
above — are full of fantasy and contradictions. 
Nevertheless, this piece begins with yet another 
story about her discovery: a true one. 1 

Zoila Augusta Chavarri del Castillo (Yma Sumac) 
and Zoila Rosa Beoutis Joffre (my mother) were 
close friends during their sophomore and junior 
years in high school. These two young women had 
traveled from the highland provinces of Cajamar- 
ca and Junin to the capital city of Lima, seeking ac- 
cess to better schooling than what had been avail- 
able back home. While the nun-run school they 
attended was hardly elite, it does suggest that their 
families had socioeconomic resources not avail- 
able to the great majority of highlanders. The two 
friends used to study in the house of my great-un- 
cle, Alejandro Beoutis Santivanez, who hosted my 
mother in Lima. Beoutis was an avid promoter of 
the Andean traditions of his homeland, and his 


Hear Yma Sumac perform 
"Virgenes del Sol" (1944) at 
http://appendic.es/m/9 


house was a place of meetings for rehearsals and 
preparation for participating in folkloric events. 
He sponsored many highland artists who lacked 
economic resources, so they could participate in 
the effervescent scene of folkloric performance 
in Lima. By the first few decades of the twentieth 
century, rural highlanders had started to migrate 
in great numbers to the cities, especially Lima, 
and their increasing presence began to be reflect- 
ed in the contests, religious festivals, and other 
cultural elements they brought with them. 

While my mother’s cousin Helida was rehearsing 
for one such event in 1938, Zoila Augusta and my 
mother decided to spy on the proceedings. My 
aunt was rehearsing with a well-known folkloric 
musician who was from the highland department 
of Ayacucho: Moises Vivanco de Allende. This mu- 
sician heard Zoila Augusta humming and echoing 
the songs and called her saying, “young woman, 
you have a splendid voice.” Zoila Augusta ended 
up singing in a duet with my aunt for the upcom- 
ing occasion and from then on Vivanco became 
her manager and artistic mentor. He married her 
in 1942. 

Later, Vivanco would romanticize this ‘discov- 
ery’ story, claiming that he had discovered her in 
her native Cajamarca. This led to further fantas- 
tic reconstructions, such as the claim that when 
the government decided to take Zoila Augusta to 
Lima it was “a decision that almost caused an up- 
rising among some thirty thousand Indians over 
the loss of their revered ritual singer.” Such exag- 
gerations began to cause resentment among some 
Peruvian highland audiences toward the star and 
her manager-husband. 



July 2013 


95 


Zoila Augusta’s folkloric singing career started 
right away, whereas my mother returned to Junin 
for her senior year of high school. Their friend- 
ship ended after Yma’s ‘discovery.’ They would 
meet again in 1957 and 2006. By 1942, Zoila Au- 
gusta would start using as her artistic name Yma 
Sumac (most commonly spelled in Peru Ima Su- 
mac), symbolically marking her new identity as 
an Inca princess/priestess. In Quechua this name 
means “how beautiful” and became associated 
with Inca royalty via the popular theatrical piece 
Ollantay, believed at the time to be a legacy of the 
Inca period. 


Competing Identities 

Typically, if someone in the U.S. has heard of Peru, 
it is in relation to the Incas and Machu Picchu, the 
archaeological site added to the list of the New 
Seven Wonders of the World in 2007. While most 
Peruvians proudly claim Machu Picchu and the 
accomplishments of the Inca Empire as their her- 
itage, they are more hesitant to envision Peru as 
an Andean nation with highland people and cul- 
ture at its core. Unlike other Andean nations such 
as Bolivia and Ecuador, whose capitals lie at the 
heart of the Andes, Lima straddles the coast. This 
dichotomy between the coastal center of political 
and economic power and the peripheral or mar- 
ginalized highland regions has marked Peruvian 
history since the colonial period (1535-1821) and 
has become even more prominent since indepen- 
dence. Since the 1960s, the Peruvian nation has 
in most international forums presented itself as a 
criollo (creole) culture, a culture that developed on 
the coast mixing mostly Spanish and Afro-Peruvi- 
an elements. 

However, during most of the first half of the twen- 
tieth century, this national identity was still in 
flux. Nationalistic, populist governments, espe- 
cially those of president Augusto B. Leguia (1908- 
1912, 1919-1925, 1925-1929, 1929-1930), sought to 
pin down and project a stable national identity. 
In this context, highland regional movements at- 
tempted to establish a more ‘authentic’ highland 
cultural identity. Effervescent artistic production 
played a key role in these movements, operating in 
an internationally validated arena that had come 


to be known as ‘folklore.’ Previously-scorned in- 
digenous and indigenous-based music and danc- 
es began to be seen as something to be protected 
and encouraged. During the first part of the twen- 
tieth century, the highland department of Cuzco 
took a leading role in questioning el centralismo 
limeno (Lima centralism) and in arguing that the 
heart and identity of the nation should be in the 
Andes. Cuzco artists and intellectuals had a spe- 
cial advantage: in addition to being the cradle of 
the Inca Empire, Cuzco was also the gateway to 
the monumental site of Machu Picchu, unveiled 
to the world in 1911. 

The so-called “scientific discovery” of Machu 
Picchu initiated a new epoch in the role of Cuz- 
co and the indigenous Andes in the Peruvian and 
international imagimire. Although the site is men- 
tioned in eighteenth- and nineteenth- century 
documents, and was known to the people living 
in the area, to a great extent it was due to the ef- 
forts of two American citizens, Hiram Bingham 
and Albert Giesecke, that Machu Picchu became a 
major focus of national and international interest. 
However, it was not until the 1940s, with the con- 
struction of the first tourist hotel in Cuzco, reg- 
ular commercial flights coming into the region, 
and the construction of a zigzagging road up to 
the site that significant numbers of tourists began 
traveling to Cuzco and Machu Picchu. 

From the 1920s on, it is obvious that not only Cuz- 
co but most folkloric music and dance adopted 
the “Inca” identity in order to be validated. New 
spaces at the national and regional levels were 
created to promote this kind of art and Cuzco art- 
ists acquired a prominent place in them. It was 
in this context that Yma Sumac began her career. 
She joined the “Folkloric Art” group led by Moises 
Vivanco and in 1942 made her debut in national 
and international radio. Soon the company would 
change its name to “Imma Sumack and the Peru- 
vian Folkloric Ensemble,” a clear sign of the rising 
fame of the young star. In the years that followed, 
the ensemble toured Peru, Chile, Argentina, Bra- 
zil, and also Mexico, probably the most important 
artistic center of Latin America. By then, Mexico 
was the leader in music, television, and movie 
production for all of Latin America; to be recog- 
nized there meant great fame for artists of the 
time. 


96 


The Appendix Out Loud 


Because the tour to Mexico represented an 
important challenge for the singer and the 
group, they made sure to gather the best 
artists from around Peru. They invited three 
well-known popular musicians from Cuzco 
to form part of the ensemble. This initiative 
was ill-fated: after playing with the ensemble 
in Lima, the flute player was run over by a car 
and another could not travel because of visa 
issues. The original amicable relationship be- 
tween Yma and Cuzco artists would weaken 
when she left behind traditional Andean folk- 
lore in exchange for a persona that sold best 
abroad. 


The Transformation 

Yma Sumac and Moises Vivanco arrived in 
New York in 1946 hoping to enchant the 
North American public with their folkloric 
art. Shortly before, Vivanco had disband- 
ed the troupe and formed a trio with one of 
Yma’s female cousins, the Inca Taqui Trio. Al- 
though Yma’s extraordinary voice and exotic 
beauty always caught the attention of North 
American audiences, the trio initially strug- 
gled. Yma’s art needed to fit into the forms 
of exoticism that the North American public 
expected. Exotica was “a form of mostly in- 
strumental pop music featuring orchestral 
or lounge instrumentation, augmented by 
Latin, African, or Polynesian rhythms or trib- 
al-sounding chanting or singing.”* 

It seems that Vivanco, as her husband and 
manager, led Yma’s transformation. He man- 
aged her musical arrangements and created 
an aura of exoticism around her. By the 1950s, 
Vivanco’s insecurities about his own worth 
led him to exert an obnoxious and aggres- 
sive dominion over her. Limansky says that 

*As Yma's main biographer states, in 1950, when 
Ima's first album in the U.S. was released, the horrors 
of World War II "were still fresh in the minds of the 
world's people [and they] were ready for diversion 
... [T]his led to the growth of an unusual movement 
in American popular entertainment called 'exotica'" 
(Limansky, 3). 


“Moises guarded Yma like a rare hothouse 
flower... [Wjhether consciously or not, Yma 
allowed herself to be put into this awkward 
and precarious position.” Vivanco struggled 
to get recognition from the public but “Yma 
delivered what was expected of her because, 
in reality, her talent equaled the extravagant 
claims of the publicity releases.” 

Yma’s voice was indeed extraordinary. While 
some say that her voice range was of four oc- 
taves, others, including the singer herself, as- 
serted that it reached five. It seems, though, 
that what impressed audiences the most were 
the extremely high notes that she could reach. 
While traditional indigenous Andean female 
singers are known for their very high-pitched 
voice, there is no doubt that Yma Sumac’s 
name in Peru became synonymous with high- 
pitched singing. However, her singing would 
move far away from the traditional folkloric 
Andean style and toward a quasi-operatic 
style. Yma signaled this shift by wearing ex- 
pensive gowns and adorning herself with Pe- 
ruvian jewelry. 

As part of the exotica movement, Yma offered 
nature-inspired vocal impressions that might 
be considered bizarre. As Limansky argues, 

because of her distinct musical individuali- 
ty, but also because of the absurdly bombas- 
tic initial American publicity and promo- 
tion — which billed the singer as an Incan 
priestess and/or princess and relentlessly 
emphasized and even overstated her vocal 
extensions — Yma Sumac was almost never 
taken seriously as an artist. Instead, she was 
relegated to the ranks of curiosity entertain- 
ers, a freak performer... [A] n isolated figure 
in the annals of performing, Sumac has al- 
ways had mystery surrounding her. She was 
as exotic to American culture as she was 
glamorous . 2 

This mysterious oddity fit perfectly within 
the script of the first Hollywood film featur- 
ing Yma: Secret of the Incas, the movie that in- 


Hear Yma Sumac perform "Jivaro" (1957) at http://appendic.es/m/c 


July 2013 


97 


spired the Indiana Jones films. Yma’s role in the film 
was directly related to the Inca royal persona she 
had adopted. Like the exotica musical movement, 
Hollywood’s representations of exotic countries, 
and/or cultures embodied by artists and archae- 
ological sites were readily consumed by the U.S. 
public. This was the time when, for example, 
Carmen Miranda came to embody not only Bra- 
zilian identity but a generic “Latin” identity. Se- 
cret of the Incas was shot in 1953 and premiered in 
1954. Albert Giesecke, one of the two Americans 
who played a key role in the “discovery” of Machu 
Picchu became a key person who facilitated local 
help and guidance to the filming crews. 

Watch scenes from Secret of the Incas (1 954) at 
http:// appendic.es/m/b 

While there seems to have been a remote link to 
Inca ancestry through Yma’s mother who bore 
Atahualpa (the name of the last reigning Inca in 
Peru) as one of her maiden names, this was greatly 
exaggerated in marketing the film in the U.S. In 
Secret of the Incas Yma was portrayed as a local elite 
near Machu Picchu who acted as an intermediary 
between the animistic, superstitious, and primi- 
tive Indians in the film and the scientists and of- 
ficials who were working at archaeological sites. 
Her character is also a sort of priestess, making 
an offering to an Inca mummy found in the site. 3 

Remarkably, Yma Sumac, was never in Machu Pic- 
chu — or, indeed, even in Peru — during filming. 
The songs were pre-recorded, and she filmed her 
scenes on Hollywood soundstages. This music is 
credited in the movie and in all of her recordings 
to Moises Vivanco. Any direct input into what she 
was supposed to perform was either not credited 
or put aside in favor of what worked for Vivanco or 
for the producers. 

Featuring Yma in the film was a clear strategy to 
make this movie more marketable. The central 
theme and the main musical performances are 
interpreted by Yma, and they already display the 
modifications made to her art to fit the exotica 
movement. Her music sounded nothing like in- 
digenous or mestizo traditional music of the Peru- 
vian Andes. In fact, it seems like the filmmakers 
did not want to record any of the real sounds made 
by the indigenous peoples when they entered the 


scenes with their ritual horns, music, or dance. 
Those sounds were dubbed with an orchestrat- 
ed mixture of Afro-Caribbean and other popular 
exotic sounds. The Indians were portrayed as an 
admiring crowd gathered around Yma Sumac, 
in accordance with exaggerations about the pur- 
ported deification of Yma by the Indians in her 
hometown. All this despite the fact that Yma and 
the Indians on site in Machu Picchu were filmed 
thousands of miles apart. 4 

While the movie was a great economic success 
for Paramount Studios, it was harshly criticized 
in Peru by highland artists and intellectuals, es- 
pecially those from Cuzco. While they recognized 
that Machu Picchu’s international exposure would 
benefit tourism, they were outraged at how the 
music distorted their heritage. After all, they had 
been trying for decades to perfect this art — to put 
it at the center of Peruvian national identity and 
win international repute. They argued that there 
was no need to insert faux-exotic pre-recorded 
music given the rich musical traditions available 
locally. The film’s portrayal of Yma increased the 
preexisting tensions between Peruvian folkloric 
artists on the one hand and Moises and Yma on 
the other. 

a©© 

In 1957, after a scandal involving an affair and a 
lawsuit, Yma divorced Vivanco and went back to 
Peru for a short visit. She had been hired to per- 
form by a North American Oil company in the 
northern coastal town of Talara. Coincidentally, 
my family had been relocated to Talara due to my 
father’s military career. My mother went to see her 
perform, but she did not approach her, thinking 
that Yma would not remember their childhood 
friendship. But Yma saw her and recognized her 
and they hugged. My mother told Yma that she 
had chosen Emperatriz (one of Yma’s middle 
names) for a middle name for her daughter. I was 
born in Talara three years after this encounter. My 
mother gave me, her youngest, the first name she 
shared with the star: Zoila. 

Yma Sumac would finally make the trip to Cuz- 
co and Machu Picchu in 1959 — the same year she 
re-married Moises. Yma and Vivanco, who were 
now U.S. citizens, along with their artistic troupe, 


98 


The Appendix Out Loud 


went to Peru fora tour that year. Their visit was 
mired in controversy. For years, Jose Maria 
Arguedas, a major government official in cul- 
tural affairs at the time, had harshly criticized 
the style and repertoire that Yma Sumac and 
Vivanco presented to the foreign public. The 
artists received a particularly hostile recep- 
tion in Arequipa where artists and intellectu- 
als like in Cuzco had also developed their own 
regional identity opposing Lima centralism. 
On their arrival in Arequipa, people “whistled 
and hooted rejection because with her state- 
ments this renegade Peruvian [Ima Sumac] 
had often made her countrymen look savage 
and primitive; she may be admired for her art, 
but her unworthy attitude as a Peruvian can 
never be forgiven.” 

Yma Sumac apparently did not have such a 
hostile reception in Cuzco, and the local press 
limited itself to reprinting articles or com- 
menting on the rejection shown elsewhere. 
According to a statement made to the press, 
Ima Sumac’s first visit to Cuzco was the result 
of her desire to “get acquainted with the his- 
torical Inca legacy of Cuzco expressed by its 
ruins as an homage to her former fatherland 
and as proof that, despite her new national- 
ity, she is still a ‘daughter of the sun’ and of 
Inca ancestry.” 


An Epilogue 

Yma Sumac’s career would take several turns 
in the U.S. and Europe before she passed away 
in 2008. By then she had sparked the fancy of 
many audiences, especially in the U.S., where 
a legend was created about her “really” being 
Amy Camus (her name spelled backwards), a 
bored housewife from Brooking and not an 
Inca princess/priestess. After her bittersweet 
visit in 1959, Yma did not go back to Peru 
much until the 1970s, when she had another 
difficult encounter with the Peruvian public, 
this time in her homeland of Cajamarca. She 
had divorced Vivanco for the second and last 
time in 1965 and this seems to have given 
her more freedom to spend time in her own 
country. Her visits in the 1970s were contro- 


versial owing to what the public perceived as 
her haughtiness and what she perceived as a 
lack of appreciation of her accomplishments. 

Her final visit was in 2006 when, thanks to a 
campaign run by a fan, she received a series of 
honors. She finally received a sincere recogni- 
tion in her own country after a long-standing 
tense relationship. At the time she seemed 
frail and did not carry out formal performanc- 
es. She did sing briefly with a Peruvian group 
on the train while on her way to visit Machu 
Picchu one last time. Needless to say, this be- 
lated recognition moved Sumac deeply. 5 

It was during this trip that she stopped by my 
mother’s house in Lima and during a very 
short visit she told her, “I want to hug you 
and give you a kiss like when we were girls.” 
Perhaps anticipating that it was going to be 
her last visit to Peru, Zoila Augusta wanted 
to retrace some of her important steps and 
see the dear friend from her youth. Many of 
us Peruvians, especially those of us from the 
highlands or of highland descent, believe 
that before departing for good, a person or 
his/her soul, needs to retrace the important 
steps that were taken during life. Yma Sumac 
had wanted to reconnect with Peru. In her fi- 
nal decades, Yma included more songs in her 
repertoire that had roots in Peruvian folklore 
(as is shown in the “Andean Lullaby” she sang 
in a 1991 television interview in Germany). 6 

Yma Sumac’s career embodied many of the 
contradictions that emerge when the inter- 
national desire to consume exoticism clashes 
with the realities of traditional or indigenous 
cultures. Yma was not allowed by her manag- 
er-husband and the recording and movie in- 
dustries to develop the art that led her to pop- 
ularity at home and in Latin America in the 
first place. It is hard to know how much she 
was complicit in the transformation of her art 
into the oddity that it became, but we know 
for sure that it was very important for her to 
be recognized back at home. It was fortunate 
that this desire was fulfilled at the very end of 
her life. 


July 2013 


99 


Notes 


i. Part of this story appeared in one of Peru’s 
main newspapers when Yma Sumac passed 
in 2008 (Variedades, El Peruana, November 10, 
2008, 3-4). 


Listen to Yma Sumac perform "Chuncho" (1953) at 
http://appendic.es/m/e 

3- 

Watch Yma Sumac perform "Ataypura" in Secret of 
the Incas (1954) at http://appendic.es/m/g 

4- 

Watch Yma Sumac perform "Pachamama" in Secret 
of the Incas (1954) at http://appendic.es/m/h 


5. This was signaled by a testimony that her 
biographer gathered and that stated that in 
any important appearances after this honor, 
she wanted to wear all six heavy medals that 
she had received in Peru (Limansky, 248). 

6 . 

Watch a 1991 interview with Yma Sumac on Ger- 
man television at http://appendic.es/m/d 


1 00 The Appendix Out Loud 


Benjamin Breen's illustration is based on a photo- 
graph of Tony Schwartz in the 1950s. 


“Nancy Grows Up,” the Media 
Age, and the Historian’s Craft 


Michael J. Schmidt 


The Challenge of “Nancy Grows Up” 

It begins with anxious crying. The plaintive sound 
only lasts a few moments before the screams drop 
into a slightly lower register and transform into 
a calm murmur. The sound repeats, then breaks 
into the rudiments of language. It sings — or 
tries — and falters. A man helps, playing a game 
with a familiar rhyme: “Jack and Jill went up the . . . 
to fetch a pail of... Jack fell down and broke his ... 
and Jill came tumbling ...” 

She fills in the appropriate words and, as she does, 
we suddenly meet her. 


For the remaining minute and forty-two seconds 
we hear and follow Nancy. We listen to her de- 
velopment as a person through a variety of situa- 
tions: she wishes her father a happy birthday, she 
lists what she wants for Christmas (“a puppy and 
a whistle and a horn and a hat and a dress and a 
ballerina costume”), she explains how to house- 
train a dog, and she expresses her feelings about 
the Russians sending the dog Laika into space. 
All the while Nancy’s voice grows increasingly dis- 
tinct, speaks longer, takes on and sheds accents, 
and uses increasingly sophisticated vocabulary. 
Finally, the recording ends, but it does so just as 
we witness what seems like a personal milestone. 


July 201 3 101 


Listen to "Nancy Grows Up" at http://appendic.es/m/o 


Nancy becomes silent just after we see the 
door open on her developing sexuality. In the 
last and longest of the voices, after updating 
us on what she has been doing at school, she 
sighs and confesses, “and I’ve been discover- 
ing boys.” 

Recorded over the course of the 1950s and 
the early 1960s, “Nancy Grows Up” gives us a 
beautiful and stimulating portrait of growth. 
It is an audio montage; Tony Schwartz, its 
creator, continuously taped his niece from 
her first month of life to the age of thirteen 
and, later, spliced together pieces chronolog- 
ically. Schwartz likened what he did to time- 
lapse photography: it condenses the story of 
thirteen years, as Schwartz said, in less than 
two and a half minutes.* 

“Nancy Grows Up” is more than a simple nov- 
elty piece. Poetic and expository, it reveals 
a type of storytelling that has an enigmatic 
intelligibility. Offering a biographical his- 
tory of development, “Nancy” narrates the 
phases and stages of a young girl’s early life. 
It does so quite successfully and evocatively 
and achieves a rich unspoken analysis in its 
juxtaposition of different voices, words, and 
timbre. 

Confronted with the possibilities of com- 
munication in “Nancy,” one can’t help but 
ask, “why have historians neglected sound?” 
Despite more than a century and a half of 
ongoing media revolutions, historians — es- 
pecially professional academic historians — 
have largely worked within a self-imposed 
textual ghetto. Why have historians restricted 
themselves to written histories? Why only the 
monograph and journal article after the ad- 
vent of the photo essay, the LP record, the ra- 
dio show, documentary film, and animation 
short? 


*The recording described above is on Schwartz's 1 970 record 
Sounds of Children. Another version of the recording includes a 
short introduction by Schwartz. 


fin his article "The Ambulatory Archive: Santa Muerte 
Tattoos as Historical Sources," appearning in The Appendix 
vol. 1, no. 1, Robinson Herrera argues that historians still 
"fetishize the word, particularly written documents housed in 
state archives." 

There do seem to be substantial reasons for 
why we have continued to rely almost exclu- 
sively on text. It is beyond the scope of this 
piece to attempt to give a comprehensive 
explanation of this phenomenon, but a few 
things come immediately to mind. Text’s ca- 
pacity to transmit large masses of informa- 
tion, for example, is attractive. The mono- 
graph and article also parallel and allow the 
exact reproduction of what has been most his- 
torians’ primary source: written documents. 
Furthermore, the footnote, the sine qua non 
of historical scholarship and the linguistic 
technology for and symbol of the discipline’s 
seriousness and rigor, appears almost inextri- 
cably grounded in the text.* 

Beginning to rethink the footnote outside 
the page only seemed possible recently. In- 
ternet-based publications have shown that 
digital footnotes can reference sources in 
more direct ways, offer more detail and in- 
formation, and, possibly, shift the function of 
the footnote altogether. The blog maintained 
by The Appendix, for example, uses hyperlink 
footnotes to immediately show the content of 
a source or acquaint the reader with informa- 
tion about an obscure person or organization. 

Text has served historians well, but it is useful 
to ask if we have missed whole modes of anal- 
ysis and presentation with such a consistently 
narrowrange ofmedia. How, for example, has 
the primacy of text and the page shaped how 
we understand and judge historical scholar- 
ship as a whole? Hayden White famously as- 
serted that historical interpretation is shaped 
by the plot structures of particular kinds of 
stories — the romance, the tragedy, the com- 
edy, and the satire — but we can go one step 
further: history as a discipline has also been 
fundamentally structured by its medium. The 
way we conceive of the work of history and, 


1 02 The Appendix Out Loud 


thus, the field in which history can be told 
and debated are intimately intertwined with 
and determined by the advantages and limita- 
tions of the written word. 

There is nothing essential linking history and 
text. Historians can and should embrace oth- 
er media in the production of history. Fortu- 
nately, there are considerable guideposts for 
a journey into new media; our neglect has not 
been for a lack of evidence of the unique and 
intriguing capabilities of other media. 

The use and exploration of sound and sound 
technology offer clear examples of this. “Nan- 
cy Grows Up” was not an isolated piece; it was 
part of a large, rich history of thinking about 
and through sound in the twentieth centu- 
ry. Even a brief account of sound technol- 
ogy shows that there is a considerable body 
of work in other media that historians could 
learn from and draw on. 

Looking at some of the ideas and practices 
surrounding “Nancy” illuminates some of the 
ways non-historians have sought to engage 
sound narrative and documentation. 


Telling with Sound: 

A Very Short History 

From the late 1920s until the early 1950s, 
American radio drama, comedies, and soap 
operas pioneered new ways of conveying sto- 
ries and ideas through voice and other audi- 
tory material. These shows worked out, in 
the words of radio scholar Susan Douglas, a 
mode of “story listening.” Although primar- 
ily a source of entertainment, Orson Welles’s 
1938 famous Mercury Theater production of 
War of the Worlds — and the consequent pan- 
ic that a Martian invasion was under way — 
demonstrates the immense power and effect 
that audio stories could wield. Welles’s abili- 
ty to create hysteria and horror in his listen- 
ers was a direct consequence of his “media 



The cover of Tony Schwartz's 1 959 LP, The New York Taxi Driver. 

Folkways Records 


sense” — his talent at adapting storytelling to 
his artistic vehicle. 

Across the pond, intellectuals quickly used 
the young technology as material for mod- 
ernist experimentation. During the late 1920s 
and early 1930s, German artists sought to cre- 
ate a radio-specific art form, i.e., an artistic 
genre that would reveal and marshal radio’s 
unique characteristics. The intriguing pos- 
sibilities of the ether attracted a number of 
artists from outside the musical or theatrical 
world; established writers like Alfred Doblin 
and future film directors like Max Ophuls 
and Billy Wilder produced Horbilder (literal- 
ly, listening pictures) and Horspiele (listening 
plays). In 1930, the avant-garde director Wal- 
ter Ruttmann produced the following: 

Listen to Walter Ruttmann's Wochenende (1930) at 
http://appendic.es/m/q 


A film soundtrack without the accompanying 
picture, Wochenende is the story of a weekend. 
Ruttmann had spent much of the previous 


July 201 3 103 




decade making “Absolute Film,” abstract 
films which attempted to capture the essen- 
tial qualities of the filmic medium. With Wo- 
chenende, he tried to do the same with sound. 
Working with new sound film technology, 
he isolated the soundtrack and built a narra- 
tive using a montage of noises, identifiable 
sounds, and speech-fragments. 

Germans were not the only Europeans play- 
ing with the open possibilities of radio form. 
Around the same time, Lance Sieveking at- 
tempted his own experiments in “wireless 
imagination” at the BBC and Italian Futurists 
like Fillipo Marinetti produced music and 
theater for fascist radio. 


The ether was not only used for fiction and 
modernist abstraction, however. Radio jour- 
nalists also produced documentary news pro- 
grams. By the late 1930s, broadcast journalism 
had supplanted newspapers for immediate 
news coverage in the United States, and most 
Americans on the home front experienced 
World War II on a day-to-day basis through 
listening. Radio journalism employed all 
sorts of sounds — location noises, sound ef- 
fects, monologues, and dialogues — in order 
to move audiences between “informational 
listening” (taking in facts) and “dimensional 
listening” (where, for example, “people were 
compelled to conjure up maps, topographies, 
street scenes in London after a bombing”). 


Others, like Paul Daharme, Sir Oliver Lodge, 
and Rudolf Arnheim, wrote and theorized 
about the possibilities of the disembodied 
auditory content of radio during the interwar 
period. For many, the ethereal and mysteri- 
ous qualities of radio could foster outlandish 
hopes and fantasies. Daharme and Lodge, 
for example, believed that the ether granted 
access to new psychological and metaphysi- 
cal spaces. Daharme, a French advertiser and 
experimental radio practitioner, believed 
that broadcasting could reach directly into 
the unconscious and radio works could pro- 
voke a psychoactive space in which individu- 
als would encounter their own theater of the 
mind. Lodge, a pioneer in radio technology 
and revered British scientist, argued that the 
ether comingled with the realm of the dead 
and that broadcasting could be used as a spir- 
itualist tool to communicate with lost love 
ones. 

Arnheim stayed a bit closer to the ground. 
Like Daharme and Lodge, however, he was 
also fascinated by radio’s ability to detach 
sound from image. After years thinking about 
images as a film critic, he wrote Radio: The Art 
of Sound. In it he pondered the power of iso- 
lated sounds and the audio-specific methods 
through which radio could tell stories. 


The liner notes to Tony Schwartz's New York 


After their introduction in 1948, long playing 
records provided new materials and resources 
to explore the story-telling and documentary 
capabilities of sound. In addition to being 
repeatable, LPs had a distinct advantage over 
radio: their multi-faceted presentation for- 
mat. Record producers and designers could 
use the non-aural parts of the LP — the label, 
cover, photos, and liner notes — to guide the 
listener’s perceptions and stoke their imag- 
ination. Ever the brilliant pioneer, Schwartz 
made a number of innovative narrative and 
representational experimental recordings for 
Folkway Records, including An Actual Story in 
Sound of a Dog’s Life, New York 19, Nueva York: 
A Tape Documentary of Puerto Rican New Yorkers, 
and The World in My Mailbox. 



1 04 The Appendix Out Loud 




“Nancy” was an intersection of techniques 
developed in radio and on LP. Originally pro- 
duced for Schwartz’s show Around New York 
on New York Public Radio, he reworked and 
released it more than once on record. First 
appearing as “History of a Voice” in 1962 on 
You’re Stepping on My Shadow: “Sound Stories” 
of NYC, he re-presented it as “Nancy” on Re- 
cords the Sounds 0/ Children in 1970. Although 
utilizing the same base recordings, they told 
their story a bit differently: “History” utilizes 
voice-over narration like a radio news piece 
while “Nancy” edits together sounds in a way 
similar to Ruttmann. Both were packaged 
with a cover and notes. 

During the period that Schwartz released 
“History” and “Nancy,” other LP projects ap- 
proached history more directly. In the early 
1960s, for example, Time-Life released The 
Sounds of History, a twelve-volume set of re- 
cords that intertwined short explanations 
of events, readings of documents and liter- 
ature, recordings, and contemporary music 
to evoke sonic portraits of important eras in 
the history of the United States. Later in the 
decade, torch singer and Batman star Eartha 
Kitt helped record narrative biographies of 
important African Americans in the two-vol- 
ume set Black Pioneers in American History. 

The largest engagement with telling history 
on records during the period occurred, not 
surprisingly, in the sphere of music. Some 
did it within music itself — ambitious albums 
like Duke Ellington’s Black, Brown, and Beige 
or the Kinks’ Arthur (Or the Rise and Fall of the 
British Empire) attempt to paint large historical 
shifts through suite-like musical assemblag- 
es. Others used records to present the history 
of music through documents; record compa- 
nies, for example, offered overviews of musi- 
cal genres by collecting together and chrono- 
logically ordering recordings. These projects 
could become quite ambitious — the most 
cursory and expansive collection of this sort, 
the 1962 record collection 2,000 Years of Music, 
tried to capture “a concise history of the de- 
velopment of music from the earliest times 
through the 18th century” on four LP sides. 



The cover of An Actual Story in Sound of a Dog's Life, 1958. 

Folkways Records 


“Nancy” and the 
New Work of History 

This is a just sketch, but it gives us a sense of 
the wide range of work that has been done 
exploring the narrative and communication 
possibilities of sound technology before the 
digital age. They demonstrate the ample re- 
sources and precedents to which historians 
might turn and build on if we wished to ex- 
pand beyond paper and the PDF. Despite this 
extensive engagement with sound as a nar- 
rative medium, however, these experiments 
and treatises have largely taken place outside 
the historical discipline. Sound creators and 
thinkers have remained outliers and outsid- 
ers. 

This non-engagement with sound seems 
surprising, given the significant place that 
speech plays in the profession. Historians 
have taught through lectures for centuries, 
and conference presentations have become 
an expected part of membership in the pro- 
fession. These forms of audio scholarship 
have not been engaged as ‘works’ of history, 
however, unless published in journals or in 
edited volumes. It is quite possible that uni- 
versities’ insistence on written scholarship 
as the litmus test for academic success has 


July 201 3 105 



played a crucial role in the centrality of the text 
within history. 

But what might sonic forms of historical schol- 
arship look and sound like? How can historians 
marshal these forms to tell history? This question 
remains largely unanswered at the moment, and 
this openness is full of exciting possibilities. 

Listening to “Nancy” once again in another con- 
text may give us some hints, however. Let’s listen 
to the final segment of it, along with something a 
little more: 

Listen to the Radiolab episode "Time" at 
http://appendic.es/rn/ r 

In 2007, “Nancy” was used in its entirety in the 
Radiolab episode “Time.” Radiolab and other public 
radio programs like This American Life have built on 
the foundations of sonic thinking and experimen- 
tation outlined above and embodied by Schwartz 
and “Nancy.” These programs remain most Amer- 
icans’ contact (if they have any at all) with the 
legacy and form of these sonic experiments. Al- 
though it is not strictly concerned with history, 
Radiolab consistently employs sophisticated ideas, 
arguments, and narratives from current historical 
scholarship. The discussion of time employed as 
part of their discussion of “Nancy,” for example, 
is indebted to cultural histories of the standard- 
ization of time like Wolfgang Schivelbusch’s The 
Railmayjourney. 

Radio and sound recordings are not the only 
vehicles that we historians have excluded. The 
other media that seem most obvious for us to 
embrace — television and film — have also been 
pushed beyond the disciplinary pale. Ken Burns’s 
documentaries and the History Channel, for ex- 
ample, are seldom considered part of the scholarly 
conversation and are often seen as non-specialist 
intrusions into “serious history,” despite their for- 
mative impact on the popular imagination of the 
past. Incursions by historians into other types of 
media — like the film version of Natalie Zemon Da- 
vis’s The Return of Martin Guerre or Niall Ferguson’s 
multi-episode version of The Ascent of Money — have 
been relatively rare and are often conducted or 
spearheaded by people not considered part of the 
scholarly community. 


The main point is not that all historians need to 
begin making sound documentaries, but that 
there are rich resources outside the text that 
we have neglected. Sound recording is but one 
device. Indeed, my own experience within the 
classroom has demonstrated that historians are 
increasingly moving towards multi-media pre- 
sentations within teaching — using music on You- 
tube, photographs, blogs, and film footage — both 
to expand the range of sources and to try to en- 
gage students through the media that are the most 
familiar to them. Scholarship should follow suit. 
The increasing move towards the digitalization of 
academic work — as PDFs or online books — is an 
incredible opportunity to begin to rethink the his- 
torical work. At the same time, it could allow us to 
dialogue with audiences that are receptive to Errol 
Morris’s documentaries and podcasts of Fresh Air 
but who find academic monographs tedious or 
difficult to approach. 

If we accept Walter Benjamin’s argument that 
perception and communication are historical 
and formed by their social and technological con- 
texts, then historians are lagging behind. Creat- 
ing scholarship has long required that historians 
learn the art of writing; there is no reason that the 
historian’s craft could not begin to include a flu- 
ency in other technologies and media. If, as histo- 
rians, we took such a turn, we could open up new 
horizons for historical scholarship and begin to 
speak a language more attuned to a larger public. 


Editor’s Note: 

For a related exploration of ‘sonic forms of his- 
torical scholarship’ see Amber Abbas’s “For the 
Sound of Her Voice” on page 13 of this issue. 


1 06 The Appendix Out Loud 



Rules of the Tribe: 
Hardcore Punks and 
Hair Metal in the 1980s 

Chris A. Smith 


The chant began less than two minutes into the 
first song. An undercurrent at first, just a few 
hecklers. But it got louder with repetition, each 
wave building on the last. Soon the chant threat- 
ened to drown out the band itself. 

“Fuck you! Fuck you! Fuck you!” 

It was tough to take. But it was entirely in keeping 
with everything else about this disastrous tour. 
The angry crowd in Long Beach. The broken-down 
van in the Sonoran desert. Sixteen tickets sold 
in Portland. Now, onstage in San Francisco, the 
members of Discharge — the fastest, meanest, 
most uncompromising English hardcore punk 
band of the 1980s — must have wished they were 
somewhere, anywhere else. 

It was quite a comedown. On the band’s previ- 
ous North American tour, in 1983, Discharge had 
played sold-out shows to thousands. Up-and- 
coming thrash metal bands Metallica and Slayer, 


We suggest this recording of the ill-fated 1 986 San 
Francisco show as a soundtrack while you read. You can 
listen at http://appendic.es/m/l 


both of whom would be headlining arenas soon, 
cited the group as a prime influence. Iconic punk 
fanzines like Flipside, which could make or break 
reputations, pronounced them “fucking great.” 

But it was 1986, and a new era was dawning in 
underground music. Punk’s energy was waning, 
and metal was on the rise. Many punk bands were 
moving toward a more metallic sound, melding 
their radical politics and D.I.Y. approach with 
metal’s musical chops and low-end heft. For some 
bands the transition went off without a hitch. For 
others, though, it was akin to choosing sides in a 
civil war. Discharge, one of the most influential 
bands in punk history, chose wrong. 


July 201 3 107 







» Ng&TjH 



IK/ ...fflfisM 

grf^f A 

Ir ^ 

pw jpf ' - 

d Y 



Back in San Francisco, the band skidded to a 
halt twelve minutes into the set. The singer, 
Cal, attempted a bit of bravado to counter the 
booing: “I love it when you talk dirty!” 

Nobody in the audience was fooled. Out be- 
yond the stage, the crowd was a roiling sea 
of leather-jacketed anger, a mosaic of jeering 
faces and raised middle fingers. San Fran- 
cisco, like every other city in America, hated 
Discharge. 

©a® 

At first, Discharge didn’t stand out from the 
legions of punk bands that sprang up in the 
wake of the Sex Pistols’ incendiary 1977 de- 
but. Indeed, the group’s first demos are filled 
with Pistols-esque songs of non-specific re- 
bellion. The recordings sound like the work 
of bored teenagers, which is exactly what they 
were. The band members, working-class kids 
from the provincial town of Stoke-on-Trent, 
had a good idea of what their futures held — a 
succession of crappy jobs or a life on the dole, 
punctuated, perhaps, by nuclear annihila- 
tion. Punk offered an outlet. 

The first wave of punk burnt out quickly. By 
1980 Sid Vicious was gone and the Clash was 
branching out into reggae. Punk, the media 
declared, was dead. The guys in Discharge 
felt betrayed by their heroes, as this 1980 in- 
terview with the fanzine Grinding Halt demon- 
strates: 

G.H.: What do you think of all the original 
punk groups now then? 

Cal: There’s none left now, they’ve all either 
sold out or split up, there’s only a few bands 
left now who’re any good. 

Rainy: They were good then, but now they’re 
shit... 

Abandoning its Pistols-worship, Discharge 
began forging its own path. In the process, as 
Ian Glasper recounts in his history of English 
punk, Burning Britain, the band helped kick off 


punk’s second wave. 

Musically, punk’s first wave hadn’t been all 
that far removed from regular rock’n’roll. 
“God Save the Queen,” with its hummable 
melody and simplistic chord changes, is 
clearly a relation, albeit distant, of Chuck Ber- 
ry and the Rolling Stones. The difference is 
in the attitude, in Johnny Rotten’s adenoidal 
snarl. 

Discharge’s revamped version of punk bore 
little resemblance to anything that had come 
before. It was faster, harsher, and often al- 
most entirely lacking in melody. The riffs were 
generally three-chord affairs, but they were 
played at warp speed, accompanied by a rum- 
bling bass and a merciless, galloping drum- 
beat. The songs rarely topped the two-minute 
mark. As Garry Maloney, who drummed on 
some of the band’s best recordings, explained 
to a ‘zine called Trakmarx, “We just embraced 
speed — the concept — not the drug — took it 
to its logical limit.”* 

The vocals, meanwhile, weren’t anything like 
Johnny Rotten’s. Cal’s hoarse barking just 
sounded angry. His lyrics, anarchist jeremi- 
ads against government oppression and nu- 
clear war, were like nihilist haikus, delivered 
without metaphor, nuance, or humor. Here’s 
the entirety of “Is This To Be,” from the band’s 
seminal 1981 EP, Why: 

Scorched earth is all that’s left 
Where trees and flowers once grew 
A trail of destruction 
Death and destruction 

Nothing left but wasteland 
Littered with human flesh and bone 
A trail of destruction 
Death and destruction 

Soon, as Glasper notes, Discharge was top- 
ping the UK’s independent charts and making 
waves across the globe. Even reviewers who 

*The band casts a long shadow over heavy music, but 
historical documentation is surprisingly sparse online. 
Much of what there is can be found on this lovingly curat- 
ed site: http://discharge.yolasite.com 


July 201 3 109 


*1 grew up loving punk and metal in suburban Detroit in the 1980s, and 
I sang in a hardcore band. We generally played as fast as possible, and 
everything we did tended toward entropy. Most of our songs collapsed 
in on themselves in the end, as people cursed and pounded on walls and 
threw things across the room. 

Mostly we played our own juvenile compositions, but we also covered 
Black Flag's "Gimme Gimme Gimme." Our version wasn't any good, but it 
seemed conceivable that if we practiced enough, it could be one day. The 
song had plenty of breathing room, gaps between notes and beats. It was 
approachable. I loved Discharge, but it never occurred to me to suggest 
playing any of its songs. Discharge was monolithic, too dense and dark, 
somehow, for our half-assed homage. 


fThe music video for RATT's "Round and Round," in which the band ruins 
a stuffy black-tie dinner, encapsulates the essentials of the era. (Watch the 
video at http://appendic.es/m/7.) 

We begin at the dinner, with a collection of country-club types daintily 
sipping white wine. (Weirdly, the late comedian Milton Berle plays two of 
these roles: lord of the manor and, dressed in drag, his wife. Berle's neph- 
ew was RATT's manager.) The band sneaks past the window and begins to 
play, loudly, in the attic. 

Vocalist Stephen Pearcy, decked out in tights, a black headband, and 
proto-Uggs, does lazy scissor-kicks and plays air-guitar, while drummer 
Bobby Blotzer twirls his sticks. Guitarists Warren DeMartini and Robbin 
Crosby sway in choreographed motion. Plaster falls from the ceiling into 
wine glasses. The guests make faces of uptight displeasure. The gothy-look- 
ing daughter— who, we begin to suspect, is wilder than she seems— goes 
upstairs to investigate. 

When the solo comes around, DeMartini crashes through the floor and 
lands on the table, to the horror of the assembled guests. We rejoin the 
daughter as she slinks up the stairs to the attic, shedding her conservative 
clothes and tiara along the way. By the time she reaches the top, she is 
utterly transformed: a vaguely punk-looking model in a ripped silver mini- 
dress. As the song fades out, she begins to dance for the band. 


hated the music couldn’t help but admire the 
band’s uncompromising attack. “I certainly 
never wish to listen to this record again when 
I’ve completed this review,” a critic wrote in 
Sounds magazine. “And yet Discharge are the 
very best of their kind. Their energy, as we 
used to say in ’77, is amazing.”* 

A short video shot in Toronto in 1983 captures 
the band’s live show in its heyday. Cal, sport- 
ing a soaped-up mohawk, stalks the stage like 
an apex predator, swinging the microphone 
and hanging over the stage’s edge to bait the 
crowd. His neck veins bulge as he screams. 
Pooch, the guitarist, and Rainy, the bassist, 
stand stock-still to either side of Cal, spike- 
haired golems, while the strobes flash behind 
them. Garry anchors the attack, pounding 
out a racing, relentless drumbeat. The cam- 
era cuts frequently to the crowd, which in its 
writhing resembles a human storm pattern. 

At this point in its career, Discharge was hard- 
core royalty, the keeper of punk’s true flame. 

It was a dangerous place to be. 


©00 


When Discharge returned to North Amer- 
ica three years later, in the summer of 1986, 
a new trend was sweeping the music world. 
All of the heat and light was focused on the 
Sunset Strip, in Los Angeles, on glam metal 
bands like Poison and Dokken. “Cock-rock” 
(as detractors termed it) was rock’s worst 
excesses made audible — spandex-clad and 
empty-headed, interested solely in partying 
and getting laid. But it was catnip to record 
label executives and ubiquitous on MTV. Un- 
derground groups of all stripes hopped on the 
AquaNet and cocaine bandwagon. 1 

Glam metal was the antithesis of everything 
Discharge stood for. Bizarrely, though, Dis- 
charge had gone glam, too. Its new album, 
Grave New World, abandoned the brutal min- 
imalism that had defined the band’s sound. 
The new stuff was twice as long, with hooks 


1 1 0 The Appendix Out Loud 



Discharge in their glam metal phase. 

Discharge, Grave New World (1986) 


that sounded like Aerosmith outtakes and 
guitar solos best measured in geologic time. 
The lyrics remained substantive, tackling is- 
sues like drug addiction. Unfortunately, Cal 
delivered them in a nearly unlistenable wail, 
grasping at notes he couldn’t quite hit. 

Moreover, the band had a new, markedly un- 
punk look: bird’s-nest hairdos, dangly ear- 
rings, mascara. The band photo on the album 
said it all: the anarcho-punks had become 
poodles with shiny, well-conditioned coats. 

Reviews were unkind, to say the least. The 
punk website Kill From the Heart summed it 
up, declaring the album “a sad testament to 
fucked priorities and bad judgment.” 

Nowadays, punk and metal bleed into one an- 
other to such an extent that there’s often no 
practical difference between the two. Punks 
are still less likely to have hair and more likely 


to play fast instead of slow, but that’s about 
it. Within a few years the genres would hardly 
matter. 

But in the mid-1980s the two sides were just 
beginning to feel each other out, and there 
was plenty of tribal animosity — think cats 
and dogs, skiers and snowboarders. For 
punks, purity was all. The Oakland band 
Neurosis was banned from Berkeley’s Gilman 
Street punk club when it began playing more 
slowly and using keyboards. 

A 1986 column for MaximumRockNRoll, the in- 
ternational punk bible, illustrates the doctri- 
naire punk view. “What is just so dangerous 
about metal?” an English crust-punk wrote in 
a scene update. “Well, I can’t say I come into a 
great deal of contact with it, but on the occa- 
sions I have (not looking for faults), I’ve been 
amazed, even disgusted, at what I’ve found.” 
Don’t be fooled by the sonic similarities, he 


July 201 3 111 



warned. Metal is reactionary stuff, and best avoid- 
ed altogether: “Approach with caution and not 
glassy eyes.” 

It was a losing battle. Even then a new scene was 
taking root, composed of bands that combined 
punk’s politics and attitude with the complexity 
and weight of metal. It was a seamless process for 
bands like C.O.C. and Cro-Mags, both of whom 
were rooted in hardcore culture but had a metallic 
sound, using slower tempos and chunky-sound- 
ing guitars. 

Few bands, however, overhauled both their sound 
and look as significantly as Discharge did. Fewer 
still modeled that overhaul on Motley Criie. 

00© 

By the time Discharge’s van rolled into San Fran- 
cisco, the band had been on the road for weeks. 
The first show, in New York City, set the tone for 
the whole tour. As Jim MacNaughton, a 46-year- 
PublicCollector old New York scene veteran, remembers it, angry 

punks bought cans of Budweiser from the bar and 
hurled them, unopened, at the band. Another in- 
dignity followed: the singer of another legendary 
hardcore band, the Bad Brains, allegedly climbed 
into the balcony lugging a garbage can full of wa- 
ter then dumped it onto Discharge’s heads. 


*Most of my description of the Farm comes from Wilson, but I also 
used Gimme Something Better, an oral history of Bay Area punk by 
Jack Boulware and Silke Tudor. 


In San Francisco, the band was slated to play the 
Farm, a cavernous warehouse wedged between 
looping freeways in a rundown, industrial part of 
the city. It was a punk club, a chaotic place where 
punks and skinheads and metalheads regularly 
fought each other, along with the Latino gangs 
that held sway over the neighborhood.* 


That night a crowd of a thousand, most of them 
punks, had packed into the club. There’s no video 
of the show, but thanks to Nate Wilson, the propri- 
etor of a blog named True Punk & Metal, we have a 
complete audio record. The then twenty-year-old 
metalhead taped it on a Walkman, perched on a 
bench near the soundboard. 


Word traveled slowly back then, mostly via ‘zines, 
so many people didn’t know about the band’s 
transformation. It was obvious, though, as soon 
as Discharge took the stage: tight leather, span- 


112 


The Appendix Out Loud 




dex shirts, pouffed-up hair. According to Wilson, 
a surge of disgust ran through the crowd. “We all 
just went, ‘Ugh — they look like posers.’” 

Discharge kicked things off with a new song. With 
the benefit of perspective, it’s not that terrible of 
a song. Cal’s caterwauling voice remains a tough 
sell, but the band sounds vital, and the rhythm 
section swings with an appealing looseness. It’s 
sinuous and a bit sleazy, more like Guns N’ Ros- 
es’ sidewinding “Mr. Brownstone,” which would 
be released the following year, than the plodding 
hair-metal epics of the day. 

But on this stage, in front of this crowd, it was 
heresy. Worse, Cal had adopted some new, suspi- 
ciously rock star-ish moves, high-stepping around 
the stage, wagging his finger like Mick Jagger. Wil- 
son says, “He looked like a less athletic David Lee 
Roth.” 

On the tape, you can hear the first boo a mere 33 
seconds into the song. The “Fuck Yous” took over 
shortly thereafter. They rolled through the crowd, 
petering out for a minute then returning even 
louder the next. 

The end of the second song, nearly eight minutes 
in, elicited a weak cheer, a few claps, and a robust 
chant of “D.R.I.” — a local thrash band on the rise, 
which had played earlier that night.* 

That might be when people began throwing gar- 
bage, a steady rain of beer cans and anything else 
that wasn’t nailed down. Discharge stubbornly 
kept playing. 

Five minutes later, following an audible 
“smack” — a beer can hit its mark, perhaps — the 
guitarist stopped playing. The rhythm section 
continued for ten more seconds, then the whole 
thing fell apart. The band walked off the stage, to 
the loudest crowd roar of the night. 

For the next fifteen minutes, a succession of 
Farm staffers and scene guys harangued the 
crowd. “Man, you guys are a bunch of fucking 
closed-minded idiots!” one yelled. 

But still the booing. 



Original tape recording for the 1 986 concert, which you can 
hear through the embedded audio in the beggining of this 
article. 

True Punk and Metal 



Poster for Discharge's ill fated 1 986 show. 

True Punk and Metal 


*Wilson, who knew D.R.I. (Dirty Rotten Imbeciles) from the San 
Francisco scene, says that members of the band carried a trash can to 
the front of the stage and threw garbage at Discharge while it played. 
In a comment posted on Wilson's blog, D.R.I.'s guitarist Spike denied 
that he had anything to do with it. His wording, however, didn't rule 
out the involvement of other members of D.R.I. 

July 201 3 113 



Finally, after two-thirds of the audience had left, 
Discharge reemerged. “Everyone settled down 
now?” Cal asked. 

Alas, no. They made it through two more songs. 
The hail of garbage never ceased. 

When Discharge left the stage for the second and 
final time, it had played a total of nineteen min- 
utes. Wilson says that Cal was crying. 

©s© 

There’s something admirable — and also a little 
nuts — about the band’s perseverance. Others 
might have packed it in after the first few shows, 
but Discharge soldiered on, facing the abuse each 
night. Maybe some concerts went well, and fans 
loved the band’s glammy turn. If so, there’s no re- 
cord of it. 

A video shot in Winnipeg near the end of the tour, 
the week after San Francisco, offers a glimpse of 
how Discharge was holding up. Garry, the drum- 
mer, and guitarist Stephen “Fish” Brooks submit- 
ted to a pre-show interview with a couple of so- 
licitous Canadian punks. Cal, who probably bore 
the brunt of the loathing, was nowhere to be seen. 
Fish, who has ratted-up yellow hair and ripped 
jeans, drinks beer, drags luxuriantly on a ciga- 
rette, and talks about groupies. He appears un- 
fazed by the hostility. Garry, who wears his hair 
in a sleek ponytail and considers each question 
seriously, wants to explain it all — not just to his 
interviewers but, I’d guess, to himself. 

Watch the first part of the Winnipeg interview at 
http://appendic.es/m/2 

Watch the second part of the Winnipeg interview at 
http://appendic.es/m/3 

He begins in a defensive crouch. The band’s new 
sound, he insists, is just an extension of the old, 
and the only difference is that they’re better mu- 
sicians now. The interview moves on to other 
topics, but Garry returns to the subject, trying to 
scratch an itch he can’t reach. “We got out expect- 
ing all the people who used to come see us before, 
maybe to have changed as well, like the natural 
progression that we had,” he says. “But instead we 


had nothing but trouble at the shows.” 

Many fans, he laments, expect the band to keep 
playing the same old songs. “We do a few early 
tracks still,” he says, frustration in his voice. “But, 
ah, it wasn’t enough.” 

Garry seems wounded, and genuinely puzzled, by 
the unfairness of it all. And he’s right. You can’t 
preserve a sound — or a scene, for that matter — in 
amber. But those were the ironclad ways of the un- 
derground. As MacNaughton, the New York scene 
veteran, says, “It’s about the unwritten rules of the 
tribe. You don’t change.” 

000 

The band broke up after the tour. Cal, still follow- 
ing his hard -rock muse, assembled a new lineup in 
1990 and put out two more albums that are almost 
as reviled as Grave New World. During this time the 
band appears to have played a lot in Japan, the last 
refuge of fading rock stars. There’s plenty from 
this period to disturb purists: a 1991 concert vid- 
eo, for instance, shows a shirtless Cal crawling 
through his guitarist’s legs during a song. 

It wasn’t until 2002 that a quorum of original band 
members regrouped to make a record. (A version 
of the band is active today, but didn’t respond to 
emailed requests for comment.) Titled simply 
Discharge, it was the closest thing to the band’s 
“classic” era since 1983: the songs were short and 
punishing, and Cal didn’t try to sing. Discharge 
had finally come home. 

Even through the darkest days, though, Dis- 
charge’s legacy was growing. Indeed, it set a tem- 
plate for generations of heavy musicians to come. 
Big-name metal bands like Metallica, Sepultura, 
and Slayer have been tireless proselytizers, cover- 
ing Discharge songs and introducing their punk 
heroes to legions of young listeners. 

More importantly, the band’s galloping drumbeat 
spawned its own hardcore subgenre, “D-Beat.” In 
the years after Discharge’s ascension, thousands 
of bands from Brazil to Japan adopted not only 
that drum beat but, in some cases, Discharge’s 
minimalist aesthetic, right down to the black-and- 
white graphics and the font of the band’s logo. Ev- 


1 1 4 The Appendix Out Loud 


ery big punk band has imitators. Nobody else 
has a subgenre.* 

A few years ago, the Swedish band Dissober 
gave “Grave New World” the proper D-Beat 
treatment. Half the length and twice the 
speed of the original, this take is a short, 
sharp, circa-1982 shock. As one YouTube 
commenter put it, “This is what this song 
should’ve sounded like.” 


000 


On a wet night last November, I went to a 
punk and metal show at a squat in West Oak- 
land. Black-garbed people smoked cigarettes 
and swigged PBR in the courtyard, huddled 
against the elements. The performance room 
was damp, moist from rain and body heat 
but still cold, somehow. A couple of muddy 
dogs chased a rubber ball through the crowd, 
ducking under legs and skidding into walls. 

A local D-Beat band named Old Crow be- 
gan tuning up. After a blast of feedback, the 
guitarist looked up from his Flying-V. “You 
should get the dogs out,” he told the crowd. 
“We’re really loud. It might hurt their ears.” 


*AII D-Beat might sound the same to the uninitiated, but Discharge's heirs 
come in many different flavors. In addition to the sonic and graphic mimic- 
ry, many D-Beat bands have named themselves by adding the prefix "Dis" 
to an astonishing variety of words— a sort of hardcore Mad Libs. Some, 
such as Disrupt, actually make sense. Others, like Disrape, are utterly non- 
sensical and probably tongue-in-cheek. See the videos in this paragraph 
for some examples. 


The fever hit earliest and biggest in Sweden, with 
hundreds of bands taking up the D-Beat mantle. Anti 
Cimex was one of the first and best. Though deriv- 
ative, its sound packs a wallop, and is influential in 
its own right. 


Watch the video at http://appendic.es/m/4 


He wasn’t exaggerating. The drummer set 
off with a loping D-Beat. The guitar joined 
in with a series of chugging barre chords. By 
the time the vocalist — hirsute, extravagantly 
tattooed, cargo-shorted — began shouting, a 
small pit had formed in front of the band. The 
sound hit me in my solar plexus, just the way 
it was supposed to. 

I surveyed the room. There were crust punks 
in black hoodies and vests, metal dudes with 
long hair and flannel, hipsters with messen- 
ger bags draped over their shoulders. Lots of 
people wore beat-up jackets covered with the 
patches of their favorite bands. 


Disfear, also from Sweden, holds down the rock-ori- 
ented end of D-Beat. Listen to the chorus: slow it 
down and take away the screaming, and you've got 
a rock'n'roll song. 

Watch the video at http://appendic.es/m/5 

Besides Sweden, Japan might have the greatest 
concentration of D-Beat bands. Combining the 
Discharge sound with Japanese hardcore's predilec- 
tion for noisiness, D-Clone follows the thread to its 
logical endpoint— faster, uglier, and ultimately more 
feral than the masters themselves ever contemplated. 

Watch the video at http://appendic.es/m/6 


On the back of one, written in that iconic, 
sloping white script, was a familiar name: 
“Discharge.” 


July 201 3 115 


Curcu\ionidae: Scolytinae. 

A Parasitology of Sound 

Veit Erlmann 


The following text is an example of the kind of entry I mould 
like to include in a Bestiary of Sound that I am currently 
working on. The idea of the book comes from medieual and 
early modern bestiaries, many of which contain descrip- 
tions of the most/antastic, neuer-seen or not-yet seen crea- 
tures. Ojten lavishly illustrated, these marks appealed to 
early modern readers’ sense of the marvelous, but they also 
encouraged them to do something profoundly modern: to 
take risks in the pursuit of the unknown. My own bestiary 
is a similar attempt to establish the most unlikely of con- 
nections between organisms, things, and sounds in hopes 
of thinking about the world in novel mays. Like the entry 
on the bark beetle belom, all entries are structured around 
the idea that in order to represent sound as a cultural form, 
me must evoke more than an acoustic uersion of established 
master narratiues. 

0©0 


he notion that seemingly simple 
acoustic phenomena — the sound of 
a voice, a chord — might be useful in 
clarifying otherwise obscure matters 
is among humankind’s oldest. From a divine ut- 
terance that brings the world into existence in the 
Judeo-Christian tradition or the cosmology of the 
West African Dogon to the vibrating membranes 
of string theory — the universe is made of sound. 

Yet sound can also function in a very different 
kind of epistemology, one that resists the urge to 
explain complexity by tracing it to a first cause, as 
in Laplacean physics, Cartesian rationalism, or 
Kantian idealism. An example of this is the en- 
tomological study of climate change: the study 
of how the environment is shaped not by humans 
but by beings like the small insects of the Curcu- 
lionid ae: Scolytinae species, commonly known as 
bark beetles. 




A high resolution photograph of a bark beetle. 

Vitezslav Manak, via Wikimedia Commons 


Bark beetles have long been 
suspected of posing the sin- 
gle most daunting threat 
to the boreal forests of 
North America and Siberia. 
Researchers also know that 
much of the massive spread of 
these humble creatures is due 
to climatic factors. 

^ Pro- 
longed 
periods of 
drought caused by 
global warming render 
these forests suscepti- 
ble to infestation. The 
ensuing deforestation in 
turn releases enormous 
amounts of CO2, which had 
been previously sequestered 
by healthy trees. This, in turn, 
increases the greenhouse ef- 
fect, which creates favorable 


conditions for rapidly growing populations of in- 
sects, which infest more trees, which .... A per- 
fect feedback loop that composer David Dunn and 
theoretical physicist James P. Crutchfield picture 
thus: 

Solar 
Energy 



Yet feedback loops are more than self-reproduc- 
ing systems. They tell us two things: first, new 
patterns of behavior are not owed to the actions 
of single agents as much as they emerge from the 
interaction of several actors. Second, complex in- 
teractions such as the bark beetle-climate change 
loop are inherently unstable and unpredictable. 
Under normal conditions they may ensure the sta- 
bility of ecosystems. But by the same token such 
loops may also lead to situations in which even 
small causes may have catastrophic effects. 

There have been numerous attempts to upset the 
loop and to bring beetle infestation under control 
through pesticides and pheromone traps. So far 
these initiatives have met only with partial success. 
Yet more effective strategies against deforestation 
and resulting climate change may soon become 
available. The bark beetle, Crutchfield and Dunn 
argue, possesses remarkable bio-acoustic capabil- 
ities that might contain the secret to combatting 
beetle infestation. Some varieties of bark beetles, 
such as the North American pinyon ips (Ips confu- 
sus), are equipped with a sound-producing organ 
located at the back of the insect’s head and that 
is activated by means of a plectrum on the under- 
side of the prothorax. While we may reasonably 
assume that the beetles use the clicks they pro- 
duce in this manner in order to coordinate attacks 
on trees, their bio-acoustics are part of a far more 
complex feedback loop. With the help of specially 
designed “microphones” that are inserted into the 
trees, Crutchfield and Dunn found that decaying 
cells of dying trees produce acoustic emissions in 


the ultrasonic spectrum. Bark beetles, they specu- 
late, might “hear” these sounds and decode them 
as meaning “food.” 

If there is any merit to this hypothesis — and it is 
a hypothesis after all — our feedback loop would 
have to be expanded by more than an additional 
acoustic factor. Since communication systems 
only function within a frequency range that par- 
ticipating organisms can produce and perceive, 
the social system of bark beetles could be far more 
complicated than is generally assumed. Combat- 
ting climate change thus requires more than mor- 
al appeals or more efficient technologies. We need 
a new thinking about the boundary between man 
and animal. Who we are and what binds us to all 
the other creatures of the planet is no longer part 
of an overarching discourse in which animals al- 
ways figure subservient to Homo sapiens. 

The bark beetle may have yet another lesson in 
store. Sound and music may no longer be sub- 
sumed under conventional discourses of truth 
based in only one field of knowledge. As a para- 
site, the bark beetle reminds us that a new mode 
of inquiry is required to think about people, ani- 
mals, or music in times of global climate change: 
a parasitology of culture perhaps. Western phi- 
losophy’s desire for certainty, for the most part, 
entailed the identification and suppression of the 
parasite, the troublemaker, and of noise; the bark 
beetle allows no such easy classifications. For who 
is the parasite here? The tree? Man? Or the beetle? 

Lafontaine’s fable of the town mouse and the 
country mouse comes to mind here — and Michel 
Serres’s The Parasite along with it. In the book, the 
thinker of mingled bodies wonders what happens 
to relationships of dual exchange when the para- 
site enters the equation. The parasite is not a new 
being, it is the complete blurring of boundaries 
between entities: between host and guest, subject 
and object, cause and effect. 

But also those boundaries between artist and 
work. The artist is a parasite of his own work that 
in turn feeds on him. We do not speak a language; 
language speaks us, as David Dunn’s extensive 
oeuvre shows. The San Diego-born composer has 
been active in sound art from as early as the 1970s. 
But in contrast to the appropriation of natural 



July 201 3 117 



Sonograms of beetle chirps recorded by David Dunn for his field recording The Sound of Light in Trees. 

David Dunn 


sounds in experimental music and sound art, 
Dunn sees his works as a re-contextualiza- 
tion of such sounds. In The Sound of Light in 
Trees, for instance, he correlates the acoustic 
“signature” of specific tree regions, the densi- 
ty of beetle infestation, the life cycles of trees 
and the condition of their phloem layers. 
Music thus becomes a strategy among others 
to preserve forms of communication akin to 
human language. As such, it shares certain 
features with the communicative forms of 
other species. Intelligence is not the exclusive 
feature of a single species, but an emergent 
quality of larger ecosystems comprising many 
species. In short, music and natural sounds 
are part of a feedback loop. 

The equivalent of this microcosm of rustling 
leaves, wind, and beeping beetles is a tranquil, 
almost brittle “soundscape” whose charms do 
not become immediately apparent. We strug- 
gle to break through the sharp line at the heart 
of what we call music and that separates the 
animal-like, inhuman from the human. The 
point, according to Dunn, is not to double 
nature musically, as in most post-Aristotelian 


aesthetic thought, but to grasp the acoustic 
interdependence of nature and human sonic 
labor as part of processes that resist unambig- 
uous attributions of sound to one or another 
ontology — of Man, music or nature. The dif- 
ference between humans and animals is as 
much due to the violence we do to the latter 
as the differentiation between natures sounds 
and music is itself part of the mastery of na- 
ture. 


Recommended reading/listening: 

David Dunn: 

Music, Language and Enuironment. 

The Sound o/Lkjht in Trees. Audio CD. Earth Ear 
eeo5i3- 

David Dunn and James P.Crutchfield: 

Insects, Trees, and Climate: The Bioacoustic Ecology 
of Deforestation and Entomogenic Climate Change. 
Santa Fe Institute Working Paper 06-12-055. 


1 1 8 The Appendix Out Loud 


Michel Serres: 

The Parasite. (Baltimore: Johns Hopkins Uni- 
versity Press, 1982). 


Interview with Alexander Rose of the Long 

Now Foundation: 

10,000 Years Chiming 

Christopher Heaney 


In 1968, Tom Wolfe recounted the early “add tests” led 
by Ken Kesey and Stemart Brand in the San Francisco 
Bay area, including one that attempted to evoke “the 
Humanoid Radio ... the idea mas to try to hit that 
beam and that mode that mould enable you to com- 
municate mith beings on other planets, other yalaxies.” 

Decades later, an organization co-founded by Brand is 
trying to imagine how the present miyht communicate 
mith another class 0/ distant beings: the residents of the 
far future. 

For the past fifteen years, The Long Norn Foundation 
has been morkiny toward the construction of a “Clock 
of the Long Norn” desiyned to persist for at least ten 
thousand years and encourage lony-term thinkiny to- 
day. The aim is to create a deuice that mill outlast the 
present civilization and serve as a bridge to the soci- 
eties that come after ours. The clock is both a musical 
instrument — one desiyned to produce unique melodies 
for millennia — and a symbol of the human impulse to 
communicate. It is also a marvelous piece of technolo- 
gy, currently in development in California and Wash- 
inyton and set for installation at a remote site in the 
West Texas desert owned by the billionaire Jeff Bezos. In 
March of 2013, Appendix executive editor Christopher 
Heaney spoke mith the executive director of The Long 
Now Foundation, Alexander Rose, about the clock’s 
past, present, and future. 

Alexander Rose. 

The Long Now Foundation 



July 201 3 119 



Christopher Heaney: So what does the ‘Long 
Now’ mean and where did that idea come from? 

Alexander Rose: The term the ‘Long Now’ was 
coined for us by someone who became one of the 
founding board members, the musician and artist 
Brian Eno. He had grown up in England and he 
had always understood the term ‘now’ to mean 
‘the time that we are in,’ almost ‘the last and next 
ten years.’ And when he moved to New York, he 
not only realized that when people said ‘here,’ 
they meant basically the walls they were between, 
not the larger city or neighborhood they were in. 
And when they said ‘now’ they also meant ‘the five 
minutes they are in,’ not the larger time they are 
in. So he coined this term ‘Long Now’ in contrast 
to the ‘Short Now’ that he was experiencing in 
New York. 

We stretched that out even further to basically be 
the human civilizational moment: the last Ice Age 
roughly retreated around ten thousand years ago 
and agriculture started in lots of places around the 
world. What we would call ‘civilization’ got its be- 
ginnings about ten thousand years ago, and so we 
envision ourselves at the middle of this story. The 
last ten thousand years and the next ten thousand 
years becomes the ‘Long Now.’ 

CH: And why is it important to conceive of the 
Long Now, as a mental space to get into as we go 
forward? 

AR: There was a lot of discussion early on about 
what the time scale should be and why different 
time scales matter. If you look at the astronomic 
time scales of billions of years, then the human 
experience — and almost the earthly experience — 
becomes so trivial that there’s really no acting 
within that space in any meaningful way. And even 
if you look at geological time, you have that same 
problem of millions of years. But if you look at the 
last ten thousand years and the next ten thousand 
years, that’s four hundred generations backward 
and four hundred generations forward (at twen- 
ty-five years a generation anyway). The idea there 
is that [if] you’re keeping that past and that future 
in mind, you’re going to be doing things that are 
informed by the past and preserving options for 
the future. Whereas if you’re only acting for your- 
self or your current generation or even your cur- 


rent year or quarter, you can take a lot of options 
away from the next people that come along. 

So one of the fundamental things we have learned 
about thinking about time in this way is that a lot 
of it is about preserving options for future genera- 
tions. For instance if you were to cut down all the 
old growth redwoods in the Pacific Northwest, 
that option is now not available to the next gen- 
eration. 

CH: There’s a story that I know that people at The 
Long Now Foundation talk a lot about that seems 
really useful; it’s the one that Danny Hillis brought 
up when he first introduced his idea of the ten 
thousand-year clock about New College at Oxford. 

AR: Yeah, the story went, [that] when New College 
was built in the [fourteenth century] , it was the 
‘new college’ at the time. It wasn’t until 500 years 
later in the 1800s when these big oak beams that 
went across the main dining hall were inspected 
and people realized that they’d become a bit rotted 
and infested with beetles. And they didn’t quite 
know what to do, because you couldn’t buy lum- 
ber like this in Europe anymore: the commercial 
forests had all been harvested. 

It wasn’t until they spoke to the school forester 
who said “Oh, yeah, we have the trees that you 
planted.” And it turned out that when the school 
was built, there was also a grove of oak trees that 
had been planted that 500 years later could be har- 
vested for exactly that purpose. And when Danny 
heard this — Danny’s background was in building 
supercomputers, the fastest computers in the 
world — he realized that this type of thinking was 
clearly not going on in the world that he was living 
in. And as he talked to the group that eventually 
became the founding board, people like Stewart 
Brand and Kevin Kelly from Wired magazine and 
futurists like Paul Saffo and Peter Schwartz, that 
they were not seeing this kind of discussion hap- 
pening either: what are the kind of things you do 
need to pay attention to over the long span, what 
kind of problems would you solve if you had a hun- 
dred years or a thousand years — problems that ba- 
sically are off the table if you have two years or a 
quarter to solve them? 


1 20 The Appendix Out Loud 


CH: What is the clock, and how did it come 
to be? 

AR: Well the Clock of the Long Now was an 
idea of Danny Hillis and it’s really the thing 
that sparked this conversation. He sent out 
an essay to the group that I mentioned who 
became this founding board back in 1995 and 
said that he wanted to build the slowest com- 
puter in the world instead of the fastest com- 
puter in the world. It would be a millennial 
clock and it would tick every year and bong 
once a century and the cuckoo would come 
out every millennium: this kind of poetic ver- 
sion of a large monument-scale icon to long- 
term thinking that people would travel to and 
visit and be inspired that there could be proj- 
ects that take place over a millennial scale. 

So that was the inception of that clock idea. 
After a couple years of discussion I came 
across the project through Stewart Brand and 
was introduced to Danny Hillis, and he and 
I started working on building the first pro- 
totype of that clock. That one’s about eight 
feet tall and was finished in 1999. Since that 
time we’ve made several other prototypes, 
and starting in 2005 we started working on 
the monument-scale version in West Tex- 
as, which is now under construction. We’re 
building an underground space for it as well 
as building the machinery that’s going to be 
shipped out there and installed in the future. 

CH: According to the Foundation site you’ve 
drilled a 500 foot tall shaft down into the 
earth where the clock itself is going to be 
and you’ve started building the steps through 
which visitors can climb up the chamber to- 
wards the clock’s gears. 

AR: We haven’t started the steps yet but we’ve 
built this robot that can cut them. We’ve also 
started building the machinery itself. A lot of 
the major components of the clock are now in 
production and some of them are getting to 
be complete. 



Alexander Rose working on a prototype of the Clock of the Long Now. 

The Long Now Foundation 


CH: Tell me a little about that design process. 
It’s very intentionally not an electrical device; 
it’s a mechanical one. Why did you go in that 
design direction, towards gears and these 
very durable pieces of machinery? 

AR: The first reason is that there’s certain 
criteria that Danny started judging all clocks 
and machines against that might be applica- 
ble; those criteria included longevity, main- 
tainability, transparency, scalability. As you 
look at other clocks, even electronic ones and 
atomic clocks and all these things, what you 
realize is you have to design this thing to be 
lost or neglected and then found by people 
who may or may not understand it and may 
or may not have the same technology level: 
could be vastly greater, could be vastly lower. 
And you want it to be understood and main- 
tained by all of those people, as broad a ver- 
sion of those people as you can imagine. So 
when you start doing that, electronics just 
falls right out of the loop right away. Because 
if you find an electronic clock and the screen 
is blank, it’s really hard to even understand 
it’s a clock, [and even harder] if it has circuit- 
ry and silicon chips at a microscopic scale. 


July 201 3 121 


The other reason is that we’ve come to assume 
that magic things can happen with electronics, 
and it’s hard to be impressed by them anymore. 
So by making a large machine that’s architectur- 
al in its mechanics, that you can walk through, 
[we’re fulfilling] the point of this project [which] 
is really to inspire people and to change how they 
think about time. The other thing you get out of 
larger size is that it helps it be maintained with a 
very low technology. The larger the size, the lower 
the tolerances, the easier it is to use things of low 
technology manufacture like sand-casting, which 
is the oldest way of making metal. 

So those are all the main reasons. And the other 
thing [is] that as you look at that prototype and 
some of the other machines that we’ve contin- 
ued to build, you hit on probably the most diffi- 
cult problem that we work on, which is aesthet- 
ics and experience design. What is the aesthetic 
of a thing — what do you use as your aesthetic for 
something that’s supposed to last for ten thou- 
sand years, and not only has to last but has to be 
appealing to a large number of people? Aesthetics 
go in and out of fashion. How to choose the way 
that something is supposed to look so that it re- 
mains engaging for thousands of years is probably 
the thing we struggle with the most. 

CH: It’s trying to figure out what will appeal to 
people ten thousand years from now, not having 
them dismiss or destroy it. 

AR: That’s right, you want it to be cool enough 
that people want to care about it; obviously peo- 
ple destroying it is something that we can’t stop, 
so we want to make it something that they pur- 
posefully want to save. So you look back through 
history at things that have survived and look at the 
reasons why. In some cases it’s because they were 
just lost and found by the right people, in some 
cases it’s because they had an ideology that sur- 
vived alongside them like an institution, like Shin- 
to shrines in Japan. 

In some cases it’s because the ideology was very 
much against them. The world is rife with things 
that we have lost because they were associated 
with the wrong religion, or the next dynasty’s 
power, or something like that. All the way up to 
modern times when we saw the Buddhas of Bam- 


iyan destroyed by the Taliban in Afghanistan, 
with a lot of effort to blast them out of these giant 
cliffs that they were carved into. And it’s hard to 
imagine a more innocuous symbol of a religion 
than Buddha, but they thought it was threatening 
enough to put a lot of time and effort toward de- 
stroying them. So that’s the kind of thing that we 
really struggle with in terms of, we do have this 
ideology in terms of long-term thinking, but we 
really don’t want that to become an ideology that 
becomes threatening in any way. 

CH: One of the ways the clock fits into this par- 
ticular issue of The Appendix is that we’re think- 
ing about music and sound, and how they travel 
through time. It strikes me that you’re building a 
clock, but one could also say that you’re aspiring 
to build one of the world’s oldest musical instru- 
ments in the future. How does sound play into the 
design of the clock? Why were those chimes an 
important process of its design rather than, say, 
a cuckoo? 

AR: Right: as I mentioned, there was that early 
poetic version of the clock and that’s evolved a bit. 
But one of the things the clock has is this chime 
system, and its ten bells that are mechanically 
rung in a different sequence each day for ten thou- 
sand years — or they can be: the bells only ring and 
the dials only update when people visit the clock. 

So the clock is always keeping track of time, but 
it only shows the time and rings the bells when 
people are there. That allows for some interac- 
tion for those people as well as solving an engi- 
neering problem for us of wasting all this power 
when no one is there. That algorithm of how to 
ring ten bells in a different sequence for ten thou- 
sand years was designed by Danny Hillis. He and I 
and our engineers and Brian Eno have been work- 
ing on what exactly those bells could be, how we 
would ring them, what they would sound like, and 
Brian Eno even released an album of his first ex- 
periments of using that algorithm as well as vir- 
tual-designed bell systems. That album’s called 
January 07003: Bell Studies for the Clock of the Long 
Now (2003) which was a day that he thought had 
a particularly nice bell ringing combination: a day 
that’s five thousand years in the future. 


1 22 The Appendix Out Loud 


We continue to do research. The bells and the 
music are going to be one of the last things 
that we finalize. We’re building a chime gen- 
erator. But for the final sounds, we’re waiting 
until the rest of the site is excavated so we can 
test the acoustics of the space so they can in- 
form what kind of resonances we want in the 
bells. As you may know, in churches when 
they tune bells and organs, they often tune 
them to the space so they have this frequency 
that actually uses the space as the largest part 
of the reverberation device. So we want to do 
a similar thing with these bells. Brian Eno’s 
already been to the site when we first started 
doing some of the excavation and did some 
first tests trying to find its natural frequen- 
cies, but we continue to excavate and that’s 
going to change that. So that’s a continuing 
research project. 

CH: That’s really exciting. There is a little bit 
of a difference, though, from bells in church- 
es, say, because bells in churches do count 
out time, but also they have the older cultural 
meaning of ‘now is the time for worship’ or 
signaling particular events. Is the purpose of 
the bells on the site to mark time, or is it sim- 
ply to inspire a respect for beauty and appeal 
to the aesthetic side of the imagined visitor? 
What are they for? 

AR: Well, it’s an interesting question. I think 
the way we have designed them, the answer to 
your question is that they basically celebrate 
that a visitor has come and wound the clock. 
They do that by giving them a unique ringing 
sequence every day that they might arrive and 
wind the clock. So that is certainly different, 
in a sense that’s marking time but that’s also 
basically celebrating that they’re there. 

Since this clock is quietly ticking — it has a 
very small number of moving parts that keep 
going whether or not people are there and 
it’s powered by the temperature difference of 
day to night — it’s always in this hibernation 
mode until people are there and they wind up 
and update the dials. The clock knows what 



The 2000 prototype of the clock. 

The Long Now Foundation 


time it is, but it doesn’t tell you until you wind 
it, and it’s ready to ring a series of bells but 
it doesn’t do it unless you’re there to wind it. 
So it’s trying to tell you that it’s thankful you 
arrived and paid attention to it. 

CH: It assumes that we still understand how 
to wind clocks. At The Appendix we’ve been 
talking about the Voyager Golden Record: 
how do you educate the future visitor who 
might not be part of any recognizable civiliza- 
tion? How are you imagining that induction 
process into the site? 

AR: These are the things that we struggle 
with the most: the aesthetics, the experience 
design. What shape of handle do you make 
for a person ten thousand years from now? 
Are their hands even going to look like ours? 

If we look back in time, people’s hands looked 
enough like ours and they were enough like 
our body shape that we feel like we have a 
pretty good grasp on that, but I think that’s a 
good question: what values they might have, 
and what would intrigue them ten thousand 


July 201 3 123 






years from now. We’ve made some assump- 
tions. For instance, [we’ve assumed] that if 
we make a capstan — style winder — a thing 
that you walk around and has handles on it — 
in the path that it takes to visit the clock, that 
people are going to be curious enough to go 
ahead and wind it. It’s just an assumption of 
human curiosity that we feel we’re going to 
count on. 

Usually the problem is that people over-wind 
it or do it too fast or too much, in a sense. We 
have made the assumption that people will 
want to do something with a handle if we give 
it to them. So we’ve made it really obvious in 
the sense that it’s right in your way, and we’ve 
also made the assumption that they would 
want to do it. 

CH: Right, it’s like a scene from a pulp ad- 
venture story: you come upon a temple with 
a handle and the first thing you do is grab the 
handle and set all the mechanisms in motion. 

You brought up the idea of Shinto temples: 
how people have been willing to transmit and 
update both architecture and the ideas along- 
side architecture. There’s a continuity of the 
organization as well. Is Long Now something 
that might exist for hundreds of years along- 
side the clock? 

AR: Japan has one of the longest-standing 
wooden structures in the world and up until 
recently it was actually one of the tallest wood- 
en structures in the world. It’s a sixth-century 
temple that stayed up for fourteen hundred 
years because it’s had continual maintenance 
and people making sure the roof is over it. 
Another Shinto temple — probably the most 
important one in Japan as I understand it — is 
the one at Ise, and that’s a very small temple 
that only the emperor was allowed in and it 
has been rebuilt at an alternating site, one 
next to another, every twenty years for at least 
a thousand years, and there’s some records 
that point to it being much longer than that. 


So those are two models: one is that you 
build a thing and you maintain it; the other 
is a baton-passing model where you rebuild 
the thing every twenty years in very ephem- 
eral materials like rice paper and thatch and 
that twenty-year time span allows a master to 
teach the apprentice and the next time that 
person is the master and teaching the appren- 
tice and you have this generational hand-olf. 
And I suspect that act of rebuilding is why 
Shinto has lasted through the coming-in of 
Buddhism and later Christianity. Most every- 
one in Japan is still Shinto in some way, and 
the other religions have added onto that. And 
I suspect there’s something in that ritual, the 
rebuilding, the once-in-a-generation ‘why are 
we doing this,’ that helps that. It’s an inter- 
esting lesson to learn both in ways of doing 
maintenance and in ways of reminding a cul- 
ture why they’re doing maintenance. 

CH: The Long Now Foundation has been able 
to do what it does by appealing to the pub- 
lic, by appealing to people who are inspired 
by its message to contribute and get involved. 
Do you imagine The Long Now Foundation 
taking on apprentices at any moment, or is 
this something that at least in the immediate 
future is going to have a much smaller group 
maintaining it? 

AR: Well, right now we’re building it, so we’re 
not interviewing the winders yet. [Laughter] . 
But we really hope that it’s engaging enough 
that people want to do it, and we’ve designed 
it to not be wound for long periods of time. 
So I think there’s a question of how much se- 
curity we put around it and things like that, 
but fundamentally we really want it to be this 
self-motivating sort of thing. We’ll see how 
that starts to play out at the beginning of its 
life and going forward. 

CH: If I understand the chronology correctly, 
it’s partly in Texas because Jeff Bezos of Am- 
azon got involved and had a terrific site for it 
on his property. Is there any question of open 
access? 


1 24 The Appendix Out Loud 


Watch a video of Alexander Rose discussing the 1 0,000 Year 
Clock with Singularity University at http://appendic.es/m/i 


if we dug into this 
mountain and we found 
the clock already there, 
ticking away, what do 
we wish we had found? 


AR: It’s specifically [been] stated from the be- 
ginning that it’s for people to come visit. 

CH: Something that came up in a talk you 
gave that interested me was the ‘ablative lay- 
er’ of a monument or site or object. How do 
you make sure that people don’t just maintain 
it, but that if looting does happen, it doesn’t 
affect the workings of the clock? 

AR: That ablative layer technique is a curi- 
ous one. We haven’t designed anything for 
that specifically yet, but we’re looking at that 
as an idea and luckily it’s something that 
we can add in at some later point. But the 
[concept of] sacrificial things as protective 
mechanisms goes all the way into the biolog- 
ical world where a lizard will allow its tail to 
be broken off when the bird attacks it and it 
grows a new one and it doesn’t hurt the liz- 
ard. Well, I’m sure it hurts to some degree, 
but they stay alive and they remain a lizard. 

Similarly, the Great Pyramids had these great 
casing stones as well as the gold inside, all 
of which had been looted over the years, but 
we still have their basic pyramid-ness. And 
another example is the Taj Mahal, which was 
covered in jewels; when that was looted, peo- 
ple spent a lot of time prying those jewels out 
of the walls rather than burning the whole 
thing to the ground. 

These architectural examples have been ac- 
cidental methodologies. And in the biology 
world they’re evolved mechanisms. We hav- 
en’t made any decisions as to whether we’re 
going to line the chambers with gold or jew- 
els as a way to make people think that they’ve 
stolen the value even as the clock remains. 
But something like that is certainly possible. 

CH: For my final question I wanted to ask 
you to imagine ten thousand years from now: 
there’s a future group of human explorers, 
maybe from an African empire going to the 
lost forgotten continent of North America. 
After they catalog the cities and other sites, 


they find this clock in the mountains of Tex- 
as last. Do you think it’s remotely possible to 
imagine how they’ll see it and what they’ll do 
with it? What do you want it to say to future 
civilizations? 

AR: There’s certainly no way for us to know 
how they’ll interpret it. But I think that the ex- 
ercise to answer this question is if we dug into 
this mountain and we found the clock already 
there, ticking away, what do we wish we had 
found? And that’s basically the fundamental 
design question. What we hope we find there 
is that it’s working and understandable by us. 
And the message that we hope is conveyed is 
‘the people before us cared.’ If we can achieve 
that, that the people in the future feel as 
though we actually cared about them, that’s 
the most we can likely hope for. 

CH: And in a more immediate sense, we know 
it’s a message for people today to change their 
way of thinking. 

AR: Right. You can certainly dismiss that 
it might work; you can say that it might get 
looted in the years to come; you can say that 
it’s a waste of resources, any of these things. 
But even in thinking about it at that level, 
you’re thinking ten thousand years in advance 
of right now, which means that it’s already 
achieving its goal. It’s as much a mechanism 
for the present as it is for the future. 


July 2013 


125 



k:\RKN DAI.IOV 
In Xly Own lime 



Open Sound, 

Musical Curation, 
and the 

Delightful Objectness 

ofWax: 

Interviews with 
Light in the Attic Records 
and Clifford Allen 

Michael J. Schmidt 


The production of history and the historical archive are tradition- 
ally considered the domain of historians. There are, however, a 
wide uariety of archival practices and practices of history that ex- 
ist outside the academy. Recently, Appendix contributing editor 
Michael Schmidt sat down over Skype with Matt Sullivan, Kevin 
Howes, and Clifford Allen and discussed the interstices between 
music, collecting, archives, and history. 

Matt, Keuin, and Clifford unite two different modes of historical 
work: that of the scholar and that of the enthusiast. All three are 
auid record collectors and documenters of rare or underexposed 
music. Matt and Kevin reissue albums through the label Light in 
the Attic (Matt as the founder and main curator and Kevin as 
a curator and writer). Trained as an art historian and archivist, 
Clifford is also a journalist of jazz and improvised music. 

Although Michael spoke to Clifford and the Light in the Attic folks 
separately, their responses touched on a number of similar topics. 
They spoke about records as cultural phenomena and reissues as a 
purposeful medium. They discussed the relationship between liner 
notes, packaging, and music history. Assembled here, their con- 
versations offer a number of poignant reflections on the roles and 
motivations of those actiuely shaping the music we listen to, and 
the way we listen to and think about it. 


5'oS 

■W 


Top to Bottom: Wayne McGhie and the Sounds of Joy, The Louvin 
Brothers — Satan is Real, Jackie Mittoo— Wishbone, and Karen Dal- 
ton— In My Own Time; 

all albums reissued by Light in the Attic Records. 

Light in the Attic Records 


Origins and Starting Points 

Although engaged in complementary endeavors, 
all three got into their work in different ways. 
Kevin started as a DJ, Matt worked in radio, and 
Clifford began writing in graduate school. 

Kevin: 

Basically, I was born in 1974, and my parents both 
had reasonably sized record collections. So, I grew 
up with that. Some of my earliest memories are 
looking at my parents’ records and listening to 
them. Looking at the record covers. Talking about 
records like the early Beatles albums and Sly and 
the Family Stone. I started to fall in love with the 
music. 

I didn’t really start record collecting myself or buy- 
ing records until maybe the early 1990s. A lot of 
the music that I love — rap, reggae, disco, rock and 
roll — vinyl is (or was) the medium for that kind 
of music at the time it was being released. Mu- 
sic from the 60s and 80s: it came out on records. 
I guess by then CDs and cassettes had come into 
fashion, but records were still relatively afford- 
able, and they were what the DJs used. 

So, I sort of got into it like that: starting to find 
out about sample-based culture. A lot of the music 
I was listening to in the rap world was based on 
these old soul and funk and rock records, so it was 
a natural step to get into that. I started DJing my- 
self, and, once you start DJing, the record is your 
tool. You want to have stuff that no one else has, 
and you want to keep up with the latest releases. 
You start buying records and getting into the hab- 
it; you know, collecting them. It’s one thing to 
have them on the shelf and they look pretty, but 
I’m all about using the record, wanting to play 
them and share them with people. 

Matt: 

I grew up in the suburbs outside of Seattle in a 
town called Bellevue where we had a small high 
school radio station. It was 10 Watts (this is 1993- 
1994). So early on I got involved with that with 
Josh, my eventual business partner, and we both 
were in this class where at night you got your own 
radio show where you could play whatever you 
wanted. It was a pretty mind-boggling experience 
as a kid. I liked music before, but that’s where it 


really hit me. I learned early on that I wasn’t the 
best musician [laughs] and I liked the idea of cu- 
rating with a record label and being a part of mu- 
sic on that level. 

I’d do lots of internships in college and ended up 
doing an internship at a label in Spain called Mun- 
ster Records in 1996 or 1997. Their focus was re- 
issue; they’d been around since about 1984. They 
were in Madrid and in Bilbao. They were the ones 
who introduced me to a lot of this older music. At 
the time most of the music I listened to was con- 
temporary or it would be things that were easily 
accessible. 

At that point I really liked the idea of trying to 
combine doing some contemporary releases as 
well as some reissues. The fact that there are zil- 
lions of amazing albums by musicians and artists 
who sacrificed and made these brilliant record- 
ings and then, for whatever reason, their careers 
didn’t really take off. It seemed like there were 
amazing albums sitting there that really people 
should know about. 

So I started the label in 2001. 2001 was when it 
started; 2002 the first record came out. Quickly, 
we met people like Kevin who has an incredible 
mind for music, and Kevin turned us on to lots of 
recordings and we got to work together on that. 
So that’s where the reissue side of our label start- 
ed. 

Clifford: 

I did some writing in college for a friend’s punk 
zine, doing very verbose reviews of indie rock and 
punk records, but that was not really particularly 
serious in any way. I guess I started [writing about 
music] as an undergraduate, in an academic set- 
ting, writing papers and so forth — those often 
seemed to spin into music. As far as profession- 
ally, it happened while I was in art school in Chi- 
cago at the School of the Art Institute. I was work- 
ing on my Master’s thesis and interviewed Peter 
Brotzmann for that. I knew John Corbett and he 
set it up. So, the interview with Brotzmann went 
well and I had a friend who was starting the New 
York City Jazz Record [then called All About Jazz New 
York] — this was 2002 , 1 believe — and he wanted to 
use the interview. 


July 201 3 127 


So that was the accidental start. The [MA] 
thesis itself was about music: it was [discuss- 
ing] European free improvisation and process 
art. But I had not thought journalistically in 
any sense, so once the Brotzmann interview 
was published, I became staff on this paper, 
the Neu; York City Jazz Record, and things just 
began pouring in afterwards. People began to 
ask me to do things, whether I would want to 
contribute and folks would send CDs, and it 
all took off from there. It was kind of an in- 
auspicious beginning, but it did start earlier 
than I often thought it did. There wasn’t any 
“ah-ha, I’m going to do this” moment. It was 
just one of those things that slowly developed 
and took hold without any game plan at all. 

Peter Brotzmann was the first interview I ever 
did. Sunny Murray was the second. It was 
some pretty out dudes right away. Sunny Mur- 
ray and Buell Neidlinger (the bassist in some 
of the early Cecil Taylor ensembles). Who else 
around that time? Burton Greene — he might 
have been a little later. Charlie Haden was 
really early for me and that was pretty cool. 
I got to talk with all of these very heavy folks 
at the beginning and sort of front-loaded the 
process, which I think was good: trial by fire. 



The Commodore Record Shop in August, 1947. 

William P. Gottlieb, via the Library of Congress 


Knowing how to navigate [conversations 
with] these complex human beings with a lot 
of history early on was helpful. It sets up how 
you think about the rights and the wrongs [of 
the process] pretty early on and I think that 
it was good to jump into the deep end of the 
swimming pool very early. 


LITA on Listening 

Listening is an activity that is both histor- 
ical and individual. For those working in 
and/or devoted to music, the ears are an 
important thing to cultivate. The way one 
listens is quite informative — it says some- 
thing interesting about the fundamental way 
that one approaches music. Matt and Kevin 
discussed different ways that they listen to 
recordings and the way that their practices 
go beyond just the sounds on a CD, cassette, 
or audio file. 

Matt: 

For me, now that I have a wife and a child and 
a house that’s maybe not so big, it’s hard to 
listen to music at home sometimes. I do lis- 
ten to music at home, but I’m not able to just 
sit down and zone out. So, a lot of times the 
car is actually a really nice place to listen to 
music and get the vibe of it. Living in Los An- 
geles, you’re in a car a lot. I also listen to mu- 
sic at work all the time. It’s not like everything 
we listen to at work has to do with what we’re 
working on; I think it’s kind of hard to listen 
to work and focus on it. It’s not that it’s al- 
ways background music, we’re enjoying it and 
talking about it, but when I was younger it 
would be a lot more of getting stoned and put- 
ting headphones on and listening to records 
or cassettes or CDs over and over again. Now 
it’s the car. Sometimes late at night at home 
when everyone else is asleep, I’ll be listening 
to music on my own. The car and late at night 
is the best time. I like really getting into a re- 
cord when it isn’t just background music. A 
lot of times I’ll buy records and won’t listen 


128 The Appendix Out Loud 



Listen to Kevin talking about environmental sounds at http://appendic.es/m7t 


to them for a long time, like six months or 
maybe a year, because I really want to listen to 
them at the right moment. I hate listening to 
music when I’m forced to listen to it. I like be- 
ing able to look at the covers, read the notes, 
and just lay back and listen to it. 

Also hiking is a really nice way to experience 
music I’ve found lately, just on my head- 
phones. So, yeah, being mobile, I prefer that. 
On a hike, in particular, you pick out scenery 
that you’re enjoying, and you can find music 
that fits the mood really well. While in the 
car you might be stuck on the highway; de- 
pending on what you’re listening to it might 
be calming or it might make you angry. So a 
more natural setting can always be a nice en- 
vironment. 

Kevin: 

In those contexts I really prefer the open sort 
of sound. I don’t like using headphones too 
much, especially walking around. I like to 
catch the environmental sounds as well. 

I like hearing the sounds of the road as well. I 
don’t want to totally internalize with the pro- 
cess. I like combining it with other things. It’s 
almost like a mix in a way. Like if I’m outside 
and I’m hiking or whatever, I’d rather walk 
with a little cassette player that played it out 
and I could hear the nature sounds. Not that 
I do this, but in my mind that’s how I’d like it 
to be. 

Or if I’m sitting at the beach or something, 
and have a little player that you can just listen 
to instead of putting the headphones on and 
just internalizing. I like to hear the surf with 
it as well. 

It’s like if you’re mixing two records on a cou- 
ple turntables and a mixer, blending records 
together. The environmental sounds, the na- 
ture sounds, are almost like another channel, 
you know? It’s another texture the music can 
interact with. It sounds super hippy-dippy, 
but I really like even just nature sound re- 


cords. You have vinyl records, and you know 
CDs, of relaxation music. The Sounds of the 
Ocean, A Walk by a Gentle Stream — I’ll buy 
these records. I collect that type of stuff. I 
love it. It’s just another way of listening; an 
added texture. Sometimes you can get a really 
neat sync thing or synergy with it where it be- 
comes its own entity. 


Interviews and Oral History 

One of Clifford’s main occupations as a 
music journalist is interviews. For scholars 
of music, interviews are often one of the few 
sources that we have of musicians speaking 
about their music in their own voice (other 
than the music itself) and they often provide 
essential information about sound events 
which are not very well documented. We 
spoke about how he approaches the inter- 
view process and how he thinks it relates to 
oral history. 

Clifford: 

I definitely think of [my] interviews in part as 
oral history, though with a different sort of 
underpinning. For example, if you go to the 
Online Archive of California [OAC] and you 
look at their oral histories, they start from 
the very beginning, “where were your parents 
born?,” with very specific trajectories. There 
is a great oral history with Anthony Ortega, 
the alto saxophonist, who, I believe, still lives 
in LA. [He is a] really wonderful saxophon- 
ist, recorded for Revelation and for, I believe, 
the old Dawn label. He’s a Mexican-American 
Charlie Parker acolyte, so he has an interest- 
ing story. The transcription is all available at 
the OAC; he’s not right away talking about 
playing in Los Angeles jazz clubs in the 1950s; 
he’s talking about what his parents did and 
that sort of thing. 

That sort of oral history is very specific. What 
I do — I don’t put that into the same catego- 
ry. When I interview musicians, their story 


July 201 3 129 


comes out in conversation as much as they 
like to tell [it] but a lot of it is centered in their 
music and thoughts. Biography is necessary, 
although I don’t think I treat it as though it 
were a familial oral history or an oral histo- 
ry of — say, the context in which Sunny Mur- 
ray grew up in Oklahoma. I mean that stuff 
comes out, but tracing his life from those 
early pre-musical stages to his living in Paris, 
that’s a totally different enterprise than what 
I was trying to glean, which was more to un- 
derstand his process and work. 

I’m interested in how musicians’ work tran- 
spires, how it comes to be, their process 
as creative artists, how they compose, how 
they view composition — either as improvis- 
ing composers or if they are actually writing 
tunes. I’m very interested how they put to- 
gether the bands and ensembles, how they 
view their work in terms of placing it in some 
sort of sonic continuum. I’m also interested 
in musicians who may have connections to 
other art forms or, say, improvisers who may 
play other types of music or musicians who 
may be visual artists or are writers or are con- 
nected to other creative endeavors. I’m always 
interested in that kind of stuff: to see how the 
whole person thinks. For me, I really like hav- 
ing a dialogue with people about creativity 
and each interview is very different. So, that 
said, some salient historical points might get 
left out because I’m interested in getting at 
their essence as creative beings, and trying 
to put that out there for people to read and 
enjoy. It may be a bit more nebulous than pro- 
viding a straight historical lineage. 



Listen to Clifford on Records at http://appendic.es/m/u 


Records, Record Collecting, 
and Personal Archives 

Collecting is driven by a fascination with 
specific objects, and collections can become 
personal archives. Acquiring and bringing 
together a large number of similar objects 
opens up interesting questions: how do 
these objects relate to each other? How do 
I organize them? How do I find meaning in 
these objects and how do I distinguish them? 
We tend to think of music only as sound, but 
commercial records are multi-faceted objects 
that communicate through various means. 
Clifford is also trained in Information Sci- 
ence as an archivist and we discussed how he 
views records and how he has confronted the 
organization of his collection. 

Clifford: 

When I approach an old record, say in its 
original or as close to original form as can 
be found, I think of those as art objects, al- 
though they might be mass produced some- 
times. I think of them in their context. It’s 
less thinking of them as historical stand-ins 
for a specific time period and more thinking 
of them in terms of their objectness, in terms 
of their beauty as physical things, graphically, 
etc. 

With records, there are so many aspects to a 
record as an art object. It is a record of some- 
thing that occurred, literally. Musically, it is a 
record of what happened at a point in time. 
It is also a graphic design object. And it is a 
piece of text. So there are a lot of things go- 
ing on and sometimes they can be difficult to 
separate from one another and I think that is 
kind of cool. I also like the mysterious aspect 
of a lot of records that have no notes and that 
seem to come from nowhere. What is this 
thing? And sometimes any effort to uncover 
what it is will be met with obstinance. And as 
an art historian, those objects that were not 
easily yielding were always pretty interesting 
to me. 


130 The Appendix Out Loud 


Michael: 

In what ways do you think about your records 
as an archivist? I sometimes play around with 
organization. It’s interesting to view records 
or connect records physically according to 
different themes. 

Clifford: 

I used to do more of the organizational play. I 
would divide things historically or contextual- 
ly. So, like, all the AACM records would all be 
together. The Black Artist Group would all be 
together. The [Albert] Ayler, [Archie] Shepp, 
and Coltrane, the Pharoah [Sanders] and so 
on, would all be together. The European stuff 
would all be by country and sub-divided even 
more, by regional weirdness or whatever. Say 
with the Dutch guys, an ICP section [Instant 
Composer’s Pool] and then a not ICP section 
and so on and so forth. I don’t do that now. 
It got to be too much a pain in the ass. For 
like Grachan Moncur III, you know, you’ve 
got his Blue Notes, and you’ve got his Actuell, 
and you’ve got his Jazz Composer’s Orchestra 
and where do you put them? There are many 
artists like that that spanned the genres. Or 
Wayne Shorter. It would be hard to file them 
together. Or file them apart. You’re kind of 
stuck there. So I just do genre and alpha, 
chronological by album now. 

But as a personal archive, sure, yeah, I do try 
to, as much as the pocket book allows. I do 
try to document as much as I can any area I 
feel interested in or feel needs work. I mean 
there’s always more stuff to check out. And 
I’m very attached to original forms of record- 
ings so I try not to have too many reissue LPs. 
I try to have original pressings and [to have 
them in] their most representative, most aes- 
thetically pleasing, and earliest form. 

I don’t like surface noise. If you view these 
things as art objects, you wouldn’t want a ru- 
ined painting, so why have a ruined [record]? 
I’m of the mind-set, at least in the case of re- 
cords, that I’d rather not have it than have a 
trashed copy. 


''l\0 


Reissues and Documentation 

At heart, reissues are anachronisms. They 
take musical artifacts produced by specific 
actors in a specific context and re-insert 
them in a different time, often involving 
different actors. This combination often 
creates a remarkable and complex blend of 
intentions and meaning. 

Reissues are also, however, a means to doc- 
ument and illuminate the musical past. This 
occurs most obviously in terms of the sound 
content of the music itself, but physical al- 
bums also offer a host of resources to frame 
what comes out of the speakers. 

Michael: 

One thing that strikes me about reissue la- 
bels is that it they are about creating a certain 
image of taste, of being a curator of people’s 
tastes. It seems like part of having a success- 
ful reissue label is about people trusting your 
taste and wanting to buy something that 
they’ve never heard before and know nothing 
about based on their trust that you’re putting 
out interesting stuff. Is that something that 
you actively think about? 



Karen Dalton, whose 1 971 album In My Own Time 
was reissued by Light in the Attic Records, 
with Tim Hardin in Boulder, CO in the 1960s. 

Nicholas Hill 


July 201 3 131 


Listen to Matt discuss re-issues at http://appendic.es/m/v 


Matt: 

Yeah, all the time. That was the goal from the 
beginning. I looked at labels like Creation 
Records or Stax — labels [that] you trusted. 
Maybe in the 80s or early 90s you’d read about 
a new Sub Pop release or a Stax release back 
in the day, and you’d go buy that record just 
because it had that credibility. 

Forme that was always really important, from 
the beginning, for Light in the Attic. I wanted 
for us to try to do our best. I want people to 
say, “I bought the Jamaica to Toronto release, 
and that was really cool,” and they go to the 
record store and see Karen Dalton. They’ve 
never heard of Karen Dalton, but they see the 
Light in the Attic logo and they say, “Well, I’m 
going to give this a shot.” 

Maybe this has always been the case, but it 
feels like now a lot of people are focused on 
doing quantity rather than quality. So, for me, 
less is more. That’s important. Kevin proba- 
bly feels the same thing about everything he 
does. I just don’t want to contribute more 
crap to the world. And I don’t want to, when 
most of these artists had failures back in the 
day, I don’t want to be another person con- 
tributing to their failed career. Therefore, if 
we’re going to do something, I want to do it 
the best we can. Some things are going to do 
better than others, but at the end of the day, 
regardless of sales, I feel like I can look at each 
of the releases and say, “that had some nice 
liner notes and [we] documented the release 
and the artist the best we could and had some 
photos and we got the best audio source ma- 
terial we could and remastered it the best we 
could.” 

Kevin: 

I think it comes across in the releases, too: the 
detail, the multiple formats, the liner notes, 
and booklets. The accoutrements that pop up 
here and there. I think it resonates with peo- 
ple, serious music fans who are interested in 
this kind of music. 


Matt: 

Most people are consuming music in a differ- 
ent way. Most people aren’t paying for music, 
so you really need to give people a reason why 
they should be buying this. We don’t want to 
create something that’s disposable. You tend 
not to throw away a coffee table book. Our 
hope is that people really enjoy this music and 
get something out of it, and hopefully don’t 
just throw it in a corner like other things you 
do in your life. 

©0® 

Clifford: 

I really think if you are going to do a reissue 
you really have to do it right. You can’t fuck 
around. It’s gotta be nice. 

Michael: 

If I can interject, what do you think doing it 
right is exactly? 

Clifford: 

Doing it better than the original. 

Michael: 

In terms of sound quality? 

Clifford: 

In terms of presentation. If you are going to 
encourage people to buy this again, it has 
to have something that the original doesn’t 
have. I’ll just use the example of the Bill Dixon 
Intents and Purposes record. It was done from 
the master tapes and a nice little gatefold 
CD package reproducing the original cover. 
Remastered from the original tapes, sounds 
great ... it was definitely done “right,” but the 
caveat is, the Dixon estate has reams of photo- 
graphs, of materials relating to those record- 
ing sessions. There is extra music, you know, 
rehearsal tapes. My view is that is should have 
been done as a deluxe reissue. If you have ac- 
cess to all this extra contextualizing material 
for a singular recording, if it’s something that 
is a cornerstone, you should do it. 


132 The Appendix Out Loud 


Michael: 

So ideally you see reissues when they are done 
right as being as a medium for presenting all avail- 
able materials? 

Clifford: 

Yeah, totally. I should qualify that, because I don’t 
think every record needs it, but if you are going to 
do a reissue of something that hasn’t been out in 
CD format before, for example, I think you should 
feel like you are in the position where you can do 
something really special that will really illuminate 
the project. I think that is different than say the 
deluxe box reissue of Kind of Blue because it’s been 
out 3,682 times. 

Michael: 

I think it’s interesting: you were talking about 
when you buy records on vinyl, you want it to be 
as close to the original, to keep the integrity of the 
artwork as much as possible. But reissues for you 
are something different, something more like a 
medium for documentation. 

Clifford: 

Yeah, as an homage. 

To me that is what a reissue should be. I think it 
should have it’s own kind of life. If it’s not ‘better’ 
than the original then at least it should be a paean 
or a serious homage to the fact that the original 
exists. 

Michael: 

With jazz, it seems to me that reissues are way 
more commercially successful than new record- 
ings. People will have a jazz collection and it will 
all be from the 50s and 60s and have nothing new. 
Clearly reissues are vital to sales of the genre but 
why do you think it tends to be such a historicist 
type of listening, versus one that is actively seek- 
ing out contemporary music? 

Clifford: 

Yeah, I think there is a fetishization of the old, as 
cliched as that sounds. I don’t want to repeat cli- 
ches, but here we are. I’m as guilty of it as the next 
guy- 

I don’t know. My feeling is that one has to be 
pretty careful about these things, especially with 


artists who are still alive and are still making new 
recordings. Those [recordings] tend to get over- 
shadowed by the reissues and I think that is real- 
ly unfortunate. Bill Dixon, for example, he made 
cornerstone recordings for RCA Victor in the 
1960s that were reissued and a nice job was done, 
but he was at that time still making work. 

So the reissue came out at the same time as his 
final recorded work and there was this fear that — 
and I think this was fairly accurately borne out — 
the reissue overshadowed the new recordings, 
and people are still clamoring about that older 
work, when he was doing fundamentally power- 
ful work until practically the day he died. His fi- 
nal recording was made just a few weeks before 
he passed. Burton Greene is another example. His 
new recordings are wonderful, but people still just 
talk about the ESP [recordings] and those were 
done in 1965-1966. I don’t know why people put 
so much stock in older recordings. I don’t think 
it’s just jazz. I think in rock music it’s the case too. 
I don’t that Glenn Branca’s newer symphonies are 
really given the same level of attention as his ear- 
ly work, probably to the detriment of his pocket 
book. I don’t have an answer for it. I think it’s a 
cultural symptom. We tend to like to see the past, 
we’re interested in it. A historian has insight into 
our obsession with the past, and reissues are cer- 
tainly great to have available as important histor- 
ical documents, but, at the same time, there is a 
paucity of attention paid to contemporary work. 

It’s a tension I’m well aware of — as a record col- 
lector, I’m buying old stuff. And some days I feel 
like — some weeks I feel like — giving way more 
attention to that type of listening than new jazz 
record X,Y, or Z that, for all intents and purposes, 
is equally interesting. 

000 

Michael: 

One of the things that I think is interesting about 
reissues is that it’s taking music that was record- 
ed in another time and place and another context 
and, essentially, most of the time it didn’t stick. 
Then you put them out in the present, in this for- 
eign context — what do you think makes records 
that didn’t stick then stick now? 


July 201 3 133 



An undated, taped-together photograph of Wayne McGhie with bandmates. 

Light in the Attic 


Matt: 

Sometimes it just takes years for people to catch 
up to things. It’s cliched sounding, but it’s true. 
Some of these records and artists were just before 
their time. People weren’t ready for it. 

Kevin: 

Yeah, they just didn’t find their audience in the 
past. You know, a lot of these records being reis- 
sued today were regional things and things that 
generally didn’t have a big push in the media or 
by a major record label. If they didn’t hit really 
big at the time, they just fell through the cracks. 
Life goes on. Some musicians from the 60s and 
70s, they started families and moved on to oth- 
er things. They had to pay the bills, and music 
wasn’t paying the bills. But, just because some- 
thing didn’t reach commercial success back in the 
day doesn’t mean it’s not good music. That’s one 
thing that we’ve all learned about. 

And I don’t think that everything from the past is 
worthy of reappraisal. The good stuff will rise to 
the top eventually. It just may take twenty or thirty 
years. 


mented. A band will have their BandCamp pages, 
any number of websites documenting and pro- 
moting their music. Kids at shows have phones 
and digital cameras. So much stuff gets docu- 
mented. But if you look back forty years ago, they 
didn’t have iPhones in ‘67, obviously. A lot of these 
great bands didn’t even have a friend with a cam- 
era around at the time. So the pioneers of a lot of 
the music that gets copied today isn’t really docu- 
mented. 

The motivator for my work with Light in the At- 
tic is preserving and documenting history which 
will be lost if it’s not preserved now for future 
generations. I think that would be a real shame if 
the pioneers of a lot of pop rock and other kinds 
of music — if their history were to just get lost, if 
someone doesn’t take the time to talk to the mu- 
sicians. It doesn’t have to go as far as a reissue, 
but, you know, preserve it. People do that a lot 
today with blogs, and I think it’s commendable. 
Light in the Attic goes a step beyond that. They 
put so much time into these reissues, document- 
ing them for future generations who I hope will 
have access to them. 


One thing I can note is that, with the digital age I worked as a DJ for years and I worked in the 

that we live in, a lot of the music of today is docu- newspaper business as a music journalist for years 


1 34 The Appendix Out Loud 


as well. And over the years, as I’ve been exploring 
music that hasn’t really been documented very 
well, that’s actually something I really get a kick 
out of— finding stuff that’s not Googleable. If I go 
out and I find a 45 on an independent label, and I 
come home and look it up online and there’s no 
information, that’s the kind of stuff that I actively 
want to find all the time. That really excites me: 
that not everything can be found through Google, 
that there’s still a bit of mystery. 

How I connected with Light in the Attic was [that] 
they were looking for information on a Jamaican 
artist by the name of Wayne McGhie. So you type 
“Wayne McGhie” and you might find a couple little 
things, but it doesn’t tell you very much. You look 
in The History of Canadian Music, the encyclopedia, 
and you look up his name in the index and he’s 
nowhere to be found. You look in the Toronto Star 
and the other newspapers of the day and there’s 
no information. You love the music so much, you 
want to know, “How was this record made? It’s in- 
credible! What the heck was going on here?” You 
have to go direct to the source. You have to go to 
the musicians themselves, obviously. That’s been 
a catalyst for a lot of this work. You talk to these 
players and you hear these stories and you listen to 
the history behind these records and it adds a lot 
to them. It provides context. Once you have this 
knowledge, you want to share it with other people, 
so that you can document some of this history. It’s 
really important. 

Michael: 

I have another question about the choice of you 
guys putting out original artwork. A lot of reis- 
sues, like jazz reissues in the seventies and eight- 
ies, would completely remake the artwork. Why do 
you guys choose to put out the original artwork? 

Matt: 

We tend to want to want to stay true to the histori- 
cal piece in our hand, and that means the original 
album cover. 

Kevin: 

It’s nice to have that link, obviously. That’s what 
inspired us in the first place with both of these 
records: it’s the artwork, the albums, you stare at 
them for hours and that’s what inspires. So to be 
able to recreate that and to put that out and share 


what inspired us about these things in the first 
place is phenomenal. 

Matt: 

We try often to find the people who made the 
album cover, but we tend not to be able to find 
them. We found the [cover artist for] Wayne Mc- 
Ghie, though. We spoke to him, or Kevin did. You 
know, you always hope to have more photos from 
the session or good stories, but I don’t think he re- 
membered a damn thing. [Laughs] . I don’t think 
he even remembered the cover. 

Kevin: 

Most people involved in the creative didn’t keep 
stuff. One thing I’ve noticed talking to a lot of the 
veteran musicians and producers, people in the 
sixties and seventies didn’t foresee this future in- 
terest in the music. It was over. The album didn’t 
sell. It was done. No one in their right mind would 
think that thirty years later there’d be these young 
kids and music lovers passionate about these re- 
cordings that didn’t sell at the time. They threw 
out the master tapes. They threw out the original 
artwork. A lot of the artists don’t even have copies 
of their own records anymore. No one could pre- 
dict this renewed interest. 


July 2013 


135 



Heavy Metal as Public History: 

A Review of Turisas, 

Live at the Gramercy Theater 

Cameron B. Strang 


New York, NY, 6 Feb. 2013 

The Finnish metal group Turisas are historians, 
and their performances are public history. Instead 
of spelling out prose narratives, they sing, shout, 
and strum stories about the past that make the 
world of medieval Vikings accessible and epic. 

“Konstantinopolis!” might not be a cry that one 
would expect to cause a hall full of metalheads to 
erupt. But when Turisas belt it out in the chorus 
of their eight-minute saga “Miklagard Overture,” 
it calls forth the wonder that captivated elev- 
enth-century Norse travelers as they first beheld 
the temples and halls of the Byzantine capital. It 
is, simultaneously, a celebration of the Vikings’ 
triumph after braving the portages and rapids of 
the long rivers of Rus and an invocation of their 
future glory as members of the Romaioi emperors’ 
Varangian guard. 

In this thick history, the Vikings’ values, dreams, 
and own sense of history are represented in mu- 
sic. Turisas presents a glorified version of the 


Watch the video for "Miklagard Overture" by Turisas at 
http://appendic.es/m/8 


past, but they do so in a voice that Vikings may 
have recognized as their own as they ventured 
forth “for fame and for gold.” Turisas’s sound — 
heavy, majestic, haunted, and courageous — 
might be a more effective language for creating a 
sense of how Vikings experienced their own lives 
than scholarly prose. 

Founded in 1997, Turisas — named after the ancient 
Finns’ god of war — were part of Europe’s emerg- 
ing folk metal scene, a genre that mixes the power 
of heavy metal with symphonic orchestration and 
mythical or historical themes. Despite shifts in 
membership, the band has achieved international 
popularity in recent years and has spent 2013 tour- 
ing North and South America, Europe, Japan, and 
Israel. Turisas’s first LP, Battle Metal (2004), lacked 
the polish of their more recent albums, yet it intro- 
duced the group’s ongoing critique of academic 
history’s ability to understand past lives: 

Did you ever see history portrayed as an old 
man... waging all things in the balance of rea- 
son? Is not, rather, the genius of history like an 
eternally blooming maiden... humanly warm 
and humanly beautiful? Therefore, if you have 
the capacity to suffer or rejoice with the gener- 
ations that have been... to live among them with 


136 The Appendix Out Loud 



your whole heart and not alone with your 
cold, reflecting judgment, then follow me. 

Turisas’s show in New York was a small step 
toward creating this experience. An audience 
of a few hundred mostly young white men 
(some in face paint, one with chain mail and 
a drinking horn) chanted “Too-ris-ahs” as the 
club’s DJ incongruously played Dire Straits’s 
“Walk of Life.” The six performers appeared 
on stage in their iconic red and black body 
paint while the theme song from Indiana Jones 
and the Temple of Doom trumpeted their arriv- 
al. To set the scene, they piped in a soliloquy 
from their own “Holmgard and Beyond”: 



Turisas in concert. 

Wikimedia Commons 


Who is “I” without a past? A river without a 
source? An event without a cause? Threads 
of different lengths, some longer, some 
shorter, so many of them spun together. 

... then launched into “The March of the Va- 
rangian Guard,” a fist-pumping homage to 
the Vikings-cum-Byzantine warriors who 
fought in Asia Minor on behalf of the “King of 
the Greeks... in the 6542nd year of the world 
[1034 CE].” 



Turisas’s sound was hard, but it wasn’t raw; 
they took the performance seriously and 
echoed the clarity and precision of their stu- 
dio recordings. Unlike their recent albums, 
the concert did not follow a clear narrative. 
Instead, it interspersed some of the group’s 
older mainstays like the drinking song “One 
More” and their metaled-out remake of 
Boney M’s “Rasputin.” After electrifying the 
audience with their first four songs, violinist 
Olli Vanska performed a somber solo dirge 
that added texture to the otherwise intense 
set list. Despite the disjointedness of the con- 
cert’s narrative, frontman Mathias Nygard 
reminded listeners of the vision of the past 
woven throughout their songs. As he pumped 
the audience up for “Miklagard Overture,” 
Nygard invited us to ponder the awe one 
might feel when seeing the Golden Horn for 
the first time. 



An eleventh-century depiction of Varangian guardsmen, 

Norse warriors who served as the personal bodyguards of the 
Byzantine emperors. 

Wikimedia Commons 


July 2013 


137 


Most importantly, the concert was really fun. 

This was public history, even if the audience 
didn’t know it — especially because the audi- 
ence didn’t know it. It was history translat- 
ed into present exhilaration. Music makes 
history feel less mediated than prose narra- 
tives. This is not because musicians impose 
their perspectives on the past any less than 
authors — both thoroughly shape the sto- 
ries they tell. But musical histories leave less 
space for audience members to determine 
their own reception of the narrative. A song, 
like history, moves at its own pace and listen- 
ers must keep up; a book moves at a reader’s 
pace. Musicians can use a song’s tempo, key, 
and timbre to promote a particular mood be- 
fore introducing narrative; authors have little 
say in how their readers are feeling when they 
pick up a book. Listeners access the sense of 
history that a musician intended to create 
more directly; readers have a greater say in 
their own interpretation of written history. 

The detachment created by reading may be 
necessary for critical scholarship, but music 


helps audiences interject less “cold, reflect- 
ing judgment” between themselves and a 
particular historical vision. Musical history is 
as constructed as any other, but, as a genre, 
it has a deeper pedigree than written theses, 
harkening back to a tradition at least as old 
as Homer. If Beowulf-era bards had had elec- 
tric violins, the sagas they performed in their 
ring-lords’ halls may have sounded some- 
thing like a Turisas concert. 

Turisas, far more than their counterparts in 
academic history, push listeners to empathize 
with specific historical actors. This is an un- 
apologetically subjective approach to history: 
we all experience the world subjectively, and 
any effort to make an audience experience — 
and not just reflect on — the past would, it 
seems, demand this rejection of ostensible 
objectivity. Turisas knows that one man’s 
conquest is another’s ruin — “We’ve enslaved 
the world, we’ve slaughtered, we’ve burned, 
all in the name of our faith. Only a fool would 
expect others to settle for anything less, the 
tide is about to turn” — but they nevertheless 
insist on presenting their narrative within 



Reenactors at the Jorvik Viking Festival, 2013. 

Allan Harris, via Flickr 


138 The Appendix Out Loud 


what they consider to be a Viking moral uni- 
verse. The violence in Turisas’s music is nei- 
ther racialized (“diversity is what unites us”) 
nor overtly misogynistic, yet they rarely de- 
viate from the hyper-masculine heroic ideal 
that they view as central to how Viking adven- 
turers experienced life. One need not endorse 
this ethos (I don’t) to appreciate that it played 
a big part in Viking history and, when taken 
with the requisite grains of salt, enjoy music 
that expresses it through stories and sounds. 

Collectively, the albums The Varangian Way 
(2007) and Stand up and Fight (2011) tell the sto- 
ry of a Viking band that sets out from Scan- 
dinavia for Constantinople. For Turisas, the 
Great City was only a superficial goal; the real 
glory was having the courage to risk all in pur- 
suit of a place in history: “Many dangers lie 
ahead. Some of us may never return. Rather 
sold as a slave to the Saracens than chained to 
your bed, chained by your life.” Led by Hakon 
the Bastard, Turisas’s Vikings sail and drag 
their longboats across Eurasia and, by the end 
of The Varangian Way, drift into the Byzantine 
capital and join the emperor’s service. Stand 
up and Fight picks up the story. While fighting 
Byzantium’s enemies on land and sea, Hakon 
learns of a royal death back north and flees 
Constantinople to claim a throne of his own. 
Here the narrative’s chronology is disrupted, 
but it seems that the Vikings’ fate was tied 
to Byzantium’s: the 1453 fall of Constantino- 
ple and Hakon’s eleventh- century death are 
twinned in the album’s last two songs. 

But even death did not mark the end of Ha- 
kon’s history. In his final line, Hakon realizes 
that “it’s not about what you take with you, it’s 
about what you leave behind. And there, on 
the side of a lion, this story found its end.” 
Hakon’s ability to tell his own story did, quite 
literally, end on a lion’s side: around 1043, one 
Hakon and his compatriots inscribed part of 
their tale into the flank of an ancient lion 
statue in Piraeus, the Athenian harbor where 
Turisas’s Hakon perished. What Hakon left 
behind was a thread connecting past and his- 


tory, a thread that Turisas has picked up and 
lengthened. 

Turisas glories in strength — the prowess of 
warriors, the daring of Greens and Blues rac- 
ing around the hippodrome, the seemingly 
invincible walls of Constantinople — but they 
also know that strength’s eventual failure is as 
inevitable as it is unexpected. The choir-sung 
conclusion of “End of an Empire” wonders: 
“So strong is our faith, the world stays as is, 
until it hits, like shattering glass to bits. How 
did this happen? How could this happen? 
How could the empire fall?” Turisas recogniz- 
es that the fight for Constantinople did not 
end when Sultan Mehmet blasted through 
its long-standing walls. History is battle — as 
much a contest between historians as a con- 
versation among them — and Turisas, no less 
than professors or curators, are its warriors: 

History: just what’s agreed, yet it will judge 
both you and me. Shields and swords will 
win you wars, but in the end, the battle for 
our hearts [is] fought by bards. 


The author thanks Tyson Strang for con- 
tributing his insights to this piece and his 
energy to the concert. 


July 201 3 139 



1 40 The Appendix Out Loud 


Not-So-Funny Pages: 

Kinyras 

John C. Franklin and Glynnis Fawkes 


Sing to us of the king, Clio — that musical king and divine lyre — who ruled Cyprus with wealth and 
song; who died when he lost to Apollo in a musical throwdown. 

Sing to us 0/ Kinyras! 

Glynnis Fawkes and John C. Franklin, pictures and words for “Kinyras,” one of this issue’s selections 
for our Not-So-Funny Pages section, met on the island of Cyprus. Both were studying the classical 
and archaeological Greek world, but each did so from their distinctive creative foundations: Fawkes 
was an artist, and Franklin a musician. Bronze Aye sparks flew, and they got together with plans 
of collaborating on ancient music uideos. The music uideos hauen’t happened yet, though they did 
get married and haue two kids. A veteran of ten years of archaeological excauations in the eastern 
Mediterranean, Fawkes now draws witty comics, works as an archaeological illustrator, and paints. 
Franklin is an Associate Professor of Classics at the Uniuersity 0/ Vermont, an expert on ancient 
Greek and Near Eastern music, and a composer of scores in the style of ancient Greek music. They 
live in Burlington. 

The following comic is their very first artistic collaboration, though both have worked before on the 
Cypriot king Kinyras and his place in Greek story cycles. Fawkes’s nine-page comic of the story of 
Myrrh a and Kinyras was among the notables 0/ Best American Comics 2012, edited by Jessi- 
ca Abel and Matt Madden. Franklin's forthcoming book with Oxford Uniuersity Press, Kinyras: 
The Divine Lyre is the text on which this comic, or “graphic article,” is based (and also features 
Fawkes’s illustrations). For this comic, Franklin came up with the script, and Glynnis contributed 
the art and lettering, adapting and re-imagining scenes to dramatize the text. 

Their work is not yet done. Fawkes is planning a larger project in which she’ll expand on the stories 
o/Paris and Helen before they reached Troy; together, they hope to continue the collaboration that 
began with this piece for The Appendix. We can’t wait. 


> 0 ; 

"//W N 


July 201 3 141 


p. 








K lnyras, in Greco - 
f\oman mythology, 
an ancient Kin £7 
_ic>y Cyprus- He 
•represents the- 
island’s political and 
cultural situation 
prior to tlie exten- 
sive Aegean mi- 
rations there in. the 

^Z ,k and ll fi Centuries- 


H /though KinyrAs "was the center of an 
extensive myth cycle, he has remained 
an obscure figure since the sources are highly 
fragmentary and widely scattered, ranging 

from h/omer to Byz-Amtinc poets a nd Scholars. 


aV/ 


4. . 

4% 

r/e^wjfSsX’Oi' 

PifP' 

/©■? /r*> 1 


pv\\' 




P/i n etienni * 

Cyf'tTh *' Fr *™°- 
£t* 

the ,- s / a ^4/or 




1 42 The Appendix Out Loud 


T he best Known, episode,, thinks to a /ate re- telling by Ovid, is tiinyras" incestuous 
seduction by A Ayrrha., his own daughter, 





July 201 3 143 




The aromatic drops of which wort used to 
anoint the. babv Adonis (Ahrumorp t-iases 10 . 29 * -Joi), 



I^lcwan describes Cypriot perfume as 


''the. 'moist charm of Kinyras ” (?.?/ pmgf), 



1 21 an alternative Cypriot tradition , 
Myrrha becomes the myrtle bush- 


thus connecting him with, a Cypriot 
industry which goes bach to the Late 
bronze Age (LB A), as known from 
archaeological remains^ and S’ereral 
m rh century documents from 
Amarna whieh deal with royal 
gift exchange between Egypt and 
the King of Alashya (generally believed 
to be all or- part of Cyprus). 



T he Island’s early wealth through, maritime, ventures had alasting impact on 
mythological memory. Pindar refers to the “blessed fortune.. . which once 
upon a time freighted Kmyras with riches in Cyprus on the j’ea” ( Ncm. s.i?-u) 


K II MYRAS' £^IAYB<? 

l/W£^ C, nn _ __ 



1 44 The Appendix Out Loud 





|c cording to an 
ancient proverb, 
K inyras was not 
merely rich, but 
thrice as wealthy 
as /VI i das (Vyrfaeus 

li .6 West /£~% etc .) . 


wealth and power explains why, for Homer, Kinyras treated o 
terms with tT<jannemnon, tending him a marvelous ly worked 
thorax as a friendship-gift (II. it.io-z 3): — \ w r ur 


r) 



TClexf In furn he donned the 

' yfw- 

Jl f corselet round his chest 

\v> 

Which once Kinyras gave him 



as a ho stmg-gift 
For Wt had heard a great 
report on Cyprus~the /fchaearis 
Were to fail m ships to Troy - -wherefore 
He- <jave the corselet to him. 
Cultivating favor with the. Kiny. 



T he relationship between K/nyras and thgamemnon was treated at greater 
length in the lost epic Known as the Cyf>n2i, which dealt with the, many 
episodes leading up to the Trojan War. One of its lost episodes was known 
as the Hosting by Kinyras (so Eustathius), in which a Greek embassy urqed 
hinyras to contribute ships for the expedition agamst Troy: 

dh 


M enelaus 

Went with 

Ody SSCCdS 
Talthyfcius to 
Kinyras in 
Cyprus, and 
tried to purs- 
uade him to 

join the Rattle. 



July 201 3 145 










This must be somehow 
related to an apparently 
local Cypriot tradition 
which was related in the / ^ 

^ rh century dC E by 
Theopompos who, in dis- 
cussing the brilliant 
career of Euajoras of 
Cypriot Salamis (ft 4lo- 
374 Bce), explained " how 
the Greeks with ttgamem- 
non gained power over 
Cyprus, driving off the men 
With Hinpras, of whom the 
flma^hus/ahs are. the 
remnants 7 '’ (fcvk us f i°s). 


foycn up, /}v"3thut/^y 
v.'re movin') in -s 



This digression must relate to 
Euagoras’ claim of descent from 
a daughter of Hinyras (?^s. ), 
probably part of a propaganda 
Campaign designed to support his 
bid for island' wide control. 


Pever&l other K.i n y ras episodes may he tentatively reconstructed. Homer Knew that Paris 
O and Helen spent time in this area before returning to Troy ( It. s, ms-si). Such 
adventures Were also found in the Cypria- / ^ 

' *' s- ■ r.TP.or 



July 201 3 147 




Send ^/exavider, taK iny 
good care lest tic be 
pursued, whiled away 
wweli time, in Phocne cia 
Cyprus. (ap-i/oU- fy/t. 3. 


and 



|fj alternative storm in Dictys of Crete (mi.t™. i s) 
brought the lovers first to Cyprus: 



1 48 The Appendix Out Loud 





I n these lost tales 
it was very probably 
Kinyras himself who 
hosted Paris and 
Helen, since epic 
Convention required 
royal travelers t° be 
entertained by r°y a bp 
And from whom but 
a kin^ could Paris 
acquire ships ? 



July 201 3 149 



THE POETICS OF EASTERN WANDERING 

THE TRIP (HODOS) Xf/V/A 


MOTIVATION WEATHCR ARRIVAL HOST ACT GUfSTACT 



TFRMINU.S 


FUNDRAISING 


FkflOTOS) 


RcHJRN 

.HOME 


KNOSTOt) 


PrtOEAl/ CIA 


VOVAOE 


Cy EVASION 


(nous) 


MVTHICA 


RtCclVtSj\, 
: (oifjs. 7 j 

NfWS.H(ir)^ 


rsi/cj )9' 
^ (GIFTS. 7 , 
Hiws.mr)lA 


Mm 


V RARt K 

Apiuag 

(HARPMEj 


% 


FOUND cm 


:v/|\ v 


ESCAPE 


A PL X 




AiIACKJ 




CAPTURED/ 
vENSlAVED , 



(nous) 


Y et Several sources as serf that Cyprus was not Kmyras’ or/y/nal home, 
whitk they variously offer up as Cilicia, phoeneci a, "Syria’ or "Assyria’. 



K inyras gained great depth 
and complexity when in 
1968 a god ca//ed K/nnZru 
was discovered in the 
r pantheon’ texts of (dgar/t 
(actually lists of goc/s 
receiving offerings in state 
rituals. 






T he Kinn^iru was a 
lyre Known through- 
out the West Semitic 
world, textvally attested 

-from c. 'Z.'d'OO onwards 
(at jEbla in Syria). ]t is 
plausibly associated 
with numerous images 
in the same geograph- 
ical and temporal 
range. 


1 50 The Appendix Out Loud 


T hat the. fiinn&ru and its payers are. -found in peri pH 
in the. Second miUe^ni urn (Egypt, Hattusha, Ala/aKh,) 
that the instrument was e.yually Known on contemporary C-yp 


era I and hybrid forms 
makes it all Hut certain 




T his is corroborated 
by an Egypt/ ar izing 
-fiaence olisn in the 
Cyprus Museum , 
whose correct inter pret- 
iation has been over looked. 


July 201 3 151 





D ivini 2 ed musical 

instruments are well 
Attested in Mesopotamia . 
God - lists cjive over a 
hundred individually 
named lyre -qod s 
(b&lay), whoes nature 
and function are clar- 
ified by several literary 
and -ritual texts (esp 
the Gudea Cylinders, 

C. XIOO). 

The Mesopof amian 

evidence maKes It 

S ractically certain that 
ie divinized /<inn%vu 
n/as not restricted to 
Ugarit, but more widely 
Current in Syria and 
the Lev ant. 


D asic to proving rhc Kinship of /r/nndru 'And Kinyras is evidence that 
the latter had musical qualities. A myth relayed by the 12™ -century 
arch bishop- scholar Eustathius is crucial: 


/L/tnyras) perished competing 
AP\ musically with Apol l°~ 
because he was an expert 
in music; which is even 
why Kinyras was named 
by derivation from the 
Kinyra-lyre— his daughters, 
who were fifty in number, 
leaped into the sea and ^ 


.changed into halcyons 
(fustaf-b. ad Honi 1 / 11.10^. 




1 52 The Appendix Out Loud 



Penally i wporfant" is the poe- 1 Pindar (c- t6S Bee 
Li ivho, sketching a Cypriof choral scene, 
cal/s Kinyras a priest of Aphrodite a nd 
Companion of Apollo: 


Cypriot voices 
muck resound 
around Kinyras 
• cherished 
priest of Aphro- 
dite.. ■ qolden — 
haired -Apollo's 
aladly loved ” 
Xfyth. 2 . 15 - 17 ). 




K inyras the lyrisf- 
sumVed /'nfr> fhe 
Byz-anhne period. 

An anonymous poet 
praises a musical 
friend as "some 
Orpheus or Thramis 
or even Kinyras./ 
They charmed kvihh 
Sonus trees, animals, 
and sfoneS ” (c ramey, 

Artecd- Par 4, 2-14 ■ $'6>) • 


July 201 3 153 






1 54 The Appendix Out Loud 



nger^d 


T hese early connections with Kingship would explain why Ki/iyyas line 
on softer the -fall of Al&shiya as a ‘national’ symbol of the Cypriot 
golden age. Thus he continued to mediate between indigenous Cypriots 
and sub-/V\yeenaean immigrants , both an Optimus Aujusf" 
and the (fyiasi — Phoenician King disloyal to A^aiTtemnoil. 



/\qaper\or 


ean 
atipn 
legends 

Places linked to 
Kiryras by mythical 
genealogy 


A middle around is found in the dynasties of Paphos And SalAmis, 

Who clan wed (maternal^ descent from Kinyr as. At Paphos this allegation 
was bplstered by real continuity in the. cult of 'Aphrodite* ^ 



IN the. Ledr/ans’ precinct of 
Pfaphia, a scion of glorious] 
Fathers, Archaios, (admiring/y 
ereetjed (sc. a statue of ) 
Timarcho’s son, of the Paphians 
outstanding King]~ 
NiKokles, of div[inc- voiced] 
K'nyras [descendant], 

(MlrFOR.0,^1 6S.2 ri9tl), v-l si). 


July 201 3 155 





TU'inj/ras is most unusual in letting us reconstruct the complete* life*-cycle 
JT\ o'f a myfholopic.al figure. He was born of ritual music. trfaen the frm — 
lyre was diviniz-ed on the Mesopotamian model by the second millenium. 






1 56 The Appendix Out Loud 



Not-So -Funny Pages: 

The Origins of the Blues 

JTW 


JTW has been creating minicomics since childhood, but only started making comics seriously in 
2004, when he self-published his first zine/comic, Lunchbox. Since then he has been putting out his 
own series, Black Dayz, while contributing to various anthologies and being part of the DC Con- 
spiracy. He also produces and DJs soul, hip hop and jazz. You can see more of his work at 
http :// ttrxpharmacy. tumblr. com 

For his first piece in The Appendix, he adapted a 1947 recording by the ethnomusicologist Alan 
Lomax of three bluesmen — Big Bill Broozy (1893-1958), Memphis Slim (1915-1988), and Sonny 
Boy Williamson (1914-1948). At Lomax’s prompting, Broozy, Slim, and Williamson try to explain 
the origins of the blues: a loner’s rejection, to forget troubles, chain gangs, revenge... To boil it 
down, though, misses the point. While they play their instruments, out spill stories of violence, 
troubles, racism, pleasure, and finally, the murder ballad to end all murder ballads, Stackalee, also 
known as Stagger Lee. 

Lomax’s recordings are a national treasure, a resource of music and storytelling that continue to 
inspire future generations. But in JTW’s inspired comic art adaptation of one session, Lomax’s 
disembodied voices — Broozy, Slim, and Williamson — shake off the ethnomusicologist’s tape and 
become visual once again, revived in black and white. Lomax is left out, mostly, and JTW instead 
focuses on how the blues was the “release of the pain and stress that eneryday life had inflicted on the 
people 0/ those times,” he recently obserned — “not just for African Americans, but for everybody.” 

“It seems like history is repeating itself these days.” 


> 0 ; 

"/n\ N 


July 201 3 157 



I FIW MYSELF PISCOVERING A PLAYLIST CONTAINING A MY PRESTO DISC RECORPItt 6 OF BLUESMEN 
BIG BILL BROOZ Y WS-WSt), MEMPHIS SUM {IflS-Mt), AW SONNY BOY WILLIAMSON WWW) BY ALAN 
LOMAX IN NY THROUGH OPAL HISTORY AW SONG THE ARTISTS EXPLAIN THE ORIGINS AW NATURE 
OF THE g LUES I've 0EC10EP TO ILLUSTRATE EXCERPTS FROM XT ANP SHARE IT WITH ALL OF YOU. 

rHE BRHiWS «l THE BUIES 4 


THE PLAVUST 6TAP1S WITH MEMPHIS SUM 
SINGING THE CHARMING SONG OF 
PERSEVERANCE "LIFE IS LIRE THAT".. 



1 58 The Appendix Out Loud 





July 201 3 159 





THE PLAYLIST 6065 SACK 
TO THE CONVERSATION. 






^expze&eiNG^ 
Hl5 FEELING 
TO TH5 PEOPLE! 

I KNOWN &UV5 
WHO WANNA CU55 
OUT THE 3055 BUT, 




THAT'S MY 
IPSA OF T HS 
BLUES, MOSTLY A 
REVENGE THING. YOU 
WANNA SAY SUMTHIN' 

, YOU CAN'T. YOU SING , 
IT. SIGNIFYIN' 

axe. 

Y/u 


WELL THE THING 
HAS COME TO SHOWDOWN. 
WE WANNA KNOW WHY A MAN 
HAVE THE BLUES. I WORKED ON 
LEVEE CAMPS, CHAIN GANGS, 
ROCK CAMPS AND I HEAR GUYS 
SINGIN 1 . THE BLUES IS FROM 
THE HEART I KNOW THAT. 


5 AY IT TO 
' THE HORSE Y'RNOW. 
MARE LIRE THE 
HORSE RICREP 
'EM L 


THE CONVERSATION SWITCHES TO WOW 
CAMPS, ESPECIALLY LEVEE CAMPS WHERE 
FIGHTING WAS A PAILV OCCURRENCE. 




v’see those 

GUVS— A LEVEE 
CAMR WHERE I 
WAS WORRIN' LIRE 
IE ME ANP SUM 
kWERE ARGUING 


..THEN SONNY 
GO TELL THE 
BOSS. BIG BOSS 
WOULD COME OUT AN' 
HOLD THE WHOLE 
GANG UP.. 


f EVEZYBOPY STOP! 
f WG GONNA HAVE THIS 1 
OUT EIGHT NOW! 

IT GONNA SE ALL 
OVER WITH l 


I/ll 


IN T Hose 
DAYS AS LONG A5 
YOU A GOOP WORKER, 
YOU COULD KILL ANYBODY 
DOWN THSRe. AS 
LONG AS YOU KILL 
A NEGRO! 


i • , 


MISSISSIPP I 
T , 



PINKY 


ALBERT 


THEN W6 START FIGHVN' 
SUM WHOOPS ME, THEN 
WE GET UP, WE SHAKE HANDS 
THAT'S THAT. BRUSH OFF 
AN 1 GO BACK TO WORK! 


S3 


THAT'S 

RIGHT. 


\ 


I KNEW ONE 
' GUY, MISSISSIPPI, 

A WORKER KILLEP 
HIM NAMEP ALBERT. 
THE STORY IS HE 
WAS GOING WITH 
A GIRL NAMEP 
PINKY, ALBERT'S 
WIFE. /' 

m' 


f* 


THEN BILL RECOUNTS 
A HAUNTING TALE.. 


1 60 The Appendix Out Loud 




MI55I55IRRI CAME TO 
THE BAR HOU5E ONE 
^ f l NIGHT ABOUT 1A O' CLOCK. 

, W F OFAJO OF U5 WA5 PRINKIN' 
AN' 50 ME ONE HOLLEREP OUT 



July 201 3 161 






The Appendix 

Appendixed. 

By Michael J. Schmidt and Brian Jones 


In June 1939, Alfred Lion recorded the Sidney Be- 
chet Quintet in a radio station in New York City 
for his small jazz label Blue Note. The session was 
not Blue Note’s first (although it had only been 
in operation since January), but in many ways 
it represented a key characteristic of the label: 
it brought together musicians of a diverse set of 
geographical origins. Bechet was part of the first 
generation of New Orleans musicians to bring 
jazz outside of the city; Meade Lux Lewis was a 
boogie woogie pianist from Chicago; the bassist 
Johnny Williams was from Memphis; Teddy Bunn 
was a guitarist from Long Island; and the swing 
drummer Sid Catlett was born in Indiana, but 
grew up in Chicago. 

The aggregation went beyond this session, and it 
had a much wider geo-intellectual significance. 
Blue Note formed the personal, intellectual, and 
artistic intersection point of two different major 
twentieth century migrations. Lion and his part- 
ner Francis Wolff — the owners and producers of 
the label — were part of a large wave of Jewish Ger- 
mans who fled the advent of the Nazi racial state 


during the 1930s and settled in the United States. 
The musicians they recorded, on the other hand, 
were African Americans who were participants 
in the movement of the Second Great Migration 
from the South to the North between 1940 and 
1970 (or were children of migrants of the first mi- 
gration earlier in the century). 

Blue Note was a phenomenal gatherer of musical 
talent from across the States. Its New York and 
Hackensack studios became a center of gravity 
that pulled on the wide field of small, local Amer- 
ican jazz scenes and it mixed and matched musi- 
cians imbued with Detroit, Dallas, Los Angeles, 
and Philly’s personal musical inflections. 

These maps are cartographic illustrations of the 
Blue Note phenomenon. 

Finally, we have a few poignant examples of indi- 
vidual recording sessions which represent micro- 
cosms of the whole phenomenon; for a few hours 
or a couple of days, musicians blended the Ameri- 
can sonic-geographical expanse. 



Above is a sample of 37 German and Austrian intellectuals and artists who escaped, their birthplaces, and their adopted American 
homes during Blue Note's first year; they represent the immense resettlement from the continent to the United States. Most lived in Berlin, 
Frankfurt am Main, or Vienna when the Nazis came to power in 1933, but many also had brief sojourns in Paris, London, or Italy. 



Below, the incredible range of home cities and local scenes from which Blue Note culled its roster from 1 939 to 1 967, when Lion retired 
after selling the company to Liberty Records. The majority of players during this period (around 430 of the period's 546 players) are 
represented; those who were left off had uncertain origins. Although large cities like New York, Philadelphia, Chicago, and Detroit are 
the densest points, the majority of musicians came from small to mid-size Southern and Midwestern cities. 



Bobby Hutcherson - vibes 

Kenny Dorham - trumpet 

Thelonious Monk - piano 

Los Angeles, CA 

Fairfield, TX; Austin, TX 

Rocky Mountain, NC 

Joe Henderson - tenor saxophone 

J. J. Johnson - trombone 

Art Blakey - drums 

Lima, OH 

Indianpolis, IN 

Pittsburgh, PA 

Duke Pearson - piano 

Hank Mobley - tenor saxophone 

Sahib Shihab - alto saxophc 

Atlanta, GA 

Eastman, GA; Elizabeth, NJ 

Savannah, GA 

Grant Green - guitar 

Cecil Payne - baritone saxophone 

Milt Jackson - vibes 

St. Louis, MO 

Brooklyn, NY 

Detroit, Ml 

Bob Cranshaw - bass 

Horace Silver - piano 

Al McKibbon - bass 

Evanston, IL 

Norwalk, CT 

Chicago, IL 

Al Harewood - drums 

Percy Heath 

Kenny Dorham - trumpet 

Brooklyn, NY 

Wilmington, NC; Philadelphia, PA 

Fairfield, TX; Austin, TX 


Oscar Pettiford - bass 

Lou Donaldson - alto sax 


Okmulgee, OK 

Badin, NC 


Art Blakey - drums 

Lucky Thompson - tenor sax 


Pittsburgh, PA 

Columbia, SC; Detroit, Ml 


Carlos "Potato" Valdes - conga 

Nelson Boyd - bass 


Havana 

Camden, NJ 


Richie Goldberg - cowbell 

Max Roach - drums 


Houston, TX 

Newland, NC 


July 201 3 163 



Contributors 


Amber Abbas is a teacher of South Asian History 
at St. Joseph’s University in Philadelphia, PA. She 
loves stories, cycling and international travel. 

Will Buckingham is a novelist, philosopher and 
Reader in Creative Writing at De Montfort Univer- 
sity. His most recent novel is The Descent of the Lyre 
(Roman Books 2013). 

Veit Erlmann is a Endowed Chair of Music History 
and a professor of ethnomusicology and anthro- 
pology at the University of Texas at Austin. 

Glynnis Fawkes is a painter, cartoonist, and ar- 
chaeological illustrator living in Burlington, VT. 

John Franklin is a Associate Professor of Classics 
at the University of Vermont. 

Tim Fulford is a professor of English at De Mont- 
fort University, Leicester, UK. 

Glenda Goodman is a musicologist and an ACLS 
New Faculty Fellow in the History Department at 
the University of Southern California. 

Mark Hailwood is a social and cultural histori- 
an of everyday life in early modern England, and 
from October 2013 will be a lecturer at St Hilda’s 
College, University of Oxford. 

Christopher Heaney is an editor and co-founder 
of The Appendix, a PhD candidate in history at the 
University of Texas at Austin, and the author of 
Cradle of Gold. 

Brian Jones is a founder ofThe Appendix in charge 
of online and digital publishing and a PhD candi- 
date in history at the University of Texas at Austin. 

JTW is a sequential artist, publisher, acrylic paint- 
er, and music producer from Hyattsville, MD. 

Melissa Kagen is a PhD candidate in German 
Studies at Stanford. 


Miriam Kolar is a scholar studying the human per- 
ception of sound in cultural contexts, and leads 
archaeoacoustics research at Chavin de Huantar, 
Peru. 

Bernie Krause is an American musician, author, 
soundscape recordist and bio-acoustician. 

Mary Caton Lingold is a PhD candidate in English 
at Duke University. 

Jonathan Meiburg is a musician, writer, and orni- 
thologist. He lives in New York City. 

Zoila S. Mendoza is a Peruvian anthropologist and 
Professor of Native American Studies, at the Uni- 
versity of California, Davis. 

Rachel Ozanne is a scholar of and writer on reli- 
gion and U.S history. 

Michael J. Schmidt is a PhD candidate in modern 
German history and sound culture at the Universi- 
ty of Texas at Austin. 

Danielle Skeehan is a Postdoctoral Associate of 
Transatlantic and Early American Studies at Sam 
Houston State University. 

Chris A. Smith is a magazine writer and college 
instructor in San Francisco. 

Cameron B. Strang is a PhD candidate in history 
at the University of Texas at Austin. 

Jonathan Webster is a pianist and teacher living in 
Areata, California. 


1 64 The Appendix Out Loud